(7651,'File selection handler settings','','none'),(7652,'Source module not found for @migration_id.','','none'),(7653,'Destination module not found for @migration_id.','','none'),(7654,'User selection handler settings','','none'),(7655,'Views selection handler settings','','none'),(7656,'Czechia','','10.4.5'),(7657,'Go to page @key','','10.5.6'),(7658,'%workflow workflow: Use %transition transition.','','none'),(7659,'Offset must be a number greater than or equal to 0.','','none'),(7660,'A collection of states and transitions between those states.','','none'),(7661,'A particular condition that something is in at a specific time. The usage of the state is determined by a module that harnesses the Workflows module. For example, Content Moderation allows a state to be used for moderation of content by assigning a given state to a content item.','','none'),(7662,'The process of changing from one state to another. A transition can occur from multiple states, but only to one state.','','none'),(7663,'Are you sure you want to remove the %label block?','','none'),(7664,'Select the @entity_type types for the @workflow workflow','','none'),(7665,'Select the @entity_type_plural_label for the @workflow workflow','','none'),(7666,'Make sure that <strong>access to the database</strong> for the old site is available from this new site.','','none'),(7667,'<strong>If the old site has private files</strong>, a copy of its files directory must also be accessible on the host of this new site.','','none'),(7668,'<strong>Do not add any content to the new site</strong> before upgrading. Any existing content is likely to be overwritten by the upgrade process. See <a href=\":url\">the upgrade preparation guide</a>.','','none'),(7669,'The upgrade can take a long time. It is better to upgrade from a local copy of your site instead of directly from your live site.','','none'),(7670,'\"Audio\" media source configuration','','none'),(7671,'Access media overview','','10.5.6'),(7672,'Users with this permission can access the media overview page.','','10.5.6'),(7673,'\"Video\" media source configuration','','none'),(7674,'Set default value','','10.4.7'),(7675,'Upgrade analysis report','','none'),(7676,'Requires the \"View any unpublished content\" or \"View own unpublished content\" permission','','none'),(7677,'The %field_name entity reference field (entity_type: %entity_type, bundle: %bundle) no longer has any valid bundle it can reference. The field is not working correctly anymore and has to be adjusted.','','none'),(7678,'Compatible','','none'),(7679,'Moderation state filter','','none'),(7680,'Response failed validation.\nResponse:\n@data\n\nErrors:\n@errors','','none'),(7681,'Cannot change the install profile from %profile to %new_profile once Drupal is installed.','','none'),(7682,'Disclaimer block','','none'),(7683,'Entity action','','none'),(7684,'@type_label bundle','','10.5.6'),(7685,'Use field label instead of the \"On\" label as the label.','','none'),(7686,'There is no moderated @label yet. Only pending versions of @label, such as drafts, are listed here.','','none'),(7687,'The image file is invalid or the image type is not allowed. Allowed types: %types','','none'),(7688,'The image was resized to fit within the maximum allowed dimensions of %dimensions pixels. The new dimensions of the resized image are %new_widthx%new_height pixels.','','none'),(7689,'The image was resized to fit within the maximum allowed height of %height pixels. The new dimensions of the resized image are %new_widthx%new_height pixels.','','none'),(7690,'The image was resized to fit within the maximum allowed width of %width pixels. The new dimensions of the resized image are %new_widthx%new_height pixels.','','none'),(7691,'The resized image is too small. The minimum dimensions are %dimensions pixels and after resizing, the image size will be %widthx%height pixels.','','none'),(7692,'The image is too small. The minimum dimensions are %dimensions pixels and the image size is %widthx%height pixels.','','none'),(7693,'One or more files could not be uploaded.','','none'),(7694,'Media display format settings','','none'),(7695,'Show playback controls','','none'),(7696,'Audio file display format settings','','none'),(7697,'Video file display format settings','','none'),(7698,'Replace the file name by its description when available','','none'),(7699,'Use description as link text','','none'),(7700,'Display the file using an HTML5 audio tag.','','none'),(7701,'Playback controls: %controls','','none'),(7702,'Multiple file display: Multiple HTML tags','','none'),(7703,'Multiple file display: One HTML tag with multiple sources','','none'),(7704,'Display the file using an HTML5 video tag.','','none'),(7705,'Root-relative file URL','','none'),(7706,'An entity field containing a file URI, and a computed root-relative file URL.','','none'),(7707,'@title field is required if there is @uri input.','','none'),(7708,'The Media module manages the creation, editing, deletion, settings, and display of media. Items are typically images, documents, slideshows, YouTube videos, tweets, Instagram photos, etc. You can reference media items from any other content on your site. For more information, see the <a href=\":media\">online documentation for the Media module</a>.','','none'),(7709,'Listing media items','','none'),(7710,'Media items are listed at the <a href=\":media-collection\">media administration page</a>.','','none'),(7711,'Adding media to other content','','none'),(7712,'Users with permission to administer content types can add media support by adding a media reference field to the content type on the content type administration page. (The same is true of block types, taxonomy terms, user profiles, and other content that supports fields.) A media reference field can refer to any configured media type. It is possible to allow multiple media types in the same field.','','none'),(7713,'Differences between Media, File, and Image reference fields','','none'),(7714,'<em>Media</em> reference fields offer several advantages over basic <em>File</em> and <em>Image</em> references:','','none'),(7715,'Media reference fields can reference multiple media types in the same field.','','none'),(7716,'Fields can also be added to media types themselves, which means that custom metadata like descriptions and taxonomy tags can be added for the referenced media. (Basic file and image fields do not support this.)','','none'),(7717,'Media types for audio and video files are provided by default, so there is no need for additional configuration to upload these media.','','none'),(7718,'Contributed or custom projects can provide additional media sources (such as third-party websites, Twitter, etc.).','','none'),(7719,'Existing media items can be reused on any other content items with a media reference field.','','none'),(7720,'For more information, see the <a href=\"@help_url\">Media help page</a>.','','none'),(7721,'Media Name','','none'),(7722,'%type_name: Create new media','','10.5.6'),(7723,'%type_name: Edit own media','','10.5.6'),(7724,'%type_name: Edit any media','','10.5.6'),(7725,'%type_name: Delete own media','','10.5.6'),(7726,'%type_name: Delete any media','','10.5.6'),(7727,'<em>The media source cannot be changed after the media type is created.</em>','','10.4.5'),(7728,'Use audio files for reusable media.','','none'),(7729,'Use video files for reusable media.','','none'),(7730,'The destination system contains data which was not created by a migration.','','none'),(7731,'Migrate Drupal settings','','none'),(7732,'source_module enforcement tags','','none'),(7733,'Old site','','none'),(7734,'The site you want to upgrade.','','none'),(7735,'New site','','none'),(7736,'Preparation steps','','none'),(7737,'WARNING: Content may be overwritten on your new site.','','none'),(7738,'I acknowledge I may lose data. Continue anyway.','','none'),(7739,'There is conflicting content of these types:','','none'),(7740,'There is translated content of these types:','','none'),(7741,'It looks like you are migrating translated content from your old site. Possible ID conflicts for translations are not automatically detected in the current version of Drupal. Refer to the <a target=\"_blank\" href=\":id-conflicts-handbook\">upgrade handbook</a> for instructions on how to avoid ID conflicts with translated content.','','none'),(7742,'On the <a href=\":cache-settings\">Performance page</a>, you can configure how long browsers and proxies may cache pages based on the Cache-Control header; this setting is ignored by the Internal Page Cache module, which caches pages permanently until invalidation, unless they carry an Expires header. There is no other configuration.','','none'),(7743,'The Settings Tray module allows users with the <a href=\":administer_block_permission\">Administer blocks</a> and <a href=\":contextual_permission\">Use contextual links</a> permissions to edit blocks without visiting a separate page. For more information, see the <a href=\":handbook_url\">online documentation for the Settings Tray module</a>.','','none'),(7744,'Editing blocks in place','','none'),(7745,'To edit blocks in place, either click the <strong>Edit</strong> button in the toolbar and then click on the block, or choose \"Quick edit\" from the block\'s contextual link. (See the <a href=\":contextual\">Contextual Links module help</a> for more information about how to use contextual links.)','','none'),(7746,'The Settings Tray for the block will open in a sidebar, with a compact form for configuring what the block shows.','','none'),(7747,'Save the form and the changes will be immediately visible on the page.','','none'),(7748,'The ID of the node to which these statistics apply.','','none'),(7749,'Specify the format of the syslog entry. Available variables are: <dl><dt><code>!base_url</code></dt><dd>Base URL of the site.</dd><dt><code>!timestamp</code></dt><dd>Unix timestamp of the log entry.</dd><dt><code>!type</code></dt><dd>The category to which this message belongs.</dd><dt><code>!ip</code></dt><dd>IP address of the user triggering the message.</dd><dt><code>!request_uri</code></dt><dd>The requested URI.</dd><dt><code>!referer</code></dt><dd>HTTP Referer if available.</dd><dt><code>!severity</code></dt><dd>The severity level of the event; ranges from 0 (Emergency) to 7 (Debug).</dd><dt><code>!uid</code></dt><dd>User ID.</dd><dt><code>!link</code></dt><dd>A link to associate with the message.</dd><dt><code>!message</code></dt><dd>The message to store in the log.</dd></dl>','','none'),(7750,'Either the path \'%path\' is invalid or you do not have access to it.','','none'),(7751,'%capital_name contains the following terms.','','none'),(7752,'%capital_name contains terms grouped under parent terms','','none'),(7753,'%capital_name contains terms with multiple parents.','','none'),(7754,'Access the taxonomy vocabulary overview page','','10.5.6'),(7755,'Get an overview of all taxonomy vocabularies.','','10.5.6'),(7756,'%vocabulary: Create terms','','10.5.6'),(7757,'%vocabulary: Delete terms','','10.5.6'),(7758,'%vocabulary: Edit terms','','10.5.6'),(7759,'Output the URL as text','','none'),(7760,'Output an absolute link','','none'),(7761,'Min placeholder','','none'),(7762,'Max placeholder','','none'),(7763,'Enable this option to output an absolute link. Required if you want to use the path as a link destination.','','none'),(7764,'Enforce a <code>destination</code> parameter in the link to return the user to the original view upon completing the link action. Most operations include a destination by default and this setting is no longer needed.','','none'),(7765,'Hint text that appears inside the Min field when empty.','','none'),(7766,'Hint text that appears inside the Max field when empty.','','none'),(7767,'Hint text that appears inside the field when empty.','','none'),(7768,'There are no workflow types available. In order to create workflows you need to install a module that provides a workflow type. For example, the <a href=\":content-moderation\">Content Moderation</a> module provides a workflow type that enables workflows for content entities.','','none'),(7769,'Transition label','','none'),(7770,'Find and moderate content.','','none'),(7771,'No moderated content available. Only pending versions of content, such as drafts, are listed here.','','none'),(7772,'No front page content has been created yet.<br/>Follow the <a target=\"_blank\" href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/index.html\">User Guide</a> to start building your site.','','10.2.3'),(7773,'A locally hosted audio file.','','10.2.3'),(7774,'A locally hosted video file.','','10.2.3'),(7775,'Workspace name','','none'),(7776,'Name (A-Z)','','10.2.3'),(7777,'Name (Z-A)','','10.2.3'),(7778,'A flag indicating whether this was a default revision when it was saved.','','10.4.5'),(7779,'Entity untranslatable fields','Validation','none'),(7780,'The Content Moderation module allows you to expand on Drupal\'s \"unpublished\" and \"published\" states for content. It allows you to have a published version that is live, but have a separate working copy that is undergoing review before it is published. This is achieved by using <a href=\":workflows\">Workflows</a> to apply different states and transitions to entities as needed. For more information, see the <a href=\":content_moderation\">online documentation for the Content Moderation module</a>.','','none'),(7781,'Applying workflows','','none'),(7782,'Moderating content','','none'),(7783,'You can view a list of content awaiting moderation on the <a href=\":moderated\">moderated content page</a>. This will show any content in an unpublished state, such as Draft or Archived, to help surface content that requires more work from content editors.','','none'),(7784,'Each transition is exposed as a permission. If a user has the permission for a transition, they can use the transition to change the state of the content item, from Draft to Published.','','none'),(7785,'Hide non translatable fields on translation forms','','10.5.6'),(7786,'Content translation bundle settings','','none'),(7787,'Bundle settings values','','none'),(7788,'Fields that apply to all languages are hidden to avoid conflicting changes. <a href=\":url\">Edit them on the original language form</a>.','','none'),(7789,'Content translation synchronized fields','Validation','none'),(7790,'Non-translatable field elements can only be changed when updating the current revision.','','none'),(7791,'Non-translatable field elements can only be changed when updating the original language.','','none'),(7792,'The node language.','','none'),(7793,'This layout builder tool allows you to configure the layout of the main content area.','','none'),(7794,'To manage other areas of the page, use the <a href=\"@block-ui\">block administration page</a>.','','none'),(7795,'To manage other areas of the page, use the block administration page.','','none'),(7796,'For more information, see the <a href=\":layout-builder-documentation\">online documentation for the Layout Builder module</a>.','','none'),(7797,'Configure any layout','','none'),(7798,'Configure section','','none'),(7799,'Per-view-mode Layout Builder settings','','none'),(7800,'Allow a customized layout','','none'),(7801,'Edit layout for %label','','none'),(7802,'The layout override has been saved.','','none'),(7803,'The changes to the layout have been discarded.','','none'),(7804,'@entity being viewed','','none'),(7805,'@bundle @label','','none'),(7806,'Allow each @entity to have its layout customized.','','none'),(7807,'You must revert all customized layouts of this display before you can disable this option.','','none'),(7808,'Are you sure you want to revert this to defaults?','','none'),(7809,'The layout has been reverted back to defaults.','','none'),(7810,'Layout Section','','none'),(7811,'A layout section','','none'),(7812,'Create your media on the <a href=\":add_page\" target=\"_blank\">media add page</a> (opens a new window), then add it by name to the field below.','','none'),(7813,'Use existing media','','none'),(7814,'Type part of the media name.','','none'),(7815,'See the <a href=\":list_url\" target=\"_blank\">media list</a> (opens a new window) to help locate media.','','none'),(7816,'Allowed media types: %types','','none'),(7817,'Media item','','none'),(7818,'Create new media','','none'),(7819,'The next page provides an overview of the modules that will be upgraded and those that will not be upgraded, before you proceed to perform the upgrade.','','none'),(7820,'Import new configuration and content from old site','','none'),(7821,'Modules that will not be upgraded','','none'),(7822,'Modules that will be upgraded','','none'),(7823,'What will be upgraded?','','none'),(7824,'Module will not be upgradedModules will not be upgraded','','none'),(7825,'Module will be upgradedModules will be upgraded','','none'),(7826,'Provide text to display if this field contains an empty result. You may include HTML. You may enter data from this view as per the \"Replacement patterns\" in the \"Rewrite Results\" section above.','','10.4.5'),(7827,'Experimental installation profile used','','none'),(7828,'Experimental profiles are provided for testing purposes only. Use at your own risk. To start building a new site, reinstall Drupal and choose a non-experimental profile.','','none'),(7829,'Demo: Umami Food Magazine (Experimental)','','none'),(7830,'Install an example site that shows off some of Drupal’s capabilities.','','none'),(7831,'Umami demo: Content','','none'),(7832,'Imports the content for the Umami demo.','','none'),(7833,'Search by keyword, ingredient, dish','','none'),(7834,'Umami','','none'),(7835,'The theme used for the Umami food magazine demonstration site.','','none'),(7836,'Go to the search page','','none'),(7837,'<span class=\"by-author\">by @author_name</span> @created_date','','none'),(7838,'Tell us what you think','','none'),(7839,'Banner block','','none'),(7840,'A banner block contains a title, summary, link to content and a background image. The background image is scaled to fill the browser\'s width.','','none'),(7841,'A disclaimer block contains disclaimer and copyright text.','','none'),(7842,'Footer promo block','','none'),(7843,'A footer promo block contains a title, promo text, and a \"find out more\" link.','','none'),(7844,'Recipe Name','','none'),(7845,'Umami dates','','none'),(7846,'jS F Y','PHP date format','none'),(7847,'Content Link','','none'),(7848,'Find out more link','','none'),(7849,'Promo text','','none'),(7850,'Promo title','','none'),(7851,'List the ingredients required for this recipe, one per item.','','none'),(7852,'Recipe category','','none'),(7853,'Provide a short overview of this recipe.','','none'),(7854,'Large 21:9 (1440x620)','','none'),(7855,'Large 21:9 2x (2880x1240)','','none'),(7856,'Large 3:2 2x (1536x1024)','','none'),(7857,'Large 3:2 (768x512)','','none'),(7858,'Medium 21:9 (1024x440)','','none'),(7859,'Medium 3:2 2x (1200x800)','','none'),(7860,'Medium 3:2 (600x400)','','none'),(7861,'Medium 8:7 (266x236)','','none'),(7862,'Scale crop 7:3 large','','none'),(7863,'Small 21:9 (768x330)','','none'),(7864,'Square Large','','none'),(7865,'Square Medium','','none'),(7866,'Square Small','','none'),(7867,'3:2 Image','','none'),(7868,'Hero or Banner','','none'),(7869,'Articles aside','','none'),(7870,'More featured articles','','none'),(7871,'A view to create a list of featured articles from the Umami website.','','none'),(7872,'Promoted Items','','none'),(7873,'A view to list the items promoted to the top of the homepage.','','none'),(7874,'Promoted Items Double','','none'),(7875,'Attachment: Promoted Items Double','','none'),(7876,'Block: Promoted Items - Single','','none'),(7877,'Recipes listing','','none'),(7878,'Umami Recipes Banner','','none'),(7879,'Umami disclaimer','','none'),(7880,'Umami footer promo','','none'),(7881,'Non-translatable fields can only be changed when updating the current revision.','','none'),(7882,'Non-translatable fields can only be changed when updating the original language.','','none'),(7883,'Moderated content requires non-translatable fields to be edited in the original language form.','','none'),(7884,'Translations cannot be flagged as outdated when content is moderated.','','none'),(7885,'The \"Delete translation\" action is only available for published translations.','','none'),(7886,'@label (Original translation) - <em>The following @entity_type translations will be deleted:</em>','','10.2.3'),(7887,'Are you sure you want to delete this @item?Are you sure you want to delete these @items?','','10.4.5'),(7888,'Deleted @count item.Deleted @count items.','','10.4.5'),(7889,'@count item has not been deleted because you do not have the necessary permissions.@count items have not been deleted because you do not have the necessary permissions.','','none'),(7890,'Insert selected','','10.4.7'),(7891,'Content block','','10.5.6'),(7892,'The field \"%field\" failed to render with the error of \"%error\".','','none'),(7893,'The @uri field is required when the @title field is specified.','','none'),(7894,'Language for this menu.','','none'),(7895,'Menu link title translation.','','none'),(7896,'Menu link description translation.','','none'),(7897,'Follow-up migration tags','','none'),(7898,'@label (@derivative)','','none'),(7899,'Provide the information to access the Drupal site you want to upgrade. Files can be imported into the upgraded site as well.  See the <a href=\":url\">Upgrade documentation for more detailed instructions</a>.','','none'),(7900,'<h3>Resolve all issues below to continue the upgrade.</h3>','','none'),(7901,'Information array','','none'),(7902,'The configuration ID','','none'),(7903,'The target entity type ID','','none'),(7904,'The target bundle','','none'),(7905,'The default language','','none'),(7906,'Whether to show language selector on create and edit pages','','none'),(7907,'Whether to hide non translatable fields on translation forms','','none'),(7908,'Configuration validation','','none'),(7909,'The \"%plugin_id\" was not found','','none'),(7910,'You must have the pdo_sqlite PHP extension installed. See core/INSTALL.sqlite.txt for instructions.','','none'),(7911,'Unable to automatically determine a port. Use the --port to hardcode an available port.','','none'),(7912,'No installation found. Use the \'install\' command.','','none'),(7913,'Error while opening up a one time login URL','','none'),(7914,'Entity has field','Validation','none'),(7915,'The entity must have the %field_name field.','','none'),(7916,'The entity does not support fields.','','none'),(7917,'The selected installation profile %install_profile does not match the profile stored in configuration %config_profile.','','none'),(7918,'Use existing configuration','','none'),(7919,'Install %name using existing configuration.','','none'),(7920,'The configuration from the directory %sync_directory will be used.','','none'),(7921,'An advanced action offers additional configuration options which may be filled out below. Changing the <em>Label</em> field is recommended in order to better identify the precise action taking place.','','none'),(7922,'The i18n_blocks block numeric identifier.','','none'),(7923,'The default theme.','','none'),(7924,'i18n_string table id','','none'),(7925,'Block property','','none'),(7926,'The translation of the value of \"property\".','','none'),(7927,'Block title translation.','','none'),(7928,'Block body.','','none'),(7929,'Block body translation.','','none'),(7930,'Deleted @count comment.Deleted @count comments.','','none'),(7931,'@count comment has not been deleted because you do not have the necessary permissions.@count comments have not been deleted because you do not have the necessary permissions.','','none'),(7932,'contact forms','','none'),(7933,'contact message','','none'),(7934,'contact messages','','none'),(7935,'@entity_type_plural_label do not support publishing statuses. For example, even after transitioning from a published workflow state to an unpublished workflow state they will still be visible to site visitors.','','none'),(7936,'@label@column (@argument)','','none'),(7937,'text editor','','none'),(7938,'text editors','','none'),(7939,'Field storages','','none'),(7940,'field storage','','none'),(7941,'field storages','','none'),(7942,'Input data could not be read','','none'),(7943,'Temporary file data for \"%path\" could not be written','','none'),(7944,'Temporary file \"%path\" could not be opened for file upload','','none'),(7945,'image style','','none'),(7946,'image styles','','none'),(7947,'content language setting','','none'),(7948,'content languages settings','','none'),(7949,'It is potentially insecure to display oEmbed content in a frame that is served from the same domain as your main Drupal site, as this may allow execution of third-party code. <a href=\":url\">You can specify a different domain for serving oEmbed content here</a>.','','10.2.3'),(7950,'Manage media settings.','','10.5.6'),(7951,'Domain from which to serve oEmbed content in an iframe','','none'),(7952,'The URL of the oEmbed providers database in JSON format','','none'),(7953,'oEmbed display format settings','','none'),(7954,'oEmbed widget format settings','','none'),(7955,'oEmbed media source configuration','','none'),(7956,'URI of thumbnail storage directory','','none'),(7957,'Allowed oEmbed providers','','none'),(7958,'Displaying media assets from third-party services, such as YouTube or Twitter, can be risky. This is because many of these services return arbitrary HTML to represent those assets, and that HTML may contain executable JavaScript code. If handled improperly, this can increase the risk of your site being compromised.','','10.4.5'),(7959,'In order to mitigate the risks, third-party assets are displayed in an iFrame, which effectively sandboxes any executable code running inside it. For even more security, the iFrame can be served from an alternate domain (that also points to your Drupal site), which you can configure on this page. This helps safeguard cookies and other sensitive information.','','10.4.5'),(7960,'iFrame domain','','10.4.5'),(7961,'Enter a different domain from which to serve oEmbed content, including the <em>http://</em> or <em>https://</em> prefix. This domain needs to point back to this site, or existing oEmbed content may not display correctly, or at all.','','10.4.5'),(7962,'Maximum size: %max_width x %max_height pixels','','none'),(7963,'Maximum width: %max_width pixels','','none'),(7964,'Maximum height: %max_height pixels','','none'),(7965,'Could not retrieve the remote URL (@url).','','none'),(7966,'oEmbed content','','none'),(7967,'You can link to media from the following services: @providers','','none'),(7968,'oEmbed URL','','none'),(7969,'oEmbed resource','Validation','none'),(7970,'The given URL does not match any known oEmbed providers.','','none'),(7971,'Sorry, the @name provider is not allowed.','','none'),(7972,'The provided URL does not represent a valid oEmbed resource.','','none'),(7973,'An error occurred while trying to retrieve the oEmbed provider database.','','none'),(7974,'Suggested cache lifetime','','none'),(7975,'Thumbnails location','','none'),(7976,'Thumbnails will be fetched from the provider for local usage. This is the URI of the directory where they will be placed.','','none'),(7977,'Allowed providers','','none'),(7978,'Optionally select the allowed oEmbed providers for this media type. If left blank, all providers will be allowed.','','none'),(7979,'@type URL','','none'),(7980,'Could not prepare thumbnail destination directory @dir for oEmbed media.','','none'),(7981,'oEmbed source','','none'),(7982,'Use oEmbed URL for reusable media.','','none'),(7983,'Remote video','','10.4.5'),(7984,'Use remote video URL for reusable media.','','none'),(7985,'Custom menu links','','none'),(7986,'custom menu link','','10.5.6'),(7987,'custom menu links','','10.4.7'),(7988,'Deleted @count content item.Deleted @count content items.','','10.2.3'),(7989,'@count content item has not been deleted because you do not have the necessary permissions.@count content items have not been deleted because you do not have the necessary permissions.','','none'),(7990,'responsive image style','','none'),(7991,'REST resource configurations','','none'),(7992,'search pages','','none'),(7993,'Shortcut links','','none'),(7994,'shortcut link','','none'),(7995,'shortcut links','','10.4.7'),(7996,'Shortcut sets','','none'),(7997,'shortcut set','','none'),(7998,'shortcut sets','','none'),(7999,'Configuration install','','none'),(8000,'The selected profile has a hook_install() implementation and therefore can not be installed from configuration.','','none'),(8001,'This import does not contain system.site configuration, so has been rejected.','','none'),(8002,'Browser and proxy cache maximum age','','10.5.6'),(8003,'This is used as the value for max-age in Cache-Control headers.','','10.5.6'),(8004,'Drupal provides an <a href=\":module_enable\">Internal Page Cache module</a> that is recommended for small to medium-sized websites.','','none'),(8005,'Term language','','none'),(8006,'Views','View entity type','none'),(8007,'view','View entity type','none'),(8008,'views','View entity type','none'),(8009,'workflows','','none'),(8010,'Testing install profile all dependencies','','none'),(8011,'Profile for testing that install profiles can require a module.','','none'),(8012,'Testing install profile dependencies','','none'),(8013,'[user:display-name],\n\nThank you for registering at [site:name]. Your application for an account is currently pending approval. Once it has been approved, you will receive another email containing information about how to log in, set your password, and other details.\n\n--  [site:name] team','','10.2.3'),(8014,'A remotely hosted video from YouTube or Vimeo.','','10.2.3'),(8015,'A boolean indicating whether this block is reusable.','','none'),(8016,'Whether the Layout Builder is enabled for this display','','none'),(8017,'Are you sure you want to disable Layout Builder?','','none'),(8018,'All customizations will be removed. This action cannot be undone.','','none'),(8019,'Layout Builder has been disabled.','','none'),(8020,'Use Layout Builder','','none'),(8021,'Provides a field for selecting media entities in our media library view','','none'),(8022,'Select @label','','10.4.7'),(8023,'Zero items selected','','10.4.5'),(8024,'All @count items selected','','10.4.5'),(8025,'Select all media','','10.4.5'),(8026,'Show media item weights','','10.5.6'),(8027,'Hide media item weights','','10.5.6'),(8028,'A maximum of @count files can be uploaded.','','none'),(8029,'The maximum number of media items have been selected.','','10.5.6'),(8030,'Update widget','','10.5.6'),(8031,'The media item \"@label\" is not of an accepted type. Allowed types: @types','','none'),(8032,'One media item remaining.@count media items remaining.','','10.5.6'),(8033,'Only one item can be selected.Only @count items can be selected.','','none'),(8034,'Allows you to select items from the media library.','','none'),(8035,'The Workspaces module allows workspaces to be defined and switched between. Content is then assigned to the active workspace when created. For more information, see the <a href=\":workspaces\">online documentation for the Workspaces module</a>.','','none'),(8036,'Switch workspace','','none'),(8037,'Workspaces can not be installed when the contributed Workspace module is also installed. See the <a href=\":link\">upgrade path</a> page for more information on how to upgrade.','','none'),(8038,'This form can only be submitted in the default workspace.','','none'),(8039,'Switch to @workspace','','none'),(8040,'Current workspace:','','none'),(8041,'Denied access to view workspace %workspace_label for user %uid','','none'),(8042,'workspaces','','none'),(8043,'Activate the %workspace workspace.','','none'),(8044,'%workspace_label is now the active workspace.','','none'),(8045,'You do not have access to activate the %workspace_label workspace.','','none'),(8046,'The following will also be deleted:','','none'),(8047,'This action cannot be undone, and will also delete all content created in this workspace.','','none'),(8048,'1 @label revision.@count @label revisions.','','none'),(8049,'Select workspace','','none'),(8050,'Deleted workspace','Validation','none'),(8051,'A workspace with this ID has been deleted but data still exists for it.','','none'),(8052,'Entity workspace conflict','Validation','none'),(8053,'The content is being edited in the %label workspace. As a result, your changes cannot be saved.','','none'),(8054,'Drupal system cross profile test','','none'),(8055,'Support module for testing that a module in one profile can be reused in another profile.','','none'),(8056,'Card common','','none'),(8057,'Card common alt','','none'),(8058,'Inline block','','none'),(8059,'Block revision ID','','none'),(8060,'Serialized block','','none'),(8061,'The view mode in which to render the block.','','none'),(8062,'Inline blocks','','none'),(8063,'The entity type this translation relates to','','none'),(8064,'The entity id this translation relates to','','none'),(8065,'The entity revision id this translation relates to','','none'),(8066,'The target language for this translation.','','none'),(8067,'Boolean indicating whether the translation is published (visible to non-administrators).','','none'),(8068,'Image Resize','','none'),(8069,'Short description of the image used by screen readers and displayed when the image is not loaded. This is important for accessibility.','','10.5.6'),(8070,'Short description of the image used by screen readers and displayed when the image is not loaded. Enabling this field is recommended.','','10.5.6'),(8071,'Responsive Grid','','none'),(8072,'Displays rows in a responsive grid.','','none'),(8073,'Insert Media','','10.5.6'),(8074,'Edit {{ name }}','','10.2.3'),(8075,'The {node}.language to which this comment is a reply. Site default language is used as a fallback if node does not have a language.','','none'),(8076,'The comment language.','','none'),(8077,'The entity ID this translation relates to','','none'),(8078,'The entity revision ID this translation relates to','','none'),(8079,'Type (article, page, ....)','','none'),(8080,'Option ID.','','none'),(8081,'Integer value of Object ID','','none'),(8082,'The input format used by this string','','none'),(8083,'Translation of the option','','none'),(8084,'Parent lid','','none'),(8085,'Plural index number in case of plural strings','','none'),(8086,'The default language for new terms.','','none'),(8087,'The i18n taxonomy translation setting.','','none'),(8088,'Media selection','','none'),(8089,'Modules could not be listed due to an error: %error','','none'),(8090,'A non-existent config entity name returned by FieldStorageConfigInterface::getBundles(): entity type: %entity_type, bundle: %bundle, field name: %field','','none'),(8091,'Allows users to stage content or preview a full site by using multiple workspaces on a single site.','','10.5.6'),(8092,'Testing requirements','','none'),(8093,'Testing requirements failed requirements.','','none'),(8094,'Profile for testing hook_requirements().','','none'),(8095,'Create @entity_type','','none'),(8096,'Optional label','','none'),(8097,'JSON:API','','none'),(8098,'Block enabled status','','none'),(8099,'Block weight within region','','none'),(8100,'Theme region within which the block is set','','none'),(8101,'Multilingual mode','','none'),(8102,'Language string ID','','none'),(8103,'A module defined group of translations','','none'),(8104,'Full string ID for quick search: type:objectid:property.','','none'),(8105,'Object property for this string','','none'),(8106,'The {filter_format}.format of the string','','none'),(8107,'Plural index number','','none'),(8108,'@entity fields','','none'),(8109,'Language for this term.','','none'),(8110,'Term name translation.','','none'),(8111,'Term description translation.','','none'),(8112,'Entity Reference Supported New Entities','Validation','none'),(8113,'%collection_label can only be created in the default workspace.','','none'),(8114,'Media type ID','','none'),(8115,'Temporary file \"%path\" could not be opened for file upload.','','none'),(8116,'Remove @label','','10.5.6'),(8117,'The time that the workspace was created.','','none'),(8118,'View @node.type.entity.label','','none'),(8119,'Testing site config','','none'),(8120,'Minimal profile for testing with default site config.','','none'),(8121,'The JSON:API module is a fully compliant implementation of the <a href=\":spec\">JSON:API Specification</a>. By following shared conventions, you can increase productivity, take advantage of generalized tooling, and focus on what matters: your application. Clients built around JSON:API are able to take advantage of features like efficient response caching, which can sometimes eliminate network requests entirely. For more information, see the <a href=\":docs\">online documentation for the JSON:API module</a>.','','none'),(8122,'JSON:API is a particular implementation of REST that provides conventions for resource relationships, collections, filters, pagination, and sorting. These conventions help developers build clients faster and encourages reuse of code.','','none'),(8123,'Exposes entities as a JSON:API-specification-compliant web API.','','10.5.6'),(8124,'Umami Home Banner','','none'),(8125,'The specified file \'%source\' could not be copied to \'%destination\'.','','none'),(8126,'Failed to unlink file \'%path\'.','','none'),(8127,'Cannot delete \'%path\' because it is a directory. Use deleteRecursive() instead.','','none'),(8128,'The file \'%path\' is not of a recognized type so it was not deleted.','','none'),(8129,'The specified file \'%source\' could not be moved to \'%destination\'.','','none'),(8130,'The source file \'%source\' could not be unlinked after copying to \'%destination\'.','','none'),(8131,'File \'%original_source\' (\'%realpath\') could not be copied because it does not exist.','','none'),(8132,'File \'%original_source\' could not be copied because it does not exist.','','none'),(8133,'File \'%original_source\' could not be copied because a file by that name already exists in the destination directory (\'%destination\').','','none'),(8134,'File \'%source\' could not be copied because it would overwrite itself.','','none'),(8135,'Temporary file \'%temp_name\' could not be created.','','none'),(8136,'When checking for updates, anonymous information about your site is sent to <a href=\"@drupal\">Drupal.org</a>.','','none'),(8137,'If selected and this menu link has children, the menu will always appear expanded. This option may be overridden for the entire menu tree when placing a menu block.','','10.4.5'),(8138,'Checked','Examined','10.4.7'),(8139,'This @label is being edited by user @user, and is therefore locked from editing by others. This lock is @age old. Click here to <a href=\":url\">break this lock</a>.','','none'),(8140,'This will also remove 1 placed block instance. This action cannot be undone.This will also remove @count placed block instances. This action cannot be undone.','','none'),(8141,'Whether to log IP addresses with comments or not.','','none'),(8142,'Select the state that new content will be assigned. This state will appear as the default in content forms and the available target states will be based on the transitions available from this state.','','none'),(8143,'Allows users to configure the display and form display by arranging fields in several columns.','','10.5.6'),(8144,'Forms and links inside the content of the layout builder tool have been disabled.','','none'),(8145,'Default layouts','','none'),(8146,'Layout Builder can be selectively enabled on the \"Manage Display\" page in the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI</a>. This allows you to control the output of each type of display individually. For example, a \"Basic page\" might have view modes such as Full and Teaser, with each view mode having different layouts selected.','','none'),(8147,'Overridden layouts','','none'),(8148,'If enabled, each individual content item can have a custom layout. Once the layout for an individual content item is overridden, changes to the Default layout will no longer affect it. Overridden layouts may be reverted to return to matching and being synchronized to their Default layout.','','none'),(8149,'Allows users to add and arrange blocks and content fields directly on the content.','','10.5.6'),(8150,'Choose a layout for this section','','none'),(8151,'Column widths','','none'),(8152,'All available blocks are listed.','','none'),(8153,'Are you sure you want to discard your layout changes?','','none'),(8154,'Are you sure you want to remove section @section?','','none'),(8155,'Layout Builder Widget','','none'),(8156,'A field widget for Layout Builder.','','none'),(8157,'Choose the column widths for this layout.','','none'),(8158,'Manually entered paths should start with one of the following characters: / ? #','','none'),(8159,'Manages the creation, configuration, and display of media items.','','10.5.6'),(8160,'Allow media items to be viewed standalone at /media/{id}','','none'),(8161,'Standalone media URL','','10.4.5'),(8162,'Allow users to access @media-entities at /media/{id}.','','10.4.5'),(8163,'Could not download remote thumbnail from {url}.','','none'),(8164,'Media Library form and view displays have been created for the %type media type.','','none'),(8165,'Enhances the media list with additional features to more easily find and use existing media items.','','10.5.6'),(8166,'Media library widget settings','','none'),(8167,'Allowed media types, in display order','','none'),(8168,'Loading grid view.','','none'),(8169,'Changed to grid view.','','none'),(8170,'Loading table view.','','none'),(8171,'Changed to table view.','','none'),(8172,'@selected of @count item selected@selected of @count items selected','','none'),(8173,'Add or select media','','10.5.6'),(8174,'Add fileAdd files','','10.4.7'),(8175,'Add @type via URL','','none'),(8176,'Allowed providers: @providers.','','none'),(8177,'Tab order','','none'),(8178,'Tab order: @order','','none'),(8179,'No media items are selected.','','10.5.6'),(8180,'Opening media library.','','10.5.6'),(8181,'Menu tree hierarchy.','Validation','none'),(8182,'You can only change the hierarchy for the <em>published</em> version of this menu link.','','none'),(8183,'%capital_name contains 1 menu link with pending revisions. Manipulation of a menu tree having links with pending revisions is not supported, but you can re-enable manipulation by getting each menu link to a published state.%capital_name contains @count menu links with pending revisions. Manipulation of a menu tree having links with pending revisions is not supported, but you can re-enable manipulation by getting each menu link to a published state.','','none'),(8184,'Failed to read from @title.','','none'),(8185,'The server reports the following message: %error.','','none'),(8186,'The module providing a search page.','','none'),(8187,'Whether or not this module is enabled for search.','','none'),(8188,'Allows users to directly edit the configuration of blocks on the current page.','','10.5.6'),(8189,'Failed to save file due to error \"%error\"','','none'),(8190,'Expand all items','','none'),(8191,'Override the option found on each menu link used for expanding children and instead display the whole menu tree as expanded.','','none'),(8192,'The terms with updated parents have been modified by another user, the changes could not be saved.','','none'),(8193,'%capital_name contains 1 term with pending revisions. Drag and drop of terms with pending revisions is not supported, but you can re-enable drag-and-drop support by getting each term to a published state.%capital_name contains @count terms with pending revisions. Drag and drop of terms with pending revisions is not supported, but you can re-enable drag-and-drop support by getting each term to a published state.','','none'),(8194,'Taxonomy term hierarchy.','Validation','none'),(8195,'You can only change the hierarchy for the <em>published</em> version of this term.','','none'),(8196,'Use the toolbar','','10.5.6'),(8197,'Link to display','','none'),(8198,'Displays a link to a path-based display of this view while keeping the filter criteria, sort criteria, pager settings and contextual filters.','','none'),(8199,'The display ID of the view display to link to.','','none'),(8200,'Is Latest Translation Affected Revision','','none'),(8201,'To make sure the results are the same when switching to the other display, it is recommended to make sure the display:','','none'),(8202,'Has a path.','','none'),(8203,'Has the same filter criteria.','','none'),(8204,'Has the same sort criteria.','','none'),(8205,'Has the same pager settings.','','none'),(8206,'Has the same contextual filters.','','none'),(8207,'There are no path-based displays available.','','none'),(8208,'%current_display: The link in the %area area has no configured display.','','none'),(8209,'%current_display: The link in the %area area points to the %linked_display display which no longer exists.','','none'),(8210,'%current_display: The link in the %area area points to the %linked_display display which does not have a path.','','none'),(8211,'The text to display for this field. You may enter data from this view as per the \"Replacement patterns\" below. You may include <a href=\"@twig_docs\">Twig</a> or the following allowed HTML tags: <code>@tags</code>','','10.4.5'),(8212,'The field that is going to be used as the OPML XML URL attribute for each row.','','none'),(8213,'Managing content','','none'),(8214,'The file %filename could not be uploaded because the name is invalid.','','none'),(8215,'Added media items','','10.4.7'),(8216,'Removing @label.','','10.5.6'),(8217,'Additional selected media','','none'),(8218,'Select @name','','none'),(8219,'Save and insert','','none'),(8220,'The media item %label has been removed.','','10.4.5'),(8221,'The media item has been created but has not yet been saved. Fill in any required fields and save to add it to the media library.The media items have been created but have not yet been saved. Fill in any required fields and save to add them to the media library.','','10.4.7'),(8222,'The <a href=\":jsonapi-docs\">JSON:API</a> and <a href=\":rest-docs\">RESTful Web Services</a> modules serve similar purposes. <a href=\":comparison\">Read the comparison of the RESTFul Web Services and JSON:API modules</a> to determine the best choice for your site.','','none'),(8223,'Some multilingual features currently do not work well with JSON:API. See the <a href=\":jsonapi-docs\">JSON:API multilingual support documentation</a> for more information on the current status of multilingual support.','','none'),(8224,'Revision support is currently read-only and only for the \"Content\" and \"Media\" entity types in JSON:API. See the <a href=\":jsonapi-docs\">JSON:API revision support documentation</a> for more information on the current status of revision support.','','none'),(8225,'JSON:API multilingual support','','none'),(8226,'JSON:API revision support','','none'),(8227,'Configure whether to allow only read operations or all operations.','','none'),(8228,'JSON:API settings','','none'),(8229,'Restrict JSON:API to only read operations','','none'),(8230,'Allowed operations','','none'),(8231,'Accept only JSON:API read operations.','','none'),(8232,'Accept all JSON:API create, read, update, and delete operations.','','none'),(8233,'Warning: Only enable all operations if the site requires it. <a href=\":docs\">Learn more about securing your site with JSON:API.</a>','','none'),(8234,'Widget (table)','','10.2.3'),(8235,'Enter a comma-separated list. For example: Vegetarian, Chocolate brownies, Appetizers','','none'),(8236,'Use this taxonomy to group recipes of the same type together.','','none'),(8237,'Recipe Collections','','none'),(8238,'Recipe collections','','none'),(8239,'\"@block\" block','','none'),(8240,'The Layout Builder module makes a number of permissions available, which can be set by role on the <a href=\":permissions\">permissions page</a>. For more information, see the <a href=\":layout-builder-permissions\">Configuring Layout Builder permissions</a> online documentation.','','none'),(8241,'<strong>Warning</strong>: Layout Builder does not support translating layouts. (<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/8/core/modules/layout-builder/layout-builder-and-content-translation\">online documentation</a>)','','none'),(8242,'Manage the single-use blocks within the Layout Builder','','none'),(8243,'Block previews are visible. Block labels are hidden.','','none'),(8244,'Block previews are hidden. Block labels are visible.','','none'),(8245,'%entity_type - %bundle: Configure all layout overrides','','none'),(8246,'Warning: Allows configuring the layout even if the user cannot edit the @entity_type_singular itself.','','none'),(8247,'%entity_type - %bundle: Configure layout overrides for @entity_type_plural that the user can edit','','none'),(8248,'%entity_type: Configure all layout overrides','','none'),(8249,'%entity_type: Configure layout overrides for @entity_type_plural that the user can edit','','none'),(8250,'Layout Builder user interface','','none'),(8251,'Placeholder for the @preview_fallback','','none'),(8252,'You are editing the layout template for all @bundle @plural_label.','','none'),(8253,'You are editing the layout template for all @plural_label.','','none'),(8254,'Section: @delta','','none'),(8255,'Blocks in Section: @section, Region: @region','','none'),(8256,'@label (current)','','none'),(8257,'Move the @block_label block','','none'),(8258,'You are editing the layout for this @bundle @singular_label. <a href=\":link\">Edit the template for all @bundle @plural_label instead.</a>','','none'),(8259,'You are editing the layout for this @singular_label. <a href=\":link\">Edit the template for all @plural_label instead.</a>','','none'),(8260,'You are editing the layout for this @bundle @singular_label.','','none'),(8261,'You are editing the layout for this @singular_label.','','none'),(8262,'Show content preview','','none'),(8263,'\"@field\" field','','none'),(8264,'The <a href=\":rest-docs\">RESTful Web Services</a> and <a href=\":jsonapi-docs\">JSON:API</a> modules serve similar purposes. <a href=\":comparison\">Read the comparison of the RESTFul Web Services and JSON:API modules</a> to determine the best choice for your site.','','none'),(8265,'\"@view\" views block','','none'),(8266,'Delete any file','','10.5.6'),(8267,'Refresh interval in seconds','','none'),(8268,'Add new @entity-type %label','','10.4.5'),(8269,'There are no allowed media types configured for this field. Edit the field settings to select the allowed media types.','','none'),(8270,'There are no allowed media types configured for this field. <a href=\":url\">Edit the field settings</a> to select the allowed media types.','','none'),(8271,'Archived','Workflow state label','none'),(8272,'Draft','Workflow state label','none'),(8273,'Published','Workflow state label','none'),(8274,'Archive','Workflow transition label','none'),(8275,'Restore to Draft','Workflow transition label','none'),(8276,'Restore','Workflow transition label','none'),(8277,'Create New Draft','Workflow transition label','none'),(8278,'Publish','Workflow transition label','none'),(8279,'Temporary file \"%path\" that was deleted during garbage collection did not exist on the filesystem. This could be caused by a missing stream wrapper.','','none'),(8280,'Temporary file \"%path\" that was deleted during garbage collection did not exist on the filesystem.','','none'),(8281,'Layout Builder tools','','none'),(8282,'not regex','','none'),(8283,'Enable Drupal style \"sticky\" table headers (JavaScript)','','none'),(8284,'Claro','','none'),(8285,'Claro settings','','none'),(8286,'Tabs display toggle','','10.5.6'),(8287,'The %view_id view could not be updated automatically while processing an entity schema update for the %entity_type_id entity type.','','none'),(8288,'<span class=\"visually-hidden\">Show </span>@title<span class=\"visually-hidden\"> media</span><span class=\"active-tab visually-hidden\"> (selected)</span>','','10.4.7'),(8289,'<span class=\"visually-hidden\">Show </span>@title<span class=\"visually-hidden\"> media</span>','','10.4.7'),(8290,'Adding selection.','','10.5.6'),(8291,'Added one media item.Added @count media items.','','10.4.7'),(8292,'Term from URL','','none'),(8293,'Filter the contents of the %view_title view','','10.5.6'),(8294,'Content Block','','none'),(8295,'This theme is not compatible with Drupal @core_version. Check that the .info.yml file contains a compatible \'core\' or \'core_version_requirement\' value.','','none'),(8296,'Drupal Core (@core_requirement) (<span class=\"admin-missing\">incompatible with</span> version @core_version)','','10.5.6'),(8297,'Additional Resources','','10.5.6'),(8298,'A clean, accessible, and powerful Drupal administration theme.','','10.4.7'),(8299,'Status Details','','10.4.7'),(8300,'Maximum number of autocomplete suggestions.','','none'),(8301,'Failed to connect to your database server. The server reports the following message: %error.<ul><li>Is the database server running?</li><li>Does the database exist or does the database user have sufficient privileges to create the database?</li><li>Have you entered the correct database name?</li><li>Have you entered the correct username and password?</li><li>Have you entered the correct database hostname and port number?</li></ul>','','none'),(8302,'Failed to connect to your database server. The server reports the following message: %error.<ul><li>Is the database server running?</li><li>Does the database exist, and have you entered the correct database name?</li><li>Have you entered the correct username and password?</li><li>Have you entered the correct database hostname and port number?</li></ul>','','none'),(8303,'Failed to open or create database file %database. The database engine reports the following message when attempting to create the database: %error.','','none'),(8304,'Failed to connect to database. The database engine reports the following message: %error.<ul><li>Does the database file exist?</li><li>Does web server have permission to write to the database file?</li>Does the web server have permission to write to the directory the database file should be created in?</li></ul>','','none'),(8305,'The number of suggestions that will be listed. Use <em>0</em> to remove the limit.','','none'),(8306,'Autocomplete suggestion list size: @size','','none'),(8307,'Bosnia & Herzegovina','','10.4.5'),(8308,'St. Barthélemy','','10.4.5'),(8309,'Ceuta & Melilla','','10.4.5'),(8310,'South Georgia & South Sandwich Islands','','10.4.5'),(8311,'Heard & McDonald Islands','','10.4.5'),(8312,'St. Kitts & Nevis','','10.4.5'),(8313,'St. Martin','','10.4.5'),(8314,'North Macedonia','','10.4.5'),(8315,'Macao SAR China','','10.4.5'),(8316,'St. Pierre & Miquelon','','10.4.5'),(8317,'Svalbard & Jan Mayen','','10.4.5'),(8318,'São Tomé & Príncipe','','10.4.5'),(8319,'Eswatini','','10.4.5'),(8320,'Turks & Caicos Islands','','10.4.5'),(8321,'Trinidad & Tobago','','10.4.5'),(8322,'St. Vincent & Grenadines','','10.4.5'),(8323,'Wallis & Futuna','','10.4.5'),(8324,'The path that this alias belongs to.','','none'),(8325,'The source path has to start with a slash.','','none'),(8326,'An alias used with this path.','','none'),(8327,'The alias path has to start with a slash.','','none'),(8328,'Unique path alias.','Validation','none'),(8329,'Valid path.','Validation','none'),(8330,'Either the path \'%link_path\' is invalid or you do not have access to it.','','none'),(8331,'The @label workspace can not be published because it contains 1 item in an unpublished moderation state.The @label workspace can not be published because it contains @count items in an unpublished moderation state.','','none'),(8332,'Moderation state sort','','none'),(8333,'Moderation state field','','none'),(8334,'Full string ID','','none'),(8335,'A boolean indicating whether this translation needs to be updated','','none'),(8336,'JSON:API allowed operations','','none'),(8337,'All (create, read, update, delete)','','none'),(8338,'It is recommended to <a href=\":configure-url\">configure</a> JSON:API to only accept all operations if the site requires it. <a href=\":docs\">Learn more about securing your site with JSON:API.</a>','','none'),(8339,'i18n language','','none'),(8340,'i18n mode','','none'),(8341,'Add section <span class=\"visually-hidden\">at end of layout</span>','','none'),(8342,'Add section <span class=\"visually-hidden\">at start of layout</span>','','none'),(8343,'Add section <span class=\"visually-hidden\">between @first and @second</span>','','none'),(8344,'Add block <span class=\"visually-hidden\">in @section, @region region</span>','','none'),(8345,'@region region in @section','','none'),(8346,'Remove @section','','none'),(8347,'<span class=\"layout-builder__section-label\" aria-hidden=\"true\">@section</span>','','none'),(8348,'Configure @section','','none'),(8349,'@section, Region: @region','','none'),(8350,'Block label','','none'),(8351,'Are you sure you want to remove @section?','','none'),(8352,'The %media-embed-filter-label filter requires <code>&lt;drupal-media&gt;</code> among the allowed HTML tags.','','none'),(8353,'The <code>&lt;drupal-media&gt;</code> tag in the allowed HTML tags is missing the following attributes: <code>%list</code>.','','none'),(8354,'The %media-embed-filter-label filter needs to be placed after the %filter filter.The %media-embed-filter-label filter needs to be placed after the following filters: %filters.','','none'),(8355,'If you would like to change this, <a href=\":display\">add an image style to the %field_name field</a>.','','10.4.7'),(8356,'The default display for the %type media type is not currently using an image style on the %field_name field. Not using an image style can lead to much larger file downloads. @action_item','','10.4.7'),(8357,'The view mode that is used by default','','none'),(8358,'Media types selectable in the Media Library','','10.4.5'),(8359,'View modes selectable in the \"Edit media\" dialog','','none'),(8360,'Filters out unpublished media if the current user cannot view it.','','none'),(8361,'There is nothing to configure for this media.','','none'),(8362,'@warning <a href=\"@edit_url\">Edit the text format %format</a> to modify the attributes that can be overridden.','','none'),(8363,'The view mode that an embedded media item should be displayed in by default. This can be overridden using the <code>data-view-mode</code> attribute.','','10.4.5'),(8364,'If none are selected, all will be allowed.','','10.4.5'),(8365,'View modes selectable in the \'Edit media\' dialog','','10.4.5'),(8366,'If two or more view modes are selected, users will be able to update the view mode that an embedded media item should be displayed in after it has been embedded.  If less than two view modes are selected, media will be embedded using the default view mode and no view mode options will appear after a media item has been embedded.','','10.4.5'),(8367,'The referenced media source is missing and needs to be re-embedded.','','none'),(8368,'\n      <p>You can embed media items:</p>\n      <ul>\n        <li>Choose which media item to embed: <code>&lt;drupal-media data-entity-uuid=\"07bf3a2e-1941-4a44-9b02-2d1d7a41ec0e\" /&gt;</code></li>\n        <li>Optionally also choose a view mode: <code>data-view-mode=\"tiny_embed\"</code>, otherwise the default view mode is used.</li>\n        <li>The <code>data-entity-type=\"media\"</code> attribute is required for consistency.</li>\n      </ul>','','none'),(8369,'You can embed media items (using the <code>&lt;drupal-media&gt;</code> tag).','','none'),(8370,'During rendering of embedded media: recursive rendering detected for %entity_id. Aborting rendering.','','none'),(8371,'During rendering of embedded media: the media item with UUID \"@uuid\" does not exist.','','none'),(8372,'During rendering of embedded media: the view mode \"@view-mode-id\" does not exist.','','none'),(8373,'Embeds media items using a custom tag, <code>&lt;drupal-media&gt;</code>. If used in conjunction with the \'Align/Caption\' filters, make sure this filter is configured to run after them.','','10.4.5'),(8374,'The Media Library module provides a rich, visual interface for managing media, and allows media to be reused in entity reference fields or embedded into text content. It overrides the <a href=\":media-collection\">media administration page</a>, allowing users to toggle between the existing table-style interface and a new grid-style interface for browsing and performing administrative operations on media.','','none'),(8375,'To learn more about media management, begin by reviewing the <a href=\":media-help\">documentation for the Media module</a>. For more information about the media library and related functionality, see the <a href=\":media-library-handbook\">online documentation for the Media Library module</a>.','','none'),(8376,'Selection dialog','','none'),(8377,'When selecting media for an entity reference field or a text editor, Media Library opens a modal dialog to help users easily find and select media. The modal dialog can toggle between a grid-style and table-style interface, and new media items can be uploaded directly into it.','','none'),(8378,'Within the dialog, media items are divided up by type. If more than one media type can be selected by the user, the available types will be displayed as a set of vertical tabs. To users who have appropriate permissions, each media type may also present a short form allowing you to upload or create new media items of that type.','','none'),(8379,'Grid-style vs. table-style interface','','none'),(8380,'The Media Library module provides a new grid-style interface for the media administration page that displays media as thumbnails, with minimal textual information, allowing users to visually browse media in their site. The existing table-style interface is better suited to displaying additional information about media items, in addition to being more accessible to users with assistive technology.','','none'),(8381,'Reusing media in entity reference fields','','none'),(8382,'Any entity reference field that references media can use the media library. To enable, configure the form display for the field to use the \"Media library\" widget.','','none'),(8383,'Embedding media in text content','','none'),(8384,'To use the media library within CKEditor, you must add the \"Insert from Media Library\" button to the CKEditor toolbar, and enable the \"Embed media\" filter in the text format associated with the text editor.','','none'),(8385,'Both the table-style and grid-style interfaces are regular views and can be customized via the Views UI, including sorting and filtering. This is the case for both the administration page and the modal dialog.','','none'),(8386,'Media Library settings','','10.5.6'),(8387,'Manage Media Library settings.','','10.5.6'),(8388,'Media library settings','','none'),(8389,'Enable advanced UI','','10.4.5'),(8390,'The new site is missing modules corresponding to the old site\'s modules. Unless they are installed prior to the upgrade, configuration and/or content needed by them will not be available on your new site. <a href=\':review\'>Read the checklist</a> to help decide what to do.','','none'),(8391,'A path alias set for a specific language will always be used when displaying this page in that language, and takes precedence over path aliases set as <em>- Not specified -</em>.','','none'),(8392,'No path aliases available. <a href=\":link\">Add URL alias</a>.','','none'),(8393,'The search page that the form submits to, or Default for the default search page.','','none'),(8394,'Experimental themes enabled','','none'),(8395,'Experimental themes found: %theme_list. Experimental themes are provided for testing purposes only. Use at your own risk.','','none'),(8396,'Configuration sync directory','','10.5.6'),(8397,'Your %file file must define the %setting setting as a string containing the directory in which configuration files can be found.','','none'),(8398,'experimental theme','','none'),(8399,'A local file system path where temporary files will be stored. This directory should not be accessible over the web. This must be changed in settings.php.','','10.2.3'),(8400,'Are you sure you wish to install an experimental theme?','','none'),(8401,'The following themes are experimental: @themes','','none'),(8402,'You must enable the @required theme to install @theme.You must enable the @required themes to install @theme.','','none'),(8403,'Internationalization mode.','','none'),(8404,'Language from the taxonomy_vocabulary table.','','none'),(8405,'Translation of either the name or the description.','','none'),(8406,'Language code from locales_target table','','none'),(8407,'Require summary','','10.4.5'),(8408,'Always show summary','','none'),(8409,'The summary will also be visible when marked as required.','','10.4.5'),(8410,'The summary field is required for @name','','none'),(8411,'Always show the summary field','','none'),(8412,'Summary field will always be visible','','none'),(8413,'Too many password recovery requests from your IP address. It is temporarily blocked. Try again later or contact the site administrator.','','none'),(8414,'Limit the available operators','','none'),(8415,'List of available operators','','none'),(8416,'Limit the available operators to be shown on the exposed filter.','','none'),(8417,'Restrict operators to','','none'),(8418,'Selecting none will make all of them available.','','none'),(8419,'You selected the \"@operator\" operator as the default value but is not included in the list of limited operators.','','none'),(8420,'Provides an interface to create workflows with transitions between different states (for example publication or user status) provided by other modules.','','10.5.6'),(8421,'Indicates the workspace that this revision belongs to.','','none'),(8422,'Switch to Live','','none'),(8423,'Would you like to switch to the live version of the site?','','none'),(8424,'Switch to the live version of the site.','','none'),(8425,'You are now viewing the live version of the site.','','none'),(8426,'Nightwatch Testing','','none'),(8427,'Minimal profile for running Nightwatch tests. Includes absolutely required modules only.','','none'),(8428,'Media Library thumbnail (220×220)','','10.2.3'),(8429,'Delete {{ name }}','','10.2.3'),(8430,'An uploaded file or document, such as a PDF.','','10.2.3'),(8431,'Viewing help topics','','none'),(8432,'The top-level help topics are listed on the main <a href=\":help_page\">Help page</a>. Links to other topics, including non-top-level help topics, can be found under the \"Related\" heading when viewing a topic page.','','none'),(8433,'Providing help topics','','none'),(8434,'Translating help topics','','none'),(8435,'The title and body text of help topics provided by contributed modules and themes are translatable using the <a href=\":locale_help\">Interface Translation module</a>. Topics provided by custom modules and themes are also translatable if they have been viewed at least once in a non-English language, which triggers putting their translatable text into the translation database.','','none'),(8436,'Configuring help search','','none'),(8437,'See the <a href=\":help_page\">Help page</a> for more topics.','','none'),(8438,'Help Topics','','none'),(8439,'Displays help topics provided by themes and modules.','','10.5.6'),(8440,'Help search','','none'),(8441,'Configure the settings of a block that was previously placed in a region of a theme.','','10.5.6'),(8442,'Click the name of the theme that contains the block.','','10.5.6'),(8443,'Optionally, click <em>Demonstrate block regions</em> to see the regions of the theme.','','10.5.6'),(8444,'If you only want to change the region where a block is located, or the ordering of blocks within a region, drag blocks to their desired positions and click <em>Save blocks</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8445,'If you want to change additional settings, find the region where the block you want to update is currently located, and click <em>Configure</em> in the line of the block description.','','10.5.6'),(8446,'Edit the block\'s settings. The available settings vary depending on the module that provides the block, but for all blocks you can change:','','10.5.6'),(8447,'<em>Block title</em>: The heading for the block on your site -- for some blocks, you will need to check the <em>Override title</em> checkbox in order to enter a title','','10.5.6'),(8448,'<em>Display title</em>: Check the box if you want the title displayed','','10.5.6'),(8449,'<em>Visibility</em>: Add conditions for when the block should be displayed','','10.5.6'),(8450,'<em>Region</em>: Change the theme region the block is displayed in','','10.5.6'),(8451,'Click <em>Save block</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8452,'What are blocks?','','10.5.6'),(8453,'Blocks are boxes of content rendered into an area, or region, of a web page of your site. Blocks are placed and configured specifically for each theme.','','10.5.6'),(8454,'What is the block description?','','10.5.6'),(8455,'The block description is an identification name for a block, which is shown in the administrative interface. It is not displayed on the site.','','10.5.6'),(8456,'What is the block title?','','10.5.6'),(8457,'The block title is the heading that is optionally shown to site visitors when the block is placed in a region.','','10.5.6'),(8458,'Place a block into a theme\'s region.','','10.5.6'),(8459,'Click the name of the theme that you want to place the block in.','','10.5.6'),(8460,'Find the region where you want the block, and click <em>Place block</em> in that region. A modal dialog will pop up.','','10.5.6'),(8461,'Find the block you want to place and click <em>Place block</em>. A <em>Configure block</em> modal dialog will pop up.','','10.5.6'),(8462,'Enter a description of your block (to be shown to administrators) and the body text for your block.','','10.5.6'),(8463,'Enter a label for this block type (shown in the administrative interface). Optionally, edit the automatically-generated machine name or the description.','','10.5.6'),(8464,'Click <em>Save</em>. You will be returned to the <em>Block types</em> page.','','10.5.6'),(8465,'Click <em>Manage fields</em> in the row of your new block type, and add the desired fields to your block type.','','10.5.6'),(8466,'Optionally, click <em>Manage form display</em> or <em>Manage display</em> to change the editing form or field display for your block type.','','10.5.6'),(8467,'Use contextual links to access administrative tasks without navigating the administrative menu.','','10.5.6'),(8468,'What are contextual links?','','10.5.6'),(8469,'<em>Contextual links</em> give users with the <em>Use contextual links</em> permission quick access to administrative tasks related to areas of non-administrative pages. For example, if a page on your site displays a block, the block would have a contextual link that would allow users with permission to configure the block. If the block contains a menu or a view, it would also have a contextual link for editing the menu links or the view. Clicking a contextual link takes you to the related administrative page directly, without needing to navigate through the administrative menu system.','','10.5.6'),(8470,'Make sure that the core Contextual Links module is installed, and that you have a role with the <em>Use contextual links</em> permission. Optionally, make sure that a toolbar module is installed (either the core Toolbar module or a contributed module replacement).','','10.5.6'),(8471,'Visit a non-administrative page on your site, such as the home page.','','10.5.6'),(8472,'Locate a block or another area on the page that you want to edit or configure.','','10.5.6'),(8473,'Make the contextual links button visible by hovering your mouse over that area in the page. In most themes, this button looks like a pencil and is placed in the upper right corner of the page area (upper left for right-to-left languages), and hovering will also temporarily outline the affected area. Alternatively, click the contextual links toggle button on the right end of the toolbar (left end for right-to-left languages), which will make all contextual link buttons on the page visible until it is clicked again.','','10.5.6'),(8474,'While the contextual links button for the area of interest is visible, click the button to display the list of links for that area. Click a link in the list to visit the corresponding administrative page.','','10.5.6'),(8475,'Complete your administrative task and save your settings, or cancel the action. You should be returned to the page you started from.','','10.5.6'),(8476,'What are security updates?','','10.5.6'),(8477,'Any software occasionally has bugs, and sometimes these bugs have security implications. When security bugs are fixed in the core software, modules, or themes that your site uses, they are released in a <em>security update</em>. You will need to apply security updates in order to keep your site secure.','','10.5.6'),(8478,'Security tasks','','10.5.6'),(8479,'Keeping track of updates, updating the core software, and updating contributed modules and/or themes are all part of keeping your site secure. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.5.6'),(8480,'Overview of accessibility','','10.5.6'),(8481,'The default drag-and-drop user interface for ordering tables in the administrative interface presents a challenge for some users, including keyboard-only users and users of screen readers and other assistive technology. The drag-and-drop interface can be disabled in a table by clicking a link labeled <em>Show row weights</em> above the table. The replacement interface allows users to order the table by choosing numerical weights (with increasing numbers) instead of dragging table rows.','','10.5.6'),(8482,'Administrative interface overview','','10.5.6'),(8483,'A menu system, which you can navigate to find pages for administrative tasks. The core Toolbar module displays this menu on the top or left side of the page (right side in right-to-left languages). There are also contributed module replacements for the core Toolbar module, with additional features, such as the <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/admin_toolbar\">Admin Toolbar module</a>.','','10.5.6'),(8484,'The core Shortcuts module enhances the toolbar with a configurable list of links to commonly-used tasks.','','10.5.6'),(8485,'If you install the core Contextual Links module, non-administrative pages will contain links leading to related administrative tasks.','','10.5.6'),(8486,'The core Help module displays help topics, and provides a Help block that can be placed on administrative pages to provide an overview of their functionality.','','10.5.6'),(8487,'See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.5.6'),(8488,'Set up your site so that users can search for help.','','10.5.6'),(8489,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Search and metadata</em> &gt; <em>Search pages</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8490,'Verify that a Help search page is listed in the <em>Search pages</em> section. If not, add a new page of type <em>Help</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8491,'Create, view, and use a set of shortcuts to access administrative pages.','','10.5.6'),(8492,'What are shortcuts?','','10.5.6'),(8493,'<em>Shortcuts</em> are quick links to administrative pages; they are managed by the core Shortcut module. A site can have one or more <em>shortcut sets</em>, which can be shared by one or more users (by default, there is only one set shared by all users); each set contains a limited number of shortcuts. Users need <em>Use shortcuts</em> permission to view shortcuts; <em>Edit current shortcut set</em> permission to add, delete, or edit the shortcuts in the set assigned to them; and <em>Select any shortcut set</em> permission to select a different shortcut set when editing their user profile. There is also an <em>Administer shortcuts</em> permission, which allows an administrator to do any of these actions, as well as select shortcut sets for other users.','','10.5.6'),(8494,'Navigate to an administrative page that you want in your shortcut list.','','10.5.6'),(8495,'Repeat until all the desired links have been added to your shortcut set.','','10.5.6'),(8496,'Click <em>Shortcuts</em> in the toolbar to display your shortcuts, and verify that the list is complete.','','10.5.6'),(8497,'Optionally, click <em>Edit shortcuts</em> at the right end of the shortcut list (left end in right-to-left languages), to remove links or change their order.','','10.5.6'),(8498,'Click any link in the shortcut bar to go directly to the administrative page.','','10.5.6'),(8499,'Configure the basic settings of your site, including the site name, slogan, main email address, default time zone, default country, and the date formats to use.','','10.5.6'),(8500,'Enter the site name, slogan, and main email address for your site.','','10.5.6'),(8501,'Click <em>Save configuration</em>. You should see a message indicating that the settings were saved.','','10.5.6'),(8502,'Select the default country and default time zone for your site.','','10.5.6'),(8503,'Look at the <em>Patterns</em> for the Default long, medium, and short date formats. If any of them does not match the date format you want to use on your site, click <em>Edit</em> in that row to edit the format.','','10.5.6'),(8504,'Adjust the <em>Format string</em> until the <em>Displayed</em> format matches what you want. (Date format strings are composed of PHP date format codes.)','','10.5.6'),(8505,'Click <em>Save format</em>. You should see a message indicating that the format was saved.','','10.5.6'),(8506,'Repeat the previous three steps for any other date formats that need to be changed.','','10.5.6'),(8507,'Set up your site to respond appropriately to site errors, including 403 and 404 page responses.','','10.5.6'),(8508,'What are 403 and 404 responses?','','10.5.6'),(8509,'When a user visits a web page, the web server sends a response code in addition to the page content. A normal, non-error response has code 200. If the page does not exist on the site, the response code is 404. If the page exists, but the user is not authorized to visit the page, the response code is 403. The core software provides default responses for both 403 and 404 codes, but if you prefer, you can create your own pages for each.','','10.5.6'),(8510,'What other errors can occur?','','10.5.6'),(8511,'Under some situations, your site can generate error messages. These can be due to user errors (such as entering invalid values in a form, or incorrect configuration), PHP runtime errors, or software bugs. Some errors may result in a <em>white screen of death</em> (a totally blank web page response); less drastic errors will generate error messages. You can configure what happens when an error message is generated.','','10.5.6'),(8512,'If desired, create pages to use for 403 and 404 responses. Note the URLs for these pages.','','10.5.6'),(8513,'For a production site, select <em>None</em> under <em>Error messages to display</em>. For a site that is in development, select one of the other options, so that you are more aware of the errors the site is generating.','','10.5.6'),(8514,'Take a tour of an administrative page.','','none'),(8515,'What are tours?','','none'),(8516,'The core Tour module provides users with <em>tours</em>, which are guided tours of the administrative interface. Each tour starts on a particular administrative page, and consists of one or more <em>tips</em> that highlight elements of the page, guide you through a workflow, or explain key concepts. Users need <em>Access tour</em> permission to view tours, and JavaScript must be enabled in their browsers.','','none'),(8517,'Make sure that the core Tour module is installed, and that you have a role with the <em>Access tour</em> permission. Also, make sure that a toolbar module is installed (either the core Toolbar module or a contributed module replacement).','','none'),(8518,'Visit an administrative page that has a tour, such as the edit view page provided by the core Views UI module.','','none'),(8519,'Click the <em>Tour</em> button at the right end of the toolbar (left end for right-to-left languages). The first tip of the tour should appear.','','none'),(8520,'Click the <em>Next</em> button to advance to the next tip, and <em>End tour</em> at the end to close the tour.','','none'),(8521,'Configure settings related to how user accounts are created and deleted.','','10.5.6'),(8522,'What are the settings related to user account creation and deletion?','','10.5.6'),(8523,'You can make it possible for new users to register themselves for accounts, with or without email verification or administrative approval. Or, you can make it so only administrators with <em>Administer users</em> permission can register new users.','','10.5.6'),(8524,'You can configure what happens to content that a user created, if their account is <em>canceled</em> (deleted).','','10.5.6'),(8525,'You can edit the email messages that are sent to users when their accounts are pending, approved, created, blocked, or canceled, or when they request a password reset.','','10.5.6'),(8526,'What are variables in email message text?','','10.5.6'),(8527,'<em>Variables</em> are short text strings, enclosed in square brackets [], that you can insert into configured email message text. When an individual message is generated, data from your site is substituted for the variables. Some commonly-used variables are:','','10.5.6'),(8528,'[site:login-url]: The URL where users can log in to your site.','','10.5.6'),(8529,'[user:display-name]: The user\'s displayed name.','','10.5.6'),(8530,'[user:mail]: The user\'s email alias.','','10.5.6'),(8531,'[user:one-time-login-url]: An expiring URL that a user can use to log in once, if they need to reset their password.','','10.5.6'),(8532,'Select the method you want to use for creating user accounts, and check or uncheck the box that requires email verification, to match the settings you want for your site.','','10.5.6'),(8533,'Select the desired option for what happens to content that a user created if their account is canceled.','','10.5.6'),(8534,'Optionally, edit the text of email messages related to user accounts.','','10.5.6'),(8535,'Verify that the other settings are correct.','','10.5.6'),(8536,'Topics can be provided by modules or themes. Top-level help topics on your site:','','none'),(8537,'Both the table-style and grid-style interfaces are regular views and can be customized via the <a href=\":views-ui\">Views UI</a>, including sorting and filtering. This is the case for both the administration page and the modal dialog.','','none'),(8538,'In the grid-style interface, the fields that are displayed (including which image style is used for images) can be customized by configuring the \"Media library\" view mode for each of your <a href=\":media-types\">media types</a>. The thumbnail images in the grid-style interface can be customized by configuring the \"Media Library thumbnail (220×220)\" image style.','','none'),(8539,'When adding new media items within the modal dialog, the fields that are displayed can be customized by configuring the \"Media library\" form mode for each of your <a href=\":media-types\">media types</a>.','','none'),(8540,'Provides the API allowing to rename URLs.','','none'),(8541,'The parent workspace.','','none'),(8542,'Merge workspace','','none'),(8543,'Only top-level workspaces can be published.','','none'),(8544,'Merge into @target_label','','none'),(8545,'The %label workspace can not be deleted because it has child workspaces.','','none'),(8546,'There are no changes that can be merged from %source_label to %target_label.','','none'),(8547,'Would you like to merge the contents of the %source_label workspace into %target_label?','','none'),(8548,'Merge workspace contents.','','none'),(8549,'The contents of the %source_label workspace have been merged into %target_label.','','none'),(8550,'There is @count item that can be merged from %source_label to %target_labelThere are @count items that can be merged from %source_label to %target_label','','none'),(8551,'Workspace selection','','none'),(8552,'Medium 8:7','','none'),(8553,'Responsive 3x2','','none'),(8554,'The field that is going to be used as the RSS item link for each row. This must either be an internal unprocessed path like \"node/123\" or a processed, root-relative URL as produced by fields like \"Link to content\".','','none'),(8555,'Recursive rendering detected when rendering entity %entity_type: %entity_id, using the %field_name field on the %parent_entity_type:%parent_bundle %parent_entity_id entity. Aborting rendering.','','none'),(8556,'Response status','','10.4.5'),(8557,'Heading type','','none'),(8558,'@interval hence','','10.2.3'),(8559,'The @drupal installer requires that the %default-file file must not be deleted or modified from the original download.','','none'),(8560,'Enter the date using the format @placeholder_date (e.g., @date_format).','','10.2.3'),(8561,'Enter the time using the format @placeholder_time (e.g., @time_format).','','10.2.3'),(8562,'Temporary file could not be created for file upload.','','none'),(8563,'Field discovery failed for Drupal core version @core. Did this site have the Field module installed? Error: @message','','none'),(8564,'Drupal 9 no longer uses the $settings[\'install_profile\'] value in settings.php and it should be removed.','','none'),(8565,'@low_version_number to @high_version_number','','10.5.6'),(8566,'Drupal core security coverage','','10.5.6'),(8567,'Update to a supported minor version soon to continue receiving security updates.','','none'),(8568,'Visit the <a href=\":url\">release cycle overview</a> for more information on supported releases.','','10.4.7'),(8569,'Manage workspace','','none'),(8570,'Other workspaces:','','none'),(8571,'View all workspaces','','none'),(8572,'Not compatible','','none'),(8573,'Requires Drupal core:','','10.5.6'),(8574,'Covered until @end_version','','10.4.7'),(8575,'Coverage has ended','','10.2.3'),(8576,'<a href=\":update_status_report\">Update to @next_minor or higher</a> soon to continue receiving security updates.','','none'),(8577,'Covered until @date','','none'),(8578,'<a href=\":update_status_report\">Update to a supported minor</a> as soon as possible to continue receiving security updates.','','10.2.3'),(8579,'Allows configuration of tasks to be executed in response to events.','','10.5.6'),(8580,'Manages breakpoints and breakpoint groups for responsive designs.','','10.5.6'),(8581,'Allows users to comment on content.','','10.5.6'),(8582,'Allows users to translate configuration text.','','10.5.6'),(8583,'Provides site-wide contact forms and forms to contact individual users.','','10.5.6'),(8584,'Allows users to translate content.','','10.5.6'),(8585,'Provides contextual links to directly access tasks related to page elements.','','10.5.6'),(8586,'Logs system events in the database.','','10.5.6'),(8587,'Caches pages, including those with dynamic content, for all users.','','10.5.6'),(8588,'Provides a user interface for the Field module.','','10.5.6'),(8589,'Defines a field type for image media and provides display configuration tools.','','10.5.6'),(8590,'Allows users to configure available languages.','','10.5.6'),(8591,'Allows users to create menu links.','','10.5.6'),(8592,'Users with sufficient access rights will be able to override these options.','','10.4.5'),(8593,'Caches pages for anonymous users and can be used when external page cache is not available.','','10.5.6'),(8594,'Allows users to create search pages based on plugins provided by other modules.','','10.5.6'),(8595,'PHP APCu caching','','10.5.6'),(8596,'Enabled (@size)','','none'),(8597,'Depending on your configuration, Drupal can run with a @apcu_size APCu limit. However, a @apcu_default_size APCu limit (the default) or above is recommended, especially if your site uses additional custom or contributed modules.','','none'),(8598,'Memory available: @available.','','none'),(8599,'PHP APCu caching can improve your site\'s performance considerably. It is <strong>highly recommended</strong> to have <a href=\"https://www.php.net/manual/apcu.installation.php\" target=\"_blank\">APCu</a> installed on your server.','','10.4.7'),(8600,'The version of Drupal you are trying to update from is too old','','none'),(8601,'The installed version of the %module module is too old to update. Update to an intermediate version first (last removed version: @last_removed_version, installed version: @installed_version).','','none'),(8602,'Displays guided tours of the site interface.','','10.5.6'),(8603,'Provides a user interface for creating and managing views.','','10.5.6'),(8604,'<p class=\"text-align-center\">Explore recipes across every type of occasion, ingredient, and skill level.</p>','','none'),(8605,'<p class=\"text-align-center\">Explore recipes across every type of occasion, ingredient, and skill level</p>','','none'),(8606,'MariaDB','','none'),(8607,'MySQL, Percona Server, or equivalent','','10.4.7'),(8608,'Required by the theme: @theme_namesRequired by the themes: @theme_names','','none'),(8609,'@theme','','none'),(8610,'@theme (theme) (<span class=\"admin-disabled\">disabled</span>)','','none'),(8611,'This theme requires the listed modules to operate correctly.','','none'),(8612,'This theme requires the listed modules to operate correctly. They must first be enabled by a user with permissions to do so.','','none'),(8613,'This theme requires the listed modules to operate correctly. They must first be enabled via the <a href=\":modules_url\">Extend page</a>.','','none'),(8614,'Review the <a href=\":url\"> suggestions for resolving this incompatibility</a> to repair your installation, and then re-run update.php.','','none'),(8615,'Missing updates for: @module','','none'),(8616,'The following module is installed, but it is incompatible with Drupal @version:The following modules are installed, but they are incompatible with Drupal @version:','','none'),(8617,'Incompatible moduleIncompatible modules','','none'),(8618,'The following theme is installed, but it is incompatible with Drupal @version:The following themes are installed, but they are incompatible with Drupal @version:','','none'),(8619,'Incompatible themeIncompatible themes','','none'),(8620,'The following module is installed, but it is incompatible with PHP @version:The following modules are installed, but they are incompatible with PHP @version:','','none'),(8621,'The following theme is installed, but it is incompatible with PHP @version:The following themes are installed, but they are incompatible with PHP @version:','','none'),(8622,'The following module is marked as installed in the core.extension configuration, but it is missing:The following modules are marked as installed in the core.extension configuration, but they are missing:','','none'),(8623,'Missing or invalid moduleMissing or invalid modules','','none'),(8624,'The following theme is marked as installed in the core.extension configuration, but it is missing:The following themes are marked as installed in the core.extension configuration, but they are missing:','','none'),(8625,'Missing or invalid themeMissing or invalid themes','','none'),(8626,'The installed version of the %module module is too old to update. Update to a version prior to @versions first (missing updates: @missing_updates).The installed version of the %module module is too old to update. Update first to a version prior to all of the following: @versions (missing updates: @missing_updates).','','none'),(8627,'@module_name (<span class=\"admin-missing\">missing</span>)','','10.5.6'),(8628,'@module_name (<span class=\"admin-missing\">incompatible with</span> this version of Drupal core)','','none'),(8629,'@module_name (<span class=\"admin-missing\">incompatible with</span> version @version)','','none'),(8630,'@module_name (<span class=\"admin-disabled\">disabled</span>)','','none'),(8631,'Unable to install @theme due to missing module dependencies.','','none'),(8632,'Empty version','','none'),(8633,'Invalid version: @existing_version','','none'),(8634,'Testing config dependencies and optional configuration','','none'),(8635,'Stable 9','','none'),(8636,'A base theme using Drupal 9.0.0\'s core markup and CSS.','','none'),(8637,'Ban visitors from one or more IP addresses from accessing and viewing your site.','','none'),(8638,'Enter an <em>IP address</em> and click <em>Add</em>.','','none'),(8639,'You should see the IP address you entered listed under <em>Banned IP addresses</em>. Repeat the above steps to ban additional IP addresses.','','none'),(8640,'What types of data does a site have?','','10.5.6'),(8641,'What is a content entity?','','10.5.6'),(8642,'What is a field?','','10.5.6'),(8643,'Within entity items, the data is stored in individual <em>fields</em>, each of which holds one type of data, such as formatted or plain text, images or other files, or dates. Fields can be added by an administrator on entity sub-types, so that all entity items of a given entity sub-type have the same collection of fields available, and they can be single-valued or multiple-valued. When you create or edit entity items, you are specifying the values for the fields on the entity item.','','10.5.6'),(8644,'What is a reference field?','','10.5.6'),(8645,'A <em>reference field</em> is a field that stores a relationship between an entity and one or more other entities, which may belong to the same or different entity type. For example, a <em>Content reference</em> field on a content type stores a relationship between one content item and one or more other content items.','','10.5.6'),(8646,'What field types are available?','','10.5.6'),(8647,'The following field types are provided by the core system and core modules (many more are provided by contributed modules):','','10.5.6'),(8648,'Boolean, Number (provided by the core system): Stores true/false values and numbers','','10.5.6'),(8649,'Comment (provided by the core Comment module): Allows users to add comments to an entity','','10.5.6'),(8650,'Date, Timestamp (Datetime module): Stores dates and times','','10.5.6'),(8651,'Email (core system): Stores email addresses','','10.5.6'),(8652,'Link (Link module): Stores URLs and link text','','10.5.6'),(8653,'Telephone (Telephone module): Stores telephone numbers','','10.5.6'),(8654,'What is a formatter?','','10.5.6'),(8655,'A <em>formatter</em> is a way to display a field; most field types offer several types of formatters, and most formatters have settings that further define how the field is displayed. It is also possible to completely hide a field from display, and you have the option of showing or hiding the field\'s label when it is displayed.','','10.5.6'),(8656,'What is a widget?','','10.5.6'),(8657,'A <em>widget</em> is a way to edit a field. Some field types, such as plain text single-line fields, have only one widget available (in this case, a single-line text input field). Other field types offer choices for the widget; for example, single-valued <em>List</em> fields can use a <em>Select</em> or <em>Radio button</em> widget for editing. Many widget types have settings that further define how the field can be edited.','','10.5.6'),(8658,'Managing content structure overview','','10.5.6'),(8659,'Besides the field modules listed in the previous section, there are additional core modules that you can use to manage your content structure:','','10.5.6'),(8660,'Configure your system so that cron will run automatically.','','10.5.6'),(8661,'What are cron tasks?','','10.5.6'),(8662,'To ensure that your site and its modules continue to function well, a group of administrative operations should be run periodically. These operations are called <em>cron</em> tasks, and running the tasks is known as <em>running cron</em>. Depending on how often content is updated on your site, you might need to run cron on a schedule ranging from hourly to weekly to keep your site running well.','','10.5.6'),(8663,'What options are available for running cron?','','10.5.6'),(8664,'If the core Automated Cron module is installed, your site will run cron periodically, on a schedule you can configure.','','10.5.6'),(8665,'You can set up a task on your web server to visit the <em> cron URL</em>, which is unique to your site, on a schedule.','','10.5.6'),(8666,'You can also run cron manually, but this is not the recommended way to make sure it is run periodically.','','10.5.6'),(8667,'If you want to run cron right now, click <em>Run cron</em> and wait for cron to finish.','','10.5.6'),(8668,'If you have a way to configure tasks on your web server, copy the link where it says <em>To run cron from outside the site, go to</em>. Set up a task to visit that URL on your desired cron schedule, such as once an hour or once a week. (On Linux-like servers, you can use the <em>wget</em> command to visit a URL.) If you configure an outside task, you should uninstall the Automated Cron module.','','10.5.6'),(8669,'If you are not configuring an outside task, and you have the core Automated Cron module installed, select a schedule for automated cron runs in <em>Cron settings</em> &gt; <em>Run cron every</em>. Click <em>Save configuration</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8670,'What is a module?','','10.5.6'),(8671,'A <em>module</em> is a set of PHP, JavaScript, and/or CSS files that extends site features and adds functionality. A set of <em>Core modules</em> is distributed as part of the core software download. Additional <em>Contributed modules</em> can be downloaded separately from the <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/project_module\">Download &amp; Extend page on drupal.org</a>.','','10.5.6'),(8672,'What is an Experimental module?','','10.5.6'),(8673,'An <em>Experimental</em> module is a module that is still in development and is not yet stable. Using Experimental modules on production sites is not recommended.','','10.5.6'),(8674,'What are installing and uninstalling?','','10.5.6'),(8675,'Installing a core or downloaded contributed module means turning it on, so that you can use its features and functionality. Uninstalling means turning it off and removing all of its configuration. A module cannot be uninstalled if another installed module depends on it, or if you have created content on your site using the module -- you would need to delete the content and uninstall dependent modules first.','','10.5.6'),(8676,'Extending overview','','10.5.6'),(8677,'See the related topics listed below for help performing tasks related to extending the functionality of your site.','','10.5.6'),(8678,'Maintaining and troubleshooting overview','','10.5.6'),(8679,'Here are some tasks and hints related to maintaining your site, and troubleshooting problems that may come up on your site. See the related topics below for more information.','','10.5.6'),(8680,'Configure your site so that cron runs periodically.','','10.5.6'),(8681,'If your site is not behaving as expected, clear the cache before trying to diagnose the problem.','','10.5.6'),(8682,'There are several site reports that can help you diagnose problems with your site. There are also two core modules that can be used for error logging: Database Logging and Syslog.','','10.5.6'),(8683,'Find the particular sub-type that you want to add the field to, and click <em>Manage fields</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8684,'Click <em>Add field</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8685,'The <em>Label</em> field should now be visible; enter a label for the field, which is used as the field label for both content editing and content display.','','10.5.6'),(8686,'Click <em>Save and continue</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8687,'On the next screen, enter a value for <em>Allowed number of values</em>. You can limit the field to one value per entity item, a set number of values, or set it to have unlimited values. Click <em>Save field settings</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8688,'On the next screen, optionally edit the settings for the field, which vary depending on what field type you are creating. For all fields, you can edit the <em>Label</em>, <em>Help text</em> (text to be displayed below the field on the content editing page), and <em>Required field</em> (to make it so a value must be entered in order to save the content when editing). You can also configure a default value for the field.','','10.5.6'),(8689,'Find the particular sub-type that you want to configure the display of, and click <em>Manage display</em> in the <em>Operations</em> list.','','10.5.6'),(8690,'Use the drag arrows to order the fields in your preferred order.','','10.5.6'),(8691,'Drag any fields that you do not wish to see in the display to the <em>Disabled</em> section.','','10.5.6'),(8692,'In the <em>Label</em> column, select the position for each field label in the display, or <em>- Hidden -</em> to hide a label. You can also choose <em>- Visually Hidden-</em> if you want the label\'s text to appear in the HTML page, so that screen readers and search engines can read it, but it will not be visible.','','10.5.6'),(8693,'In the <em>Format</em> column, select the formatter for displaying each field.','','10.5.6'),(8694,'After selecting the desired formatters, click the settings gear in each row to change the settings for the formatter.','','10.5.6'),(8695,'When you are done making changes, click <em>Save</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8696,'Test the display for your entity sub-type by viewing an entity. If needed, return to these steps to further refine the display.','','10.5.6'),(8697,'Find the particular sub-type that you want to configure the editing form for, and click <em>Manage form display</em> in the <em>Operations</em> list.','','10.5.6'),(8698,'Drag any fields that you do not wish to see on the editing form to the <em>Disabled</em> section.','','10.5.6'),(8699,'In the <em>Widget</em> column, select the widget for editing each field.','','10.5.6'),(8700,'After selecting the desired widgets, click the settings gear in each row to change the settings for the widget.','','10.5.6'),(8701,'Test the editing form for your entity sub-type by editing or creating an entity. If needed, return to these steps to further refine the form.','','10.5.6'),(8702,'In <em>Add a new field</em>, select the type of reference field you want to add. The <em>Reference</em> section of the select list shows the most common types of reference field; choose <em>Other...</em> if the entity type you want to reference is not listed.','','10.5.6'),(8703,'On the next screen, verify that the type of entity you want to reference is shown in <em>Type of item to reference</em>, or select it if not. Enter a value for <em>Allowed number of values</em>. You can limit the field to one value per entity item, a set number of values, or set it to have unlimited values. Click <em>Save field settings</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8704,'On the next screen, optionally edit the settings for <em>Label</em>, <em>Help text</em> (text to be displayed below the field on the content editing page), and <em>Required field</em> (to make it so a value must be entered in order to save the content when editing).','','10.5.6'),(8705,'In the <em>Reference type</em> section, you will usually want to limit the entity sub-types that can be referenced; for example, if you are creating a <em>Content</em> reference, you can check one or two <em>Content type</em> choices. The choices will be easier for content editors to scan if you also choose a sort value (normally the entity title or label field).','','10.5.6'),(8706,'Clear the data in the site cache.','','10.5.6'),(8707,'What is the cache?','','10.5.6'),(8708,'Some of the calculations that are done when your site loads a page take a long time to run. To save time when these calculations would need to be done again, their results can be <em>cached</em> in your site\'s database. There are internal mechanisms to <em>clear</em> cached data when the conditions or assumptions that went into the calculation have changed, but you can also clear cached data manually. When your site is misbehaving, a good first step is to clear the cache and see if the problem goes away.','','10.5.6'),(8709,'Click <em>Clear all caches</em>. Your site\'s cached data will be cleared.','','10.5.6'),(8710,'Put your site in maintenance mode to perform maintenance operations, and then return to normal mode when finished.','','10.5.6'),(8711,'What is maintenance mode?','','10.5.6'),(8712,'When your site is in maintenance mode, most site visitors will see a simple maintenance mode message page, rather than being able to use the full functionality of the site. Users with <em>Use the site in maintenance mode</em> permission who are already logged in will be able to use the full site, and the log in page at <em>/user</em> will also be accessible to anyone.','','10.5.6'),(8713,'Check <em>Put site into maintenance mode</em>, optionally change the <em>Message to display when in maintenance mode</em>, and click <em>Save configuration</em>. Your site will be in maintenance mode.','','10.5.6'),(8714,'Perform your maintenance operations.','','10.5.6'),(8715,'Uncheck <em>Put site into maintenance mode</em> and click <em>Save configuration</em>. Your site will be back in normal operation mode.','','10.5.6'),(8716,'Install a core module, or a contributed module that has already been downloaded.','','10.5.6'),(8717,'Enter a word from the module name or description into the filter box, to make the list of modules smaller. Locate the module you want to install.','','10.5.6'),(8718,'Check the box next to the name of the module you want to install; you can also check more than one box to install multiple modules at the same time. If the checkbox is disabled for the module you are trying to install, expand the information to see why -- you may need to download an additional module that your module requires.','','10.5.6'),(8719,'Click <em>Install</em> at the bottom of the page. If you chose to install a module with dependencies that were not already installed, or if you chose an Experimental module, confirm your choice on the next page.','','10.5.6'),(8720,'Wait for the module (or modules) to be installed. You should be returned to the <em>Extend</em> page with a message saying the module or modules were installed.','','10.5.6'),(8721,'Enter a word from the module name or description into the filter box, to make the list of modules smaller. Locate the module you want to uninstall.','','10.5.6'),(8722,'In the <em>Description</em> column, see if there are reasons that this module cannot be uninstalled. For example, you may have created content using this module (which you would need to delete first), or there may be another module installed that requires this module to be installed (you would need to uninstall the other module first).','','10.5.6'),(8723,'If there are no reasons listed, the module can be uninstalled. Check the box in the <em>Uninstall</em> column, next to the module\'s name.','','10.5.6'),(8724,'Click <em>Uninstall</em> at the bottom of the page. Verify the list of modules to be uninstalled and configuration to be deleted on the confirmation page, and click <em>Uninstall</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8725,'Wait for the module to be uninstalled. You should be returned to the <em>Uninstall</em> page with a message saying the module was uninstalled.','','10.5.6'),(8726,'Run reports to learn about the status and health of your site.','','10.5.6'),(8727,'If you have the core Database Logging module installed, in the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Reports</em> &gt; <em>Recent log messages</em> to see a report of the error and informational messages your site has generated. You can filter the report by <em>Severity</em> to see only the most critical messages, if desired.','','10.5.6'),(8728,'Click <em>Add user</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8729,'Enter the <em>Email address</em>, <em>Username</em>, and <em>Password</em> (twice) for the new user.','','10.5.6'),(8730,'Verify that the <em>Roles</em> checked for the new user are correct.','','10.5.6'),(8731,'If you want the new user to receive an email message notifying them of the new account, check <em>Notify user of new account</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8732,'Optionally, change other settings on the form.','','10.5.6'),(8733,'Click <em>Create new account</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8734,'You will be left on the <em>Add user</em> page; repeat these steps if you have more user accounts to create.','','10.5.6'),(8735,'Create a new role.','','10.5.6'),(8736,'Click <em>Add role</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8737,'Enter the desired <em>Role name</em>. If desired, click <em>Edit</em> to change the <em>Machine name</em> for the role.','','10.5.6'),(8738,'Click <em>Save</em>. You should be returned to the <em>Roles</em> page and your new role should be in the role list.','','10.5.6'),(8739,'What is a user?','','10.5.6'),(8740,'A user is anyone accessing or viewing your site. <em>Anonymous</em> users are users who are not logged in, and <em>Authenticated</em> users are users who are logged in.','','10.5.6'),(8741,'What is a role?','','10.5.6'),(8742,'<em>Roles</em> are used to group and classify users; each user can be assigned one or more roles. There are also special roles for all anonymous and all authenticated users.','','10.5.6'),(8743,'What is a permission?','','10.5.6'),(8744,'Granting a <em>permission</em> to a role allows users who have been assigned that role to perform an action on the site, such as viewing content, editing or creating  a particular type of content, administering settings for a particular module, or using a particular function of the site (such as search).','','10.5.6'),(8745,'Overview of managing user accounts and visitors','','10.5.6'),(8746,'The core User module allows users to register, log in, and log out, and administrators to manage user roles and permissions. The core Ban module allows administrators to ban certain IP addresses from accessing the site. Depending on which modules you have installed on your site, the related topics below will help you with tasks related to managing user accounts and visitors.','','10.5.6'),(8747,'Modify the permissions for an existing role.','','10.5.6'),(8748,'Review the permissions for the role, paying particular attention to the permissions marked with <em>Warning: Give to trusted roles only; this permission has security implications.</em> Uncheck permissions that this role should not have, in the row of the permission and the column of the role; check permissions that this role should have.','','10.5.6'),(8749,'Click <em>Save permissions</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8750,'Update or delete an existing user account.','','10.5.6'),(8751,'Enter all or part of the user name or email address of the user account you want to update or delete, and click <em>Filter</em>. A short list of user accounts, including the account of interest, should be shown in the table; if not, modify the filter text until you can find the account of interest.','','10.5.6'),(8752,'Click <em>Edit</em> in the <em>Operations</em> area of the account of interest.','','10.5.6'),(8753,'To delete the user account, scroll to the bottom and click <em>Cancel account</em>. Select what you want to happen to the user\'s content on the next screen, and click <em>Cancel account</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8754,'To update the user account, enter new values in the form and click <em>Save</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8755,'Text alternative','','10.2.3'),(8756,'Programming languages','','10.4.5'),(8757,'Media has been removed.','','none'),(8758,'Olivero Utilities','','none'),(8759,'Enable mobile menu at all widths','','none'),(8760,'Header site branding background color','','none'),(8761,'Search by keyword or phrase.','','none'),(8762,'Nav Medium','','none'),(8763,'Grid Medium','','none'),(8764,'Grid Max','','none'),(8765,'Olivero','','none'),(8766,'olivero settings','','none'),(8767,'Schema information for module %module was missing from the database. You should manually review the module updates and your database to check if any updates have been skipped up to, and including, %last_update_hook.','','none'),(8768,'Add, remove, or rearrange the fields on personal and site-wide contact forms.','','10.5.6'),(8769,'What are the fields on contact forms?','','10.5.6'),(8770,'Click <em>Manage fields</em> for the form you want to change the fields of, and add or remove one or more fields on the form.','','10.5.6'),(8771,'Click <em>Manage form display</em> to change the order or configuration of the fields on the form.','','10.5.6'),(8772,'Configure personal contact forms for registered users on the website.','','10.5.6'),(8773,'In the <em>Contact settings</em> section, check/uncheck the box to enable/disable the contact form for new user accounts.','','10.5.6'),(8774,'Click <em>Save configuration</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8775,'Verify that permissions are correct for your site\'s roles, including the generic <em>Anonymous user</em> and <em>Authenticated user</em>. In order to use personal contact forms, users need both <em>View user information</em> (in the <em>User</em> section, which enables them to view user profiles) and <em>Use users\' personal contact forms</em> (in the <em>Contact</em> section, which enables them to use contact forms if they can view user profiles).','','10.5.6'),(8776,'Create a new site-wide contact form.','','10.5.6'),(8777,'Click <em>Add contact form</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8778,'Fill in the <em>Label</em> (title) for the form, <em>Recipients</em>, and optionally the other settings.','','10.5.6'),(8779,'Click <em>Save</em>. You should see your new contact form in the table, along with a link to view it.','','10.5.6'),(8780,'What are contact forms?','','10.5.6'),(8781,'There are two different types of contact forms provided by the core Contact module: personal contact forms, which allow users to contact other users on the site, and site-wide contact forms, which allow users to contact site managers or administrators. A site can have more than one site-wide contact form; each has its own fields to fill out, recipients, and URL; you can also change the fields that are shown on personal contact forms.','','10.5.6'),(8782,'Site visitors can email registered users on your site by using the personal contact form, without knowing or learning the email address of the recipient. When a user with the correct permissions is viewing another user\'s profile, the viewer will see a <em>Contact</em> tab or link, which leads to the personal contact form if the user whose profile is being viewed has their personal contact form enabled (this is a user account setting).','','10.5.6'),(8783,'Contact form management tasks','','10.5.6'),(8784,'See the related topics below for specific tasks.','','10.5.6'),(8785,'Click <em>Edit</em> for the site-wide form you want to be the default.','','10.5.6'),(8786,'Check <em>Make this the default form</em> and click <em>Save</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8787,'Tracking overview','','10.5.6'),(8788,'The core History module tracks how recently users have viewed content items, and provides a Views field and filter that can be used to show users content that they haven\'t yet seen.','','10.5.6'),(8789,'If you have one or more tracking modules installed on your site, see the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.5.6'),(8790,'Click <em>Save settings</em>. You should be returned to the <em>Manage fields</em> page, with your new field in the list.','','10.5.6'),(8791,'What content visits are tracked?','','10.5.6'),(8792,'The core History module tracks when each logged-in user has most recently visited each content item page on the site. This allows content to be marked as <em>new</em> or <em>updated</em> for each user, meaning that it was newly created or has been updated since the last time they visited its page. These records are kept for one month, meaning that content older than one month is never marked as new or updated.','','10.5.6'),(8793,'What options are available for using this tracking information?','','10.5.6'),(8794,'You can display the new/updated status of content by creating or editing a view. There is a <em>Has new content</em> field for <em>Content</em> views, which displays the new/updated marker. There is also a <em>Has new content</em> filter, which limits the view to new and updated content.','','10.5.6'),(8795,'Configure and display tracking of how many times content has been viewed on your site, assuming that the core Statistics module is currently installed.','','none'),(8796,'What are the options for displaying popularity tracking?','','none'),(8797,'You can display a <em>content hits</em> counter of how many times a content item has been viewed, at the bottom of content item pages. You can also place a <em>Popular content</em> block in a region of your theme, which shows a list of the most popular and most recently-viewed content.','','none'),(8798,'Check <em>Count content views</em> and click <em>Save configuration</em>.','','none'),(8799,'In the <em>Statistics</em> section, check or uncheck the <em>View content hits</em> permission for each role. Click <em>Save permissions</em>.','','none'),(8800,'Optionally, in the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>Block layout</em>. Place the <em>Popular content</em> block in a region in your theme (you will need to have the core Block module installed; see related topic for more details on block placement).','','none'),(8801,'Assuming that you have the core Activity Tracker module installed, these pages that show recently-updated content are available:','','none'),(8802,'The <em>My recent content</em> tab on the <em>Recent content</em> page (for logged-in users) limits the list to content created or commented on by the user viewing the page.','','none'),(8803,'The <em>Activity</em> tab on a user profile shows the same list for the user whose profile is being viewed.','','none'),(8804,'Whether to force the output to be an absolute link (beginning with http: or https:)','','none'),(8805,'Whether to force this URL to point to a secure location (beginning with https:)','','none'),(8806,'Checked %langcode translation for %project.','','10.5.6'),(8807,'Downloaded %langcode translation for %project.','','none'),(8808,'Importing %langcode translation for %project.','','none'),(8809,'Imported %langcode translation for %project.','','none'),(8810,'It looks like you have content on your new site which <strong>may be overwritten</strong> if you continue to run this upgrade. The upgrade should be performed on a clean Drupal @version installation. For more information see the <a target=\"_blank\" href=\":id-conflicts-handbook\">upgrade handbook</a>.','','none'),(8811,'An upgrade has already been performed on this site. To perform a new migration, create a clean and empty new install of Drupal @version. Rollbacks are not yet supported through the user interface. For more information, see the <a href=\":url\">upgrading handbook</a>.','','none'),(8812,'Upgrade a site by importing its files and the data from its database into a clean and empty new install of Drupal @version. See the <a href=\":url\">Drupal site upgrades handbook</a> for more information.','','none'),(8813,'This empty Drupal @version installation you will import the old site to.','','none'),(8814,'<strong>Enable all modules on this new site</strong> that are enabled on the old site. For example, if the old site uses the Book module, then enable the Book module on this new site so that the existing data can be imported to it.','','none'),(8815,'The menu name (= set name) for this shortcut link.','','none'),(8816,'There are errors with some installed themes. Visit the <a href=\":link\">status report page</a> for more information.','','none'),(8817,'There are errors with some installed modules. Visit the <a href=\":link\">status report page</a> for more information.','','none'),(8818,'Display machine name must contain only lowercase letters, numbers, or underscores.','','none'),(8819,'Module %name has an entry in the system.schema key/value storage, but is missing from your site. <a href=\":url\">More information about this error</a>.','','none'),(8820,'Module %name has an entry in the system.schema key/value storage, but is not installed. <a href=\":url\">More information about this error</a>.','','none'),(8821,'Missing required data for configuration: %config','','none'),(8822,'Search form (narrow)','','10.2.3'),(8823,'Search form (wide)','','10.2.3'),(8824,'What is a book?','','none'),(8825,'A book is a structured group of content pages, arranged in a hierarchical structure called a <em>book outline</em>. A book hierarchy can be up to nine levels deep, and a book can include <em>Book page</em> content items or other content items. Every book has a default book-specific navigation block, which contains links that lead to the previous and next pages in the book and to the level above the current page in the book\'s structure.','','none'),(8826,'What are the permissions for books?','','none'),(8827,'Allows users to add new books to the site.','','none'),(8828,'Add content and child pages to books and manage their hierarchies','','none'),(8829,'Allows users to add configured types of content to existing books.','','none'),(8830,'Allows users to add <em>any</em> type of content to a book, use the book overview administration page, and rearrange the pages of a book from the book outline page.','','none'),(8831,'Administer site configuration (in the System module section)','','none'),(8832,'Allows users to do many site configuration tasks, including configuring books. This permission has security implications.','','none'),(8833,'Allows users to click the <em>printer-friendly version</em> link to generate a printer-friendly display of the page, which includes pages below it in the book outline.','','none'),(8834,'<em>Book page</em> content permissions (in the Node module section)','','none'),(8835,'Like other content types, the <em>Book page</em> content type has separate permissions for creating, editing, and deleting a user\'s own and any content items of this type.','','none'),(8836,'Managing books','','none'),(8837,'Book management is handled by the core Book module. The topics listed below will help you create, edit, and configure books.','','none'),(8838,'Add a page to an existing book.','','none'),(8839,'Enter a title for the page and some text for the body of the page.','','none'),(8840,'In the vertical tabs area, click <em>Book Outline</em>. Select the book you want to add the page to in the <em>Book</em> select list. If you want to insert this page into the book hierarchy, also select the desired parent page in the <em>Parent item</em> select list.','','none'),(8841,'Select the desired weight for the page in the <em>Weight</em> select list (pages with the same parent item are ordered from lowest to highest weight).','','none'),(8842,'Click <em>Save</em> to add the page to the book.','','none'),(8843,'Configure settings related to books.','','none'),(8844,'Check all of the content types that you would like to use as book pages in the <em>Content types allowed in book outlines</em> field.','','none'),(8845,'In the <em>Content type for the Add child page link</em> field, select the content type that will be created from the <em>Add child page</em> link on a book page.','','none'),(8846,'Create a new book.','','none'),(8847,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Content</em> &gt; <em>Add content</em> &gt; <em>Book page</em>. If you have configured additional content types that can be added to books, you can substitute a different content type for <em>Book page</em>.','','none'),(8848,'Enter a title for the book, and if desired, some text for the body of the book\'s title page.','','none'),(8849,'In the vertical tabs area, click <em>Book Outline</em>. Select <em>- Create a new book -</em> from the <em>Book</em> select list.','','none'),(8850,'Click <em>Save</em> to create the book.','','none'),(8851,'Change the order and titles of pages within a book.','','none'),(8852,'Click <em>Edit order and titles</em> for the book you would like to change.','','none'),(8853,'Drag the book pages to the desired order.','','none'),(8854,'If desired, enter new text for one or more of the page titles within the book.','','none'),(8855,'Click <em>Save book pages</em>.','','none'),(8856,'What are breakpoints?','','10.5.6'),(8857,'Breakpoints are the point at which your site\'s content will respond to provide the user with the best possible layout to consume the information. A breakpoint separates the height or width of viewports (screens, printers, and other media output types) into steps. For instance, a width breakpoint of 40em creates two steps: one for widths up to 40em and one for widths above 40em. Breakpoints can be used to define when layouts should shift from one form to another, when images should be resized, and other changes that need to respond to changes in viewport height or width.','','10.5.6'),(8858,'What are media queries?','','10.5.6'),(8859,'Media  queries are a formal way to encode breakpoints. For instance, a width breakpoint at 40em would be written as the media query \"(min-width: 40em)\". Breakpoints are really just media queries with some additional meta-data, such as a name and multiplier information.','','10.5.6'),(8860,'What are resolution multipliers?','','10.5.6'),(8861,'What is a breakpoint group?','','10.5.6'),(8862,'Managing breakpoints and breakpoint groups overview','','10.5.6'),(8863,'The <em>Breakpoint</em> module allows you to define breakpoints and breakpoint groups in YAML files. Modules and themes can use the API provided by the <em>Breakpoint</em> module to define breakpoints and breakpoint groups, and to assign resolution multipliers to breakpoints.','','10.5.6'),(8864,'W3C standards for media queries','','10.5.6'),(8865,'What is a theme?','','10.5.6'),(8866,'A <em>theme</em> is a set of files that define the visual look and feel of your site. The core software and modules that run on your site determine which content (including HTML text and other data stored in the database, uploaded images, and any other asset files) is displayed on the pages of your site. The theme determines the HTML markup and CSS styling that wraps the content. Several basic themes are supplied with the core software; additional <em>contributed themes</em> can be downloaded separately from the <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/project_theme\">Download &amp; Extend page on drupal.org</a>, or you can create your own theme.','','10.5.6'),(8867,'What is a base theme?','','10.5.6'),(8868,'What is a layout?','','10.5.6'),(8869,'Changing site appearance overview','','10.5.6'),(8870,'The core Field UI module provides a user interface for managing fields and their display on entities.','','10.5.6'),(8871,'The core Layout Builder module provides a more flexible user interface for configuring the display of entities.','','10.5.6'),(8872,'What is site performance?','','10.5.6'),(8873,'Site performance, in this context, refers to speed factors such as the page load time and the response time after a user action on a page.','','10.5.6'),(8874,'What is caching?','','10.5.6'),(8875,'Caching is saving already-rendered HTML output and other calculated data for later use the first time it is needed. This saves time, because the next time the same data is needed it can be quickly retrieved instead of recalculated. Automatic caching systems also include mechanisms to delete cached calculations or mark them as no longer valid when the underlying data changes. To facilitate that, cached data has a <em>lifetime</em>, which is the maximum time before the data will be deleted from the cache (forcing recalculation).','','10.5.6'),(8876,'What is file aggregation?','','10.5.6'),(8877,'Aggregation is when CSS and JavaScript files are merged together and compressed into a format that is much smaller than the original. This allows for faster transmission and faster rendering on the other end.','','10.5.6'),(8878,'What can I do to improve my site\'s performance?','','10.5.6'),(8879,'Internal Page Cache module','','10.5.6'),(8880,'Caches pages requested by users who are not logged in (anonymous users). Do not use if your site needs to send different output to different anonymous users.','','10.5.6'),(8881,'Internal Dynamic Page Cache module','','10.5.6'),(8882,'Caches data for both authenticated and anonymous users, with non-cacheable data in the page converted to placeholders and calculated when the page is requested.','','10.5.6'),(8883,'Big Pipe module','','10.5.6'),(8884,'Changes the way pages are sent to users, so that cacheable parts are sent out first with placeholders, and the uncacheable or personalized parts of the page are streamed afterwards. This allows the browser to render the bulk of the page quickly and fill in the details later.','','10.5.6'),(8885,'Performance page settings','','10.5.6'),(8886,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, if you navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Development</em> &gt; <em>Performance</em>, you will find a setting for the maximum cache lifetime, as well as the ability to turn on CSS and JavaScript file aggregation.','','10.5.6'),(8887,'Online documentation for the Internal Page Cache module','','10.5.6'),(8888,'Online documentation for the Internal Dynamic Page Cache module','','10.5.6'),(8889,'Online documentation for the BigPipe module','','10.5.6'),(8890,'What are the parts of a layout?','','none'),(8891,'Find the particular sub-type that you want to create a layout for, and click <em>Manage display</em> in the <em>Operations</em> list.','','none'),(8892,'Under <em>Layout options</em>, check <em>Use Layout Builder</em>. You can also check the box below to allow each entity item to have its layout individually customized (if it is left unchecked, the site will use the same layout for all items of this entity sub-type).','','none'),(8893,'Click <em>Save</em>. You will be returned to the <em>Manage display</em> page, but you will no longer see the table of fields of the classic display manager.','','none'),(8894,'Click <em>Manage layout</em> to enter layout management view. A default layout will be set up for you, with a single one-column section containing the fields on your entity sub-type.','','none'),(8895,'To remove the default section and start from an empty layout, find and click the <em>Remove</em> button for the default section, which looks like an X. Confirm by clicking <em>Remove</em> in the pop-up dialog.','','none'),(8896,'Add new sections, each with one to four columns, to your layout. For instance, you might want a one-column section at the top, a two-column section in the middle, and then a one-column section at the bottom. To add a section, click <em>Add section</em> and click the desired number of columns. For multi-column sections, set the column width percentages and click <em>Add section</em> in the pop-up dialog.','','none'),(8897,'In each section, click <em>Add block</em> to add a block. You will see a list of the blocks available on your site, plus a section called <em>Content fields</em> with a block for each field on your content item. Each block can be configured, if desired, with a <em>Title</em>, and for content field blocks, you can also configure the field formatter. Continue to add blocks to your sections until all the desired blocks and fields are displayed.','','none'),(8898,'Verify your layout. You can check <em>Show content preview</em> to show a preview of what your layout will look like, or uncheck it to see the names of the fields and blocks in each section.','','none'),(8899,'If needed, reorder the blocks by dragging them to new locations. If you hover over a block, a contextual menu will appear that will let you change the configuration of the block, remove the block, or <em>Move</em> blocks within the section using a more compact interface.','','none'),(8900,'When you are satisfied with your layout, click <em>Save layout</em>.','','none'),(8901,'Creating layout defaults','','none'),(8902,'Building Layouts Using the Layout Builder UI','','none'),(8903,'Install a core theme, or a contributed theme that has already been downloaded. Choose the default themes to use for the site and for administrative pages.','','10.5.6'),(8904,'Locate the themes that you want to use as the site default theme and for administrative pages.','','10.5.6'),(8905,'For each of these themes, if the theme is in the <em>Uninstalled themes</em> section, click the <em>Install</em> link to install the theme. Wait for the theme to be installed (translations might be downloaded). You should be returned to the <em>Appearance</em> page.','','10.5.6'),(8906,'Locate the theme that you want to be your default theme, which should now be in the <em>Installed themes</em> section. If it is not already labeled as the <em>default theme</em>, click the <em>Set as default</em> link.','','10.5.6'),(8907,'At the bottom of the page, select the <em>Administration theme</em> that you want to use on administrative pages. Click <em>Save configuration</em> if you selected a new theme.','','10.5.6'),(8908,'If you changed the default theme for your site, visit the site home page or another page on the non-administration part of your site and verify that the site is using the new theme. If you changed the administration theme, verify that the new theme is used on administrative pages.','','10.5.6'),(8909,'Uninstall a theme that was previously installed, but is no longer being used on the site.','','10.5.6'),(8910,'Locate the theme that you want to uninstall, in the <em>Installed themes</em> section.','','10.5.6'),(8911,'The form has become outdated. Press the back button, copy any unsaved work in the form, and then reload the page.','','none'),(8912,'Deployment identifier','','none'),(8913,'Configure one or more search pages.','','10.5.6'),(8914,'Scroll down to the <em>Search pages</em> section. You will see a list of the already-configured search pages on your site.','','10.5.6'),(8915,'To configure an existing search page, click <em>Edit</em>. Or, to add a new search page, select the <em>Search page type</em> and click <em>Add search page</em>.','','10.5.6'),(8916,'Enter the desired <em>Label</em> name and URL <em>Path</em> for the search page.','','10.5.6'),(8917,'For <em>Content</em> search pages, select the desired level of influence in ranking search results of the available <em>Content ranking</em> factors.','','10.5.6'),(8918,'Click <em>Save</em>. You will be returned to the <em>Search pages</em> page.','','10.5.6'),(8919,'Verify that the correct search page is listed as <em>Default</em> in the <em>Status</em> column. If not, click <em>Set as default</em> in the <em>Operations</em> list for the correct search page.','','10.5.6'),(8920,'Optionally, disable or delete any search pages that you do not want to have available on the site (disabling is temporary, while deleting is permanent).','','10.5.6'),(8921,'Manage the search index, and make sure that the site is fully indexed for searching.','','10.5.6'),(8922,'What is the search index?','','10.5.6'),(8923,'Under <em>Indexing throttle</em>, select the <em>Number of items to index per cron run</em>. A smaller number will make cron faster and reduce the possibility of timeout; a larger number will make sure more of your site is indexed in fewer cron runs.','','10.5.6'),(8924,'Under <em>Default indexing settings</em>, enter the desired <em>Minimum word length to index</em>. Words smaller than this length will be dropped from both keywords when searching and content when indexing.','','10.5.6'),(8925,'If your site uses Chinese, Japanese, or Korean languages, optionally check <em>Simple CJK handling</em> under <em>Default indexing settings</em> to provide some support for these languages.','','10.5.6'),(8926,'Click <em>Save configuration</em>, and you should be returned to the <em>Search pages</em> page.','','10.5.6'),(8927,'Click <em>Re-index site</em> if you have changed the indexing configuration, or later on, if you believe that the search index has been corrupted.','','10.5.6'),(8928,'After waiting for cron to run several times, verify that the content has been fully indexed for searching. The overall status is listed under <em>Indexing progress</em>, and the status for each search page is shown in the <em>Indexing progress</em> column of the <em>Search pages</em> section.','','10.5.6'),(8929,'What are search pages?','','10.5.6'),(8930,'The core Search module organizes site search into <em>pages</em>. Each page allows users to search a particular type of content with a particular configuration. The configuration includes specifying a URL that starts with <em>search</em>, a name for the page, and additional options for some search page types.','','10.5.6'),(8931,'What modules provide site search?','','10.5.6'),(8932,'The core Search module provides the ability to configure search pages; search page types are provided by both core and contributed modules. The core modules that provide search page types are:','','10.5.6'),(8933,'The Node module, for searching content pages','','10.5.6'),(8934,'The User module, for searching user profiles','','10.5.6'),(8935,'The Help module, for searching help topics','','10.5.6'),(8936,'As an alternative to the core Search module\'s system of search pages, you can use contributed modules to provide site search. For example, the <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/apachesolr\">Apache Solr</a> and <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/sphinx\">Sphinx</a> contributed modules use third-party technology to provide site search.','','10.5.6'),(8937,'What are the limitations of the core Search module?','','10.5.6'),(8938,'There are two main limitations of the core Search module. First, it is not appropriate for very large sites -- if you have a large site, look into other search technologies like Apache Solr. Second, the Node search page type only supports exact keyword matching, which is not the behavior that most users will expect. You can improve this by installing a language-specific stemming module for your language (such as <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/porterstemmer\">Porter Stemmer</a> for American English), which makes it so that, for example, a search for the word walk would match pages containing the words walk, walking, and walked.','','10.5.6'),(8939,'What are the search permissions?','','10.5.6'),(8940,'Users with <em>Use search</em> permission can use the <em>Search form</em> block and <em>Search</em> page; this permission is required for any search configured in the core Search module.','','10.5.6'),(8941,'In addition to <em>Use search</em>, <em>View user information</em> permission is needed for searching users.','','10.5.6'),(8942,'In addition to <em>Use search</em>, <em>View published content</em> permission is needed for searching content.','','10.5.6'),(8943,'Users with <em>Use advanced search</em> permission can use more complex search filtering when performing content searches.','','10.5.6'),(8944,'Configuring site search overview','','10.5.6'),(8945,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/documentation/modules/search\">Online documentation for the Search module</a>','','10.5.6'),(8946,'Document root for files','','none'),(8947,'Document root for public files','','none'),(8948,'Document root for private files','','none'),(8949,'Enables the mobile menu toggle at all widths.','','none'),(8950,'Configuring a previously-placed block','','none'),(8951,'Managing blocks','','none'),(8952,'Placing a block','','none'),(8953,'Adding content to a book','','none'),(8954,'Configuring books','','none'),(8955,'Creating a book','','none'),(8956,'Changing the outline of a book','','none'),(8957,'Managing height, width, and resolution breakpoints','','none'),(8958,'Managing the fields of contact forms','','none'),(8959,'Configuring personal contact forms','','none'),(8960,'Creating a new contact form','','none'),(8961,'Managing contact forms','','none'),(8962,'Setting a default contact form','','none'),(8963,'Using contextual links','','none'),(8964,'Changing the appearance of your site','','none'),(8965,'Managing content structure','','none'),(8966,'Running and configuring cron','','none'),(8967,'Extending and modifying your site functionality','','none'),(8968,'Maintaining and troubleshooting your site','','none'),(8969,'Optimizing site performance','','none'),(8970,'Making your site secure','','none'),(8971,'Tracking the content of your website','','none'),(8972,'Accessibility of the administrative interface','','none'),(8973,'Using the administrative interface','','none'),(8974,'Adding a field to an entity sub-type','','none'),(8975,'Configuring field display for an entity sub-type','','none'),(8976,'Configuring the edit form for an entity sub-type','','none'),(8977,'Adding a reference field to an entity sub-type','','none'),(8978,'Tracking which content a user has visited','','none'),(8979,'Changing the layout for an entity','','none'),(8980,'Configuring site search','','none'),(8981,'Creating and using shortcut administrative links','','none'),(8982,'Tracking and displaying popular content','','none'),(8983,'Clearing the site cache','','none'),(8984,'Changing basic site settings','','none'),(8985,'Configuring error responses, including 403/404 pages','','none'),(8986,'Enabling and disabling maintenance mode','','none'),(8987,'Installing a module','','none'),(8988,'Uninstalling a module','','none'),(8989,'Running reports on your site','','none'),(8990,'Installing a theme and setting default themes','','none'),(8991,'Uninstalling an unused theme','','none'),(8992,'Taking tours of administrative pages','','none'),(8993,'Viewing lists of recently-updated content','','none'),(8994,'Creating a user account','','none'),(8995,'Adding a new role','','none'),(8996,'Managing user accounts and site visitors','','none'),(8997,'Modifying the permissions for a role','','none'),(8998,'Configuring how user accounts are created and deleted','','none'),(8999,'Modifying or deleting a user account','','none'),(9000,'Module Link','','none'),(9001,'Site branding background color','','none'),(9002,'<em>You haven’t created any frontpage content yet.</em>','','none'),(9003,'Drupal is an open source platform for building amazing digital experiences. It’s made, used, taught, documented, and marketed by the <a href=\"@drupal_community\">Drupal community</a>. Our community is made up of people from around the world with a shared set of <a href=\"@drupal_values\">values</a>, collaborating together in a respectful manner. As we like to say:','','none'),(9004,'Come for the code, stay for the community.','','none'),(9005,'There are a few ways to get started with Drupal:','','none'),(9006,'<a href=\"@drupal_user_guide\">User Guide:</a> Includes installing, administering, site building, and maintaining the content of a Drupal website.','','none'),(9007,'<a href=\"@create_content\">Create Content:</a> Want to get right to work? Start adding content. <strong>Note:</strong> the information on this page will go away once you add content to your site. Read on and bookmark resources of interest.','','none'),(9008,'<a href=\"@drupal_extend\">Extend Drupal:</a> Drupal’s core software can be extended and customized in remarkable ways. Install additional functionality and change the look of your site using addons contributed by our community.','','none'),(9009,'Bookmark these links to our active Drupal community groups and support resources.','','none'),(9010,'<a href=\"@drupal_global_training_days\">Global Training Days:</a> Helpful information for evaluating Drupal as a framework and as a career path. Taught in your local language.','','none'),(9011,'<a href=\"@drupal_events\">Upcoming Events:</a> Learn and connect with others at conferences and events held around the world.','','none'),(9012,'<a href=\"@drupal_community\">Community Page:</a> List of key Drupal community groups with their own content.','','none'),(9013,'Get support and chat with the Drupal community on <a href=\"@drupal_slack\">Slack</a> or <a href=\"@drupal_chat\">DrupalChat</a>. When you’re looking for a solution to a problem, go to <a href=\"@drupal_answers\">Drupal Answers on Stack Exchange</a>.','','none'),(9014,'Migration failed with source plugin exception: @e in @file line @line','','none'),(9015,'Display %display has set node/% as path. This will not produce what you want. If you want to have multiple versions of the node view, use Layout Builder.','','none'),(9016,'See <a href=\"https://www.php.net/manual/datetime.format.php#refsect1-datetime.format-parameters\" target=\"_blank\">the documentation for PHP date formats</a>.','','none'),(9017,'The specified file \'%original_source\' could not be copied because the destination directory \'%destination_directory\' is not properly configured. This may be caused by a problem with file or directory permissions.','','none'),(9018,'A user-defined date format. See the <a href=\"https://www.php.net/manual/datetime.format.php#refsect1-datetime.format-parameters\">PHP manual</a> for available options.','','none'),(9019,'Manage translations for any entity that the user can edit','','10.5.6'),(9020,'The Filter module allows administrators to configure text formats. Text formats change how HTML tags and other text will be <em>processed and displayed</em> in the site. They are used to transform text, and also help to defend your website against potentially damaging input from malicious users. Visual text editors can be associated with text formats by using the <a href=\":editor_help\">Text Editor module</a>. For more information, see the <a href=\":filter_do\">online documentation for the Filter module</a>.','','none'),(9021,'There are four main types of data. <em>Content</em> is the information (text, images, etc.) meant to be displayed to website visitors. <em>Configuration</em> is data that defines how the content is displayed; some configuration (such as field labels) may also be visible to site visitors. <em>State</em> is temporary data about the state of your site, such as the last time the system <em>cron</em> jobs ran. <em>Session</em> is a subset of State information, related to users\' interactions with the site, such as site cookies and whether or not they are logged in.','','10.5.6'),(9022,'List (Options module): Stores values chosen from pre-defined lists, where the values can be numbers or text; see section below for more on list fields.','','10.5.6'),(9023,'Reference (core system): Stores entity references; see section above','','10.5.6'),(9024,'Text (Text module): Stores formatted and unformatted text; see section below for more on text fields.','','10.5.6'),(9025,'What settings are available for List field types?','','10.5.6'),(9026,'List fields associate pre-defined <em>keys</em> (or value codes) with <em>labels</em> that the user sees. For example, you might define a list field that shows the user the names of several locations, while behind the scenes a location code is stored in the database. Each list field type corresponds to one type of stored key. For example, a <em>List (integer)</em> field stores integers, while the <em>List (text)</em> field stores text strings. Once you have chosen the field type, the main setting for a list field is the <em>Allowed values</em> list, which associates the keys with the labels.','','10.5.6'),(9027,'What types of Text fields are available?','','10.5.6'),(9028,'There are several types of text fields, with different characteristics. Text fields can be either <em>plain</em> or <em>formatted</em>: plain text fields do not contain HTML, while formatted fields can contain HTML and are processed through <em>text filters</em> (these are provided by the core Filter module; if you have that module enabled, see the related topic below on filters for more information). Text fields can also be regular-length (with a limit of 255 characters) or <em>long</em> (with a very large character limit), and long formatted text fields can include a <em>summary</em> attribute. All possible combinations of these characteristics exist as text field types; for example, <em>Text (plain)</em> and <em>Text (formatted, long, with summary)</em> are two examples of text field types.','','10.5.6'),(9029,'What is a menu?','','10.5.6'),(9030,'A menu is a collection of <em>menu links</em> used to navigate a web site. Menus and menu links can be provided by modules or site administrators.','','10.5.6'),(9031,'Managing menus overview','','10.5.6'),(9032,'The core Menu UI module provides a user interface for managing menus, including creating new menus, reordering menu links, and disabling links provided by modules. It also provides the ability for links to content items to be added to menus while editing, if configured on the content type. The core Custom Menu Links module provides the ability to add custom links to menus. Each menu can be displayed by placing a block in a theme region; some themes also can display a menu outside of the block system. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.5.6'),(9033,'Enabling web services','','none'),(9034,'What is a web service?','','10.5.6'),(9035,'A web service allows your site to provide its content and data to other web sites and applications. Typically, the data is transported via <a href=\"https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hypertext_Transfer_Protocol\">HTTP</a> in a serialized machine-readable format.','','10.5.6'),(9036,'What is serialization?','','10.5.6'),(9037,'Serialization is the process of converting complex data structures into text strings, so that they can be exchanged and stored. The reverse process is called <em>deserialization</em>. JSON and XML are the two most-commonly-used data serialization formats for web services.','','10.5.6'),(9038,'What is HTTP Basic authentication?','','10.5.6'),(9039,'<a href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_access_authentication\">HTTP Basic authentication</a> is a method for authenticating requests by sending a user name and password along with the request.','','10.5.6'),(9040,'What modules provide web services?','','10.5.6'),(9041,'JSON:API module','','10.5.6'),(9042,'RESTful Web Services module','','10.5.6'),(9043,'Serialization module','','10.5.6'),(9044,'Provides a framework for adding specific serialization formats for other modules to use.','','10.5.6'),(9045,'HTTP Basic Authentication module','','10.5.6'),(9046,'There are also contributed modules that provide web services.','','10.5.6'),(9047,'Online documentation for the RESTful Web Services module','','10.5.6'),(9048,'Online documentation for the JSON:API module','','10.5.6'),(9049,'Comparison of the RESTFul Web Services and JSON:API modules','','10.5.6'),(9050,'Connecting text editors to text formats','','none'),(9051,'What is a text editor?','','10.5.6'),(9052,'Managing text filters and text formats','','none'),(9053,'Configure text formats on the site.','','10.5.6'),(9054,'What are text filters and text formats?','','10.5.6'),(9055,'A text filter is a processing step that can be applied to text, either to transform it in some way (such as converting URLs in the text into HTML links), or to defend against potentially-dangerous input from site users. A text format is an ordered sequence of text filters. Text filters are provided by modules; text formats are managed by the core Filter module.','','10.5.6'),(9056,'Text fields that have \"formatted\" in the field type name, such as <em>Text (formatted)</em>, use text formats. Users choose the text format when editing the field text; when the field text is shown on the site, it is processed by the chosen text format. Administrators can configure text formats and assign permissions for who can use each format. If the core Text Editor module is enabled, administrators can also associate visual editors with text formats.','','10.5.6'),(9057,'What text filters are available?','','10.5.6'),(9058,'Some of the more commonly used text filters are:','','10.5.6'),(9059,'Limits which HTML tags can be used; useful both for site security and enforcing site design.','','10.5.6'),(9060,'Line breaks in HTML source are displayed as horizontal spaces. This filter converts line breaks into HTML paragraph and line break tags.','','10.5.6'),(9061,'Takes plain URLs in text and turns them into HTML links.','','10.5.6'),(9062,'For text formats that allow HTML image tags, restricts images to URLs within this site.','','10.5.6'),(9063,'Click <em>Configure</em> to configure an existing text format, or <em>+ Add text format</em> to create a new text format.','','10.5.6'),(9064,'Enter the desired <em>Name</em> for the text format.','','10.5.6'),(9065,'Check the <em>Roles</em> that can use this text format. Some HTML tags allow users to embed malicious links or scripts in text. To ensure security, anonymous and untrusted users should only have access to text formats that restrict them to either plain text or a safe set of HTML tags. <strong>Improper text format configuration is a security risk.</strong>','','10.5.6'),(9066,'If the core Text Editor module is installed, see the related topic to connect a text editor to this text format.','','10.5.6'),(9067,'Under <em>Enabled filters</em>, check the text filters that you want to use.','','10.5.6'),(9068,'Under <em>Filter processing order</em>, drag the filters to the correct order. Choose the order carefully; for example, if you have a filter that results in a particular HTML tag being added to the text, that should run after a filter that restricts HTML tags, to avoid deleting the new tags the first filter added.','','10.5.6'),(9069,'Under <em>Filter settings</em>, verify and adjust the settings for each active filter that has configuration options.','','10.5.6'),(9070,'Click <em>Save configuration</em>, which will return you to the <em>Text formats and editors</em> page.','','10.5.6'),(9071,'Repeat these steps if you have additional text formats to configure.','','10.5.6'),(9072,'Creating threaded discussion forums','','none'),(9073,'What is a forum?','','none'),(9074,'A forum is nested hierarchy of discussions, where users post topics and comment on them.','','none'),(9075,'What is the forum hierarchy?','','none'),(9076,'The forum hierarchy consists of:','','none'),(9077,'Optional <em>containers</em> can be used to group similar forums (for example, <em>Recipes</em>). Forums can be inside containers and vice versa.','','none'),(9078,'<em>Comments</em> submitted by users (for example, <em>You wash the potatoes first and then...</em>).','','none'),(9079,'The <em>forums</em> and <em>containers</em> in the hierarchy are implemented as terms in a hierarchical taxonomy vocabulary. The topics are content items posted in forums (not in containers), and replies are comments on each topic item. Deeply nested hierarchies of forums and containers are generally difficult for users to understand and navigate, so it is recommended to keep your hierarchy simple.','','none'),(9080,'Managing and using forums overview','','none'),(9081,'The core Forum module supplies a content type called <em>Forum topic</em>, along with associated comment type and taxonomy vocabulary. As with other comment types, you can configure comments on forum topics to be threaded or unthreaded. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','none'),(9082,'Configuring forums','','none'),(9083,'Configure settings for forums, and set up forum structure.','','none'),(9084,'Choose the desired settings for <em>Hot topic threshold</em>, <em>Topics per page</em>, and <em>Default order</em>. Click <em>Save configuration</em> if you have made any changes.','','none'),(9085,'Create the containers that you want in your forum hierarchy, starting at the top level, if any. To create a container, click <em>Add container</em>, enter the container name and optionally other settings, and click <em>Save</em>.','','none'),(9086,'Create the forums that you want in your forum hierarchy, starting at the top level. To create a forum, click <em>Add forum</em> and enter the forum name. If your hierarchy has this forum inside a container or another forum, select the parent forum/container in the <em>Parent</em> field. Review and/or edit the other settings, and click <em>Save</em>.','','none'),(9087,'Optionally, delete the provided <em>General discussion</em> forum, if you do not want this forum to be available on your site.','','none'),(9088,'Review and/or edit the permissions related to forums. The administrative permission for editing the forum settings is in the <em>Forum</em> module section of the permissions page, and administrative permissions for editing the forum hierarchy are in the <em>Taxonomy</em> module section. The user permissions for creating forum topics are in the <em>Node</em> module section, and for commenting on topics are in the <em>Comment</em> module section.','','none'),(9089,'Locking a forum topic','','none'),(9090,'Lock a topic to prevent users from making any more comments.','','none'),(9091,'Locate the topic within the forum, and click on the title to view the topic.','','none'),(9092,'Click <em>Edit</em>.','','none'),(9093,'Under <em>Comment settings</em>, check <em>Closed</em>.','','none'),(9094,'Moving a topic to a new forum','','none'),(9095,'Move a forum topic and all of its comments to a new forum.','','none'),(9096,'In the <em>Forums</em> field, select the new forum that you want the topic to move to.','','none'),(9097,'Check <em>Leave shadow copy</em> to create a link in the original forum pointing to the new location.','','none'),(9098,'Starting a forum discussion','','none'),(9099,'Post a new topic in a forum to start a discussion.','','none'),(9100,'Click <em>Add new Forum topic</em>.','','none'),(9101,'Enter the topic\'s <em>Subject</em> and <em>Body</em>.','','none'),(9102,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>Block layout</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9103,'Configure menu settings for a content type','','none'),(9104,'For an existing content type, configure the available menus that will be shown as options on content editing screens; links to content items of this type can be added to these menus during editing.','','10.5.6'),(9105,'Locate the content type you want to configure, and click <em>Edit</em> in the <em>Operations</em> list.','','10.5.6'),(9106,'Under <em>Menu settings</em>, check the menus that you want to be available when editing a content item of this type.','','10.5.6'),(9107,'Optionally, select the <em>Default parent item</em>, to put links to content items under a default location in the menu structure.','','10.5.6'),(9108,'Adding a link to a menu','','none'),(9109,'Add a link to a menu. Note that you can also add a link to a menu from the content edit page if menu settings have been configured for the content type.','','10.5.6'),(9110,'Locate the desired menu and click <em>Add link</em> in the <em>Operations</em> list.','','10.5.6'),(9111,'Enter the <em>Menu link title</em> to be displayed.','','10.5.6'),(9112,'Enter the <em>Link</em>, one of the following:','','10.5.6'),(9113,'An internal path, such as <em>/node/add</em>','','10.5.6'),(9114,'A full external URL','','10.5.6'),(9115,'Start typing the title of a content item and select it when the full title comes up','','10.5.6'),(9116,'<em>&lt;nolink&gt;</em> to display the <em>Menu link title</em> as plain text without a link','','10.5.6'),(9117,'<em>&lt;front&gt;</em> to link to the front page of your site','','10.5.6'),(9118,'Make sure that <em>Enabled</em> is checked; if not, the menu link will not be displayed.','','10.5.6'),(9119,'Optionally, enter a <em>Description</em>, which will be displayed when a user hovers over the link.','','10.5.6'),(9120,'Optionally, check <em>Show as expanded</em> to automatically show the children of this link (if any) when this link is shown.','','10.5.6'),(9121,'Optionally, select the <em>Parent link</em>, if this menu link should be a child of another menu link.','','10.5.6'),(9122,'Click <em>Save</em>. You will be returned to the <em>Add link</em> page to add another link.','','10.5.6'),(9123,'Locate the menu you just added a link to and click <em>Edit</em> in the <em>Operations</em> list.','','10.5.6'),(9124,'Verify that the order of links is correct. If it is not, drag menu links until the order is correct, and click <em>Save</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9125,'Creating a menu','','none'),(9126,'Create a new menu.','','10.5.6'),(9127,'Click <em>Add menu</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9128,'Enter the title for the menu, which is used as the default block title if the menu is displayed as a block. If desired, also edit the machine name of the menu, which is by default derived from the title.','','10.5.6'),(9129,'Enter an administrative summary, which is displayed on the <em>Menus</em> page.','','10.5.6'),(9130,'If your site has more than one language, choose the language for the menu.','','10.5.6'),(9131,'Click <em>Save</em>. You will be on the menu editing page, ready to add links to the menu if the core Custom Menu Links module is installed; see related topics for further tasks.','','10.5.6'),(9132,'Reordering and disabling menu links','','none'),(9133,'Disable menu links or change the order and hierarchy of menu links.','','10.5.6'),(9134,'Click <em>Edit menu</em> for the menu that you want to edit.','','10.5.6'),(9135,'Drag menu links into a new order, or check/uncheck <em>Enabled</em> to enable or disable menu links.','','10.5.6'),(9136,'Click <em>Save</em> to save your changes.','','10.5.6'),(9137,'<a href=\"https://www.php.net/manual/datetime.format.php#refsect1-datetime.format-parameters\">PHP date format codes reference</a>','','10.5.6'),(9138,'[site:name]: The name of your website.','','10.5.6'),(9139,'[site:url]: The URL of your website.','','10.5.6'),(9140,'Managing content listings (views)','','none'),(9141,'What is a view?','','10.5.6'),(9142,'A <em>view</em> is a listing of items on your site; for example, a block showing the most recent comments, a page listing news items, or a list of registered users. The listings can be formatted in a table, grid, list, calendar, RSS feed, and other formats (some output formats may require you to install additional contributed modules).','','10.5.6'),(9143,'What are the components of a view?','','10.5.6'),(9144,'When you first create a view, you will specify what type of <em>base data</em> is being displayed in the view, which cannot be changed. After choosing a base data type, you can edit the following components, which allow you to specify which data to output, in what order, and in what format:','','10.5.6'),(9145,'<em>Displays</em>: whether the output goes to a page, block, feed, etc.; a single view can have multiple displays, each with different settings.','','10.5.6'),(9146,'<em>Format</em>: the output style for each display, such as content item, grid, table, or HTML list.','','10.5.6'),(9147,'<em>Fields</em>: if the Format allows, the particular fields to display.','','10.5.6'),(9148,'<em>Filter criteria</em>: criteria to limit the data to output, such as whether the content is published, the type of content, etc. Filters can be <em>exposed</em> to let users choose how to filter the data.','','10.5.6'),(9149,'<em>Sort criteria</em>: how to order the data. Sorting can also be exposed to users.','','10.5.6'),(9150,'<em>Header</em> and <em>Footer</em>: content to display at the top or bottom of the view display.','','10.5.6'),(9151,'<em>No results behavior</em>: what to do if the filter criteria result in having no data to display.','','10.5.6'),(9152,'<em>Pager</em>: how many items to display, and how to paginate if there are additional items to display.','','10.5.6'),(9153,'<em>Advanced</em> &gt; <em>Contextual filters</em>: like regular filters, except the criteria come from the <em>context</em>, such as the current date, page the view is displayed on, etc.','','10.5.6'),(9154,'<em>Advanced</em> &gt; <em>Relationships</em>: additional data to pull in and display, related in some way to the base data of the view (such as data about the user who created the content item).','','10.5.6'),(9155,'<em>Advanced</em> &gt; <em>Exposed form</em>: if you have exposed filters or sorts, how to display the form to the user.','','10.5.6'),(9156,'Managing views overview','','10.5.6'),(9157,'The core Views module handles the display of views, and the core Views UI module allows you to create, edit, and delete views in the administrative interface. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks (if the Views UI module is installed).','','10.5.6'),(9158,'Adding a new display to an existing view','','none'),(9159,'Add a new display to an existing view. This will allow you to display similar data to an existing view, using similar settings, in a new block, page, feed, etc.','','10.5.6'),(9160,'Under <em>Displays</em>, click <em>Add</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9161,'In the pop-up list, click the link for the type of display you want to add; the most common types are <em>Page</em> and <em>Block</em>. The new display will be added to your view, and you will be editing that display.','','10.5.6'),(9162,'Optionally, click the link next to <em>Display name</em> and enter a new name to be shown for this display in the administrative interface.','','10.5.6'),(9163,'Creating a new view','','none'),(9164,'Create a new view to list content or other items on your site.','','10.5.6'),(9165,'Click <em>Add view</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9166,'In the <em>View name</em> field, enter a name for the view, which is how it will be listed in the administrative interface.','','10.5.6'),(9167,'In <em>View settings</em> &gt; <em>Show</em>, select the base data type to display in your view. This cannot be changed later.','','10.5.6'),(9168,'Optionally, select or enter filtering, sorting, and page/block display settings; these can be added or changed later.','','10.5.6'),(9169,'Click <em>Save and edit</em>. Your view will be created; edit it following the steps in the related topics below.','','10.5.6'),(9170,'Editing an existing view display','','none'),(9171,'Edit an existing view display, to modify what data is displayed or how it is displayed.','','10.5.6'),(9172,'Under <em>Displays</em>, click the display you want to edit.','','10.5.6'),(9173,'For sections containing lists (such as <em>Fields</em> and <em>Filter criteria</em>), to modify or delete an existing item, click the name of the item. To add a new item, click <em>Add</em> in the drop-down list. To change the order of items, click <em>Rearrange</em> in the drop-down list.','','10.5.6'),(9174,'For sections containing individual settings (such as <em>Title</em> and <em>Format</em>), there are often two links for each setting. The first link shows the current value; click that link to change the value. If there is a second link called <em>Settings</em>, click that link to change the settings details. For example, if your <em>Format</em> is currently shown as <em>Unformatted list</em>, click <em>Unformatted list</em> to switch to using a <em>Grid</em> or <em>Table</em> format. Click <em>Settings</em> next to your format type to change the settings for your chosen format.','','10.5.6'),(9175,'When you have finished changing all the settings, verify that the display is correct by clicking <em>Update preview</em>. Return to editing settings if necessary.','','10.5.6'),(9176,'When you have verified the display, click <em>Save</em>. Alternatively, if you have made mistakes and want to discard your changes, click <em>Cancel</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9177,'For accessibility and search engine optimization, all images that convey meaning on websites should have alternate text. Drupal also allows entry of title text for images, but it can lead to confusion for screen reader users and its use is not recommended. Image fields can be configured so that alternate and title text fields are enabled or disabled; if enabled, the fields can be set to be required. The recommended setting is to enable and require alternate text and disable title text.','','none'),(9178,'This must be an internal path such as %add-node. You can also start typing the title of a piece of content to select it. Enter %front to link to the front page. Enter %nolink to display link text only. Enter %button to display keyboard-accessible link text only.','','none'),(9179,'Start typing the title of a piece of content to select it. You can also enter an internal path such as %add-node or an external URL such as %url. Enter %front to link to the front page. Enter %nolink to display link text only. Enter %button to display keyboard-accessible link text only.','','10.5.6'),(9180,'It is potentially insecure to display oEmbed content in a frame that is served from the same domain as your main Drupal site, as this may allow execution of third-party code. Refer to <a href=\"https://oembed.com/#section3\">oEmbed Security Considerations</a>.','','10.4.5'),(9181,'It is potentially insecure to display oEmbed content in a frame that is served from the same domain as your main Drupal site, as this may allow execution of third-party code. <a href=\":url\">You can specify a different domain for serving oEmbed content in the Media settings</a>.','','none'),(9182,'If checked, users creating new media items in the media library will see a summary of their selected media items, and they will be able to insert their selection directly into the media field or text editor.','','10.4.5'),(9183,'A flag for whether the link should be rendered in menus. (1 = a disabled menu link that may be shown on admin screens, -1 = a menu callback, 0 = a normal, visible link)','','none'),(9184,'Menu link language code.','','none'),(9185,'Translation set id.','','none'),(9186,'Menu link ID of the source language menu link.','','none'),(9187,'Users with the <em>Administer menus and menu links</em> permission can add, edit, and delete custom menus on the <a href=\":menu\">Menus page</a>. Custom menus can be special site menus, menus of external links, or any combination of internal and external links. You may create an unlimited number of additional menus, each of which will automatically have an associated block (if you have the <a href=\":block_help\">Block module</a> installed). By selecting <em>Edit menu</em>, you can add, edit, or delete links for a given menu. The links listing page provides a drag-and-drop interface for controlling the order of links, and creating a hierarchy within the menu.','','none'),(9188,'Default parent link','','10.4.5'),(9189,'Choose the menu link to be the default parent for a new link in the content authoring form.','','10.4.5'),(9190,'The selected menu link is not under one of the selected menus.','','none'),(9191,'<strong>Warning:</strong> There is currently 1 menu link in %title. It will be deleted (system-defined links will be reset).<strong>Warning:</strong> There are currently @count menu links in %title. They will be deleted (system-defined links will be reset).','','none'),(9192,'Drupal @version module name','','none'),(9193,'Drupal @version machine name','','none'),(9194,'The human-readable name of the mapping','','none'),(9195,'The machine name of the mapping','','none'),(9196,'The group this mapping belongs to','','none'),(9197,'The mappings linked to the breakpoints group','','none'),(9198,'About searching','','10.2.3'),(9199,'You can display your shortcuts by enabling the <em>Shortcuts</em> block on the <a href=\":blocks\">Blocks administration page</a>. Certain administrative modules also display your shortcuts; for example, the core <a href=\":toolbar-help\">Toolbar module</a> provides a corresponding menu link.','','none'),(9200,'The new set is created by copying links from your default shortcut set.','','none'),(9201,'The menu.mlid primary key for this menu link (= shortcut link).','','none'),(9202,'Administer menus and menu links','','10.5.6'),(9203,'The menu is only visible if the menu link for the current page is at this level or below it. Use level 1 to always display this menu.','','none'),(9204,'Menu language.','','none'),(9205,'Menu i18n mode.','','none'),(9206,'Administer roles and permissions','','10.5.6'),(9207,'Flood control blocked login attempt for uid %uid from %ip','','10.4.5'),(9208,'Flood control blocked login attempt for uid %uid','','none'),(9209,'Flood control blocked login attempt from %ip','','none'),(9210,'Menu link entry','','none'),(9211,'When providing a menu link as a tab, Drupal needs to know what the parent menu link of that tab will be. Sometimes the parent will already exist, but other times you will need to have one created. The path of a parent link will always be the same path with the last part left off. i.e, if the path to this view is <em>foo/bar/baz</em>, the parent path would be <em>foo/bar</em>.','','none'),(9212,'Normal menu link','','none'),(9213,'If creating a parent menu link, enter the title of the link.','','none'),(9214,'If creating a parent menu link, enter the description of the link.','','none'),(9215,'If the parent menu link is a tab, enter the weight of the tab. Heavier tabs will sink and the lighter tabs will be positioned nearer to the first menu link.','','none'),(9216,'Views cannot create normal menu links for paths with a % in them.','','none'),(9217,'If \"Custom\", see <a href=\"https://www.php.net/manual/datetime.format.php#refsect1-datetime.format-parameters\" target=\"_blank\">the PHP docs</a> for date formats. Otherwise, enter the number of different time units to display, which defaults to 2.','','none'),(9218,'Primary Branding Color','','none'),(9219,'A clean, accessible, and flexible Drupal front-end theme.','','10.4.7'),(9220,'Block Layout Page','','none'),(9221,'Blocks are boxes of content rendered into an area, or region, of a web page that can be displayed in regions (such as footer or sidebar) on your page.','','none'),(9222,'Any custom or contributed block can be added to a particular region by clicking on a button Place block. A new block can also be created by clicking on Place Block','','none'),(9223,'By Clicking on \"Configure\" you can go ahead and edit the contents of the block, deal with the visibility settings and even change the placement of where it is on your theme.','','none'),(9224,'Wide (1090)','','10.2.3'),(9225,'Olivero Medium','','10.2.3'),(9226,'j  F,  Y','PHP date format','10.2.3'),(9227,'Content blocks','','10.5.6'),(9228,'Failed to fetch available update data:','','none'),(9229,'See <a href=\"@url\">PHP OpenSSL requirements</a> in the Drupal.org handbook for possible reasons this could happen and what you can do to resolve them.','','none'),(9230,'Check <a href=\"@url\">your local system logs</a> for additional error messages.','','none'),(9231,'Check your local system logs for additional error messages.','','none'),(9232,'Drupal update settings','','none'),(9233,'For security reasons, your upload has been rejected.','','none'),(9234,'Testing themes blocks','','none'),(9235,'Minimal profile for testing block installation of themes.','','none'),(9236,'Testing theme with optional blocks','','none'),(9237,'Testing theme with required blocks','','none'),(9238,'Testing theme without blocks','','none'),(9239,'Exporting your complete site configuration','','none'),(9240,'Click <em>Export</em> and save the archive file.','','10.5.6'),(9241,'Select the <em>Configuration type</em> that you want to export, and then select the specific <em>Configuration name</em> to export.','','10.5.6'),(9242,'Use your browser to copy the text in the box marked <em>Here is your configuration</em> to the clipboard.','','10.5.6'),(9243,'Paste the copied text into a plain-text editor on your computer or other device, and save it using the suggested file name below the text box.','','10.5.6'),(9244,'Importing your complete site configuration','','none'),(9245,'Browse to find the <em>Configuration archive</em> that you want to import.','','10.5.6'),(9246,'Click <em>Upload</em>. Your configuration archive will be unpacked and placed in the configuration synchronization directory, and you will be redirected to the <em>Synchronize</em> page.','','10.5.6'),(9247,'Review the differences between your uploaded configuration and the active configuration, if any, and click <em>Import all</em> to import the changes.','','10.5.6'),(9248,'Select the <em>Configuration type</em> that you want to import.','','10.5.6'),(9249,'On your computer or other device, copy the YAML-format configuration that you want to import to the clipboard.','','10.5.6'),(9250,'Paste the clipboard text into the box labeled <em>Paste your configuration here</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9251,'Click <em>Import</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9252,'Managing and deploying configuration','','none'),(9253,'What is the configuration system?','','10.5.6'),(9254,'The configuration system provides the ability for administrators to customize the site, and to move and synchronize configuration changes between development sites and the live site. It does this in 2 ways:','','10.5.6'),(9255,'Providing storage for configuration','','10.5.6'),(9256,'Providing a process in which configuration changes can be imported and exported between instances of the same site; for example, from \"dev\" to \"staging\" to \"live\"','','10.5.6'),(9257,'What is configuration data?','','10.5.6'),(9258,'Configuration data describes settings that define how your site behaves or is displayed. For example, when a site administrator updates settings using an administrative form, these settings are stored as configuration data. Configuration data describes settings as simple as a site name and as complex as a view or image style.','','10.5.6'),(9259,'What kinds of configuration are there?','','10.5.6'),(9260,'Active configuration','','10.5.6'),(9261,'Active configuration is the current working configuration of a site. Storage of active configuration is defined by the site, and resides in the database by default.','','10.5.6'),(9262,'A simple configuration item is a group of settings, such as the settings for a module or theme. Each simple configuration item has its own unique structure.','','10.5.6'),(9263,'Configuration entities are user-defined configuration items grouped by type, such as views, image styles, and content types. Each configuration entity within a type has a similar structure.','','10.5.6'),(9264,'Default configuration can be defined by a module, theme, or installation profile in its <em>config/install</em> or <em>config/optional</em> directories. Configuration is provided in YAML files (file extension .yml); YAML is a human-readable data serialization standard that is used by the core software for several purposes. Once the default configuration has been imported into the site\'s active configuration (through installing the extension), that configuration is owned by the site, not the extension. This means that future updates of the extension will not override the site\'s active configuration for that extension.','','10.5.6'),(9265,'What is configuration synchronization?','','10.5.6'),(9266,'Configuration synchronization is the process of exporting and importing configuration to keep configuration synchronized between different versions of a site; for example, between a development site and the live site.','','10.5.6'),(9267,'Each site has unique identifier, also called a <em>UUID</em>, which identifies the site to the system in any instance of the site, as long as the site instances have been reproduced as clones (cloning is when the codebase and database are copied to create a new site instance). When site instances are cloned, a \"dev\" instance of the site has the same UUID as the \"live\" instance. When site instances share the same UUID, configuration can be exported from one instance to another.','','10.5.6'),(9268,'The following list contains terms and concepts related to configuration synchronization:','','10.5.6'),(9269,'Exported configuration','','10.5.6'),(9270,'When configuration is exported, the active configuration is exported as a set of files in YAML format. When using the <em>Configuration synchronization</em> administrative UI, configuration can be exported as a full-export or single-item archive. This archive can then be imported into the destination site instance.','','10.5.6'),(9271,'Imported configuration','','10.5.6'),(9272,'Imported configuration is configuration that has been exported from another instance of the site (the \"source\") and is now being imported into another site instance (the \"destination\"), thereby updating its active configuration to match the imported configuration data set.','','10.5.6'),(9273,'The configuration sync directory location is set in the site\'s <em>settings.php</em> file. When configuration is exported, the active configuration is exported and described in YAML files which are stored in the configuration sync directory. After the first export, the system compares the site\'s active configuration with the configuration data in the sync directory and will only export active configuration items that are different than their counterparts in the sync directory.','','10.5.6'),(9274,'Managing configuration overview','','10.5.6'),(9275,'Configuration management tasks, such as exporting or importing configuration and synchronizing configuration, can be done either through the administrative UI provided by the core Configuration Manager module or a command-line interface (CLI) tool. Defining a configuration sync directory path other than the default value requires read/write access to the site\'s <em>settings.php</em> file.','','10.5.6'),(9276,'Most modules and themes also provide settings forms for updating the configuration they provide. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.5.6'),(9277,'Managing media','','none'),(9278,'What are media items?','','10.5.6'),(9279,'What is the media library?','','10.5.6'),(9280,'The media library is a visual user interface for managing and reusing media items. Add media items to content using Media reference fields and the Media library field widget.','','10.5.6'),(9281,'What is an image style?','','10.5.6'),(9282,'An image style is a set of processing steps, known as <em>effects</em>, that can be applied to images. Examples of effects include scaling and cropping images to different sizes. Responsive image styles can associate image styles with your theme\'s size breakpoints. This allows serving images sized for the browser width.','','10.5.6'),(9283,'Overview of managing media','','10.5.6'),(9284,'The following modules provide media-related functionality:','','10.5.6'),(9285,'Media items and media types are managed by the core Media module.','','10.5.6'),(9286,'The core Media module provides a Media reference field to add media to content entities. The core File and Image modules also provide reference fields. It is recommended to use the Media reference field because it is more versatile.','','10.5.6'),(9287,'The core Media Library module provides the media library and the Media library field widget. With this module installed, the Media library field widget becomes the default widget for editing Media reference fields.','','10.5.6'),(9288,'The core Image module provides a user interface for defining image styles. The core Responsive Image module provides responsive image styles. Using the core Breakpoint module, and a breakpoint-enabled theme, these responsive styles can serve images sized for the browser.','','10.5.6'),(9289,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/8/core/modules/media\">Media module</a>','','10.5.6'),(9290,'Adding an image style','','none'),(9291,'Click <em>Add image style</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9292,'Enter a descriptive <em>Image style name</em>, and click <em>Create new style</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9293,'Under <em>Effect</em>, choose an effect to apply and click <em>Add</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9294,'Configure the effect on the next page. Most effects require some additional configuration after they are added.  For example, for the <em>Crop</em> effect, enter the <em>Width</em> and <em>Height</em> to crop the image to, and choose the <em>Anchor</em> point. Click <em>Add effect</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9295,'Repeat the previous two steps until all of the effects have been added.','','10.5.6'),(9296,'Drag to change the order of the effects. Then click <em>Save</em> to save the new order.','','10.5.6'),(9297,'The image style can now be used to format a field containing an image in your layouts or traditional field displays. It can also be used as part of a responsive image style. See related topics below for more information.','','10.5.6'),(9298,'Adding a new media type','','none'),(9299,'If there is not already a media type for the type of media you want to use on your site, click <em>Add media type</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9300,'Enter a <em>Name</em> and <em>Description</em> for your media type, and select the <em>Media source</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9301,'For most media sources, there is additional information that will need to be stored with your media item, in a field on your media type. Under <em>Media source configuration</em>, select an existing field to re-use to store this information, or select <em> - Create -</em> to create a new field.','','10.5.6'),(9302,'Note the types of metadata in the <em>Field mapping</em> section that can be mapped to fields on your media type.','','10.5.6'),(9303,'Optionally, add additional fields for the metadata noted above or for other information that you want to store to your media type by clicking on <em>Manage fields</em> (see related topic below).','','10.5.6'),(9304,'If you have added metadata fields, click <em>Edit</em>. Under <em>Field mapping</em>, select the fields you added for each piece of metadata information.','','10.5.6'),(9305,'You can now use this media type by adding a Media reference field to any content entity sub-type. See related topic below.','','10.5.6'),(9306,'Migrating, updating, and upgrading','','none'),(9307,'What are updating, upgrading, and migrating?','','none'),(9308,'<em>Updating</em> is the process of changing from one minor version of the software to a newer version, such as from version 8.3.4 to 8.3.5, or 8.3.5 to 8.4.0. Starting with version 8.x, you can also update to major versions 9, 10, and beyond if your add-on modules, themes, and install profiles are compatible. <em>Upgrading</em> is the process of changing from an older major version of the software to a newer version, such as from version 7 to 8. <em>Migrating</em> is the process of importing data into a site.','','none'),(9309,'To upgrade a site from Drupal 6 or 7 to Drupal 8 or later, keeping the content and configuration the same, you will install the new version of the software and add-on modules and themes in a new site, and then migrate the content and other data from your old site into the new site.','','none'),(9310,'Overview of Migrating','','none'),(9311,'Provides the underlying API for migrating data.','','none'),(9312,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/upgrading-drupal\">Upgrading Drupal</a>','','none'),(9313,'Migrating data for an upgrade using the user interface','','none'),(9314,'Read the introduction and follow the <em>Preparation steps</em> on the page. Then click <em>Continue</em>.','','none'),(9315,'Select the Drupal version of the source site. Also enter the database credentials and public and private files directories (private file directory is not available when migrating from Drupal 6). Click <em>Review upgrade</em>.','','none'),(9316,'If the next page you see contains a message about conflicting content, that means that the site where you are running the upgrade is not empty. If you continue, you will lose the data in the site. If that is acceptable, click the button to continue; if not, start these steps over in a new, clean Drupal site.','','none'),(9317,'On the <em>What will be upgraded?</em> page, review the list of modules whose data will not be upgraded. If that list is not empty and you want to migrate the data from those modules, you will need to download contributed modules and/or install core or contributed modules, and start these steps over.','','none'),(9318,'When the list of modules that will and will not be upgraded meets your expectations, click <em>Perform upgrade</em> and wait for the upgrade to complete. You will see a message about the number of upgrade tasks that were successful or failed, and you can review the upgrade message log by clicking the link on the results page.','','none'),(9319,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/upgrading-drupal/upgrading-from-drupal-6-or-7-to-drupal-8-and-newer\">Upgrading from Drupal 6 or 7 to Drupal 8 (and newer)</a>','','none'),(9320,'Configuring a responsive image style','','none'),(9321,'Click <em>Add responsive image style</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9322,'Enter a descriptive <em>Label</em> for your style.','','10.5.6'),(9323,'Select a <em>Breakpoint group</em> from the groups defined by your installed themes and modules.','','10.5.6'),(9324,'On the next page, locate the fieldsets for the breakpoints provided by the selected <em>Breakpoint group</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9325,'For each breakpoint that you want to use, expand the corresponding fieldset. Select the <em>Select a single image style.</em> radio button under <em>Type</em> for the breakpoint, and select the <em>Image style</em> to use for images when that breakpoint is in effect. Repeat this step for the rest of the breakpoints you want to use.','','10.5.6'),(9326,'Click <em>Save</em>','','10.5.6'),(9327,'You can now use this responsive image style to format a field containing an image, in your layouts or traditional field displays. See related topics below for more information.','','10.5.6'),(9328,'Human name of the parent node type.','','none'),(9329,'Machine name of the parent node type.','','none'),(9330,'@title sub-navigation','','none'),(9331,'Moving content between workflow states','','none'),(9332,'Who can change workflow states?','','none'),(9333,'Click <em>Edit</em> to edit the entity.','','none'),(9334,'At the bottom of the page, select the new workflow state under <em>Change to:</em> and click <em>Save</em>.','','none'),(9335,'Who can configure a workflow?','','none'),(9336,'Make a plan for the new workflow:','','none'),(9337,'Decide which workflow states you need; for example, <em>Concept</em>, <em>Review</em>, and <em>Final</em>.','','none'),(9338,'Decide on the settings for each state:','','none'),(9339,'<em>Label</em>: the state name','','none'),(9340,'<em>Published</em>: if checked, when content reaches this state it will be made visible on the site (to users with permission).','','none'),(9341,'<em>Default revision</em>: if checked, when content reaches this state it will become the default revision of the content; published content is automatically the default revision.','','none'),(9342,'Decide which state content should be created in.','','none'),(9343,'Decide on the list of allowed transitions between states. For example, you might want a transition between <em>Concept</em> and <em>Review</em>. Each transition has a label; for example, the Concept to Review transition might be labeled \"Review concept\".','','none'),(9344,'Click <em>Add workflow</em>.','','none'),(9345,'Enter a name in the <em>Label</em> field, select <em>Content moderation</em> from the <em>Workflow type</em> field, and click <em>Save</em>.','','none'),(9346,'Verify that the <em>States</em> list matches your planned states. You can add missing states by clicking <em>Add a new state</em>. You can edit or delete states by clicking <em>Edit</em> or <em>Delete</em> under <em>Operations</em> (if the <em>Delete</em> option is not available, you will first need to delete any <em>Transitions</em> to or from this state).','','none'),(9347,'Verify that the <em>Transitions</em> list matches your plan. You can add missing transitions by clicking <em>Add a new transition</em>. You can edit or delete transitions by clicking <em>Edit</em> or <em>Delete</em> under <em>Operations</em>.','','none'),(9348,'Check the entity subtypes that you want to apply the workflow to. For example, you might choose to apply your workflow to the <em>Page</em> content type, but not to <em>Article</em>.','','none'),(9349,'Under <em>Workflow settings</em>, select the <em>Default moderation state</em> for new content.','','none'),(9350,'Click <em>Save</em> to save your workflow.','','none'),(9351,'Optionally (recommended), create a view for your custom workflow, to provide a page for content editors to see what content needs to be moderated. You can do this if the Views UI module is installed, by following the steps in the related <em>Creating a new view</em> topic listed below under <em>Related topics</em>. When creating the view, under <em>View settings</em> &gt; <em>Show</em>, select the revision data type you configured the workflow for, and be sure to display the <em>Workflow State</em> field in your view.','','none'),(9352,'Managing content moderation workflows','','none'),(9353,'What is a content moderation workflow?','','none'),(9354,'On some sites, new content and content revisions need to be <em>moderated</em>. That is, they need to pass through several <em>states</em> before becoming visible to site visitors. The collection of states and the definition of the transitions between states is known as a <em>workflow</em>. For example, new content might start out in a <em>Draft</em> state, and then might need to pass through several <em>Review</em> states before it becomes <em>Published</em> on the live site.','','none'),(9355,'Overview of content moderation workflows','','none'),(9356,'The core Content Moderation module allows you to expand on core software\'s \"unpublished\" and \"published\" states for content. It allows you to have a published version that is live, but have a separate working copy that is undergoing review before it is published. This is achieved by using workflows to apply different states and transitions to entities as needed.','','none'),(9357,'The core Workflows module allows you to manage workflows with states and transitions.','','none'),(9358,'See the related topics listed below for specific tasks and background information.','','none'),(9359,'On-line documentation about Content Moderation','','none'),(9360,'If %identifier is a valid account, an email will be sent with instructions to reset your password.','','none'),(9361,'@language translation was not added. To add a translation, you must modify the configuration.','','10.2.3'),(9362,'No page is specified','','none'),(9363,'Provide markup for the area using any available text format.','','none'),(9364,'Provide markup for the area with minimal filtering.','','none'),(9365,'You may enter data from this view as per the \"Available global token replacements\" above. You may include the following allowed HTML tags: <code>@tags</code>','','none'),(9366,'You may include the following allowed HTML tags with these \"Replacement patterns\": <code>@tags</code>','','none'),(9367,'There are no @entity_type_plural matching \"%value\".','','10.2.3'),(9368,'Many @entity_type_plural are called %value. Specify the one you want by appending the id in parentheses, like \"@value (@id)\".','','none'),(9369,'Multiple @entity_type_plural match this reference; \"%multiple\". Specify the one you want by appending the id in parentheses, like \"@value (@id)\".','','none'),(9370,'The module \'@module_name\' is providing the database driver \'@driver_name\'.','','10.4.7'),(9371,'Failed to connect to the server. The server reports the following message: <p class=\"error\">@message</p> For more help adding or updating code on your server, see the <a href=\":handbook_url\">handbook</a>.','','none'),(9372,'Add another module','','none'),(9373,'HTML tables can be created with table headers and caption/summary elements.','','none'),(9374,'Alt text is required by default on images added through CKEditor (note that this can be overridden).','','none'),(9375,'Semantic HTML5 figure/figcaption are available to add captions to images.','','none'),(9376,'This log is not persistent','','none'),(9377,'The Database Logging module logs may be cleared by administrators and automated cron tasks, so they should not be used for <a href=\":audit_trail_wiki\">forensic logging</a>. For forensic purposes, use the Syslog module.','','none'),(9378,'Your upload has been renamed to %filename.','','10.5.6'),(9379,'Separate extensions with a comma or space. Each extension can contain alphanumeric characters, \'.\', and \'_\', and should start and end with an alphanumeric character.','','10.5.6'),(9380,'The list of allowed extensions is not valid. Allowed characters are a-z, 0-9, \'.\', and \'_\'. The first and last characters cannot be \'.\' or \'_\', and these two characters cannot appear next to each other. Separate extensions with a comma or space.','','none'),(9381,'Add %txt_extension to the list of allowed extensions to securely upload files with a %extension extension. The %txt_extension extension will then be added automatically.','','none'),(9382,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; @layout_link.','','10.5.6'),(9383,'Configure the block and click <em>Save block</em>; see @configure_topic for configuration details.','','10.5.6'),(9384,'Translating configuration','','none'),(9385,'For configuration entities, find the specific entity that you want to translate on the next page, and click <em>Translate</em> under <em>Operations</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9386,'Enter translations for the translatable text fields for the configuration item, and save.','','10.5.6'),(9387,'Configuring content language settings and translation','','none'),(9388,'Under <em>Custom language settings</em>, find the content entity types that should have customized language settings on your site. Check the box next to each one. A section will appear below the list with settings for that entity type.','','10.5.6'),(9389,'For each entity type you checked, in the settings section below check the boxes for each entity sub-type that should be <em>Translatable</em> on your site. If the entity type does not have sub-types, there is just one check box for the entity type as a whole.','','10.5.6'),(9390,'For each entity type or subtype, select the <em>Default language</em>. Also, if you want to have languages other than the default available when you create content, check <em>Show language selector on create and edit pages</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9391,'For each <em>Translatable</em> type or sub-type, look through the list of fields for the type or sub-type, and verify that only the fields that should be translatable are checked. For example, you would probably want to translate a <em>Title</em> field, but you might not want to translate a <em>Start date</em> field.','','10.5.6'),(9392,'Click <em>Save configuration</em> when all of your changes are complete.','','10.5.6'),(9393,'Working with languages and translations','','none'),(9394,'What text can be translated in your site?','','10.5.6'),(9395,'There are three types of text that can be translated:','','10.5.6'),(9396,'User interface text that is provided by the core software, your install profile, themes, and modules is provided in English, but can be translated into other languages. You can also download translations that community-members have provided.','','10.5.6'),(9397,'Working with languages overview','','10.5.6'),(9398,'The core Language module lets you add new languages to your site, provides the <em>Language switcher</em> block, and provides the ability to configure block visibility by language; the block and block visibility settings are only available if you have multiple languages configured. The core Content Translation, Configuration Translation, and Interface Translation modules let you translate content, configuration, and the built-in user interface, respectively. The core Update Manager module manages automatic downloads of community-provided translations of default configuration and user-interface text. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.5.6'),(9399,'Adding a language','','none'),(9400,'Add a language to your site.','','10.5.6'),(9401,'If your language is in the <em>Language name</em> list, select it and click <em>Add language</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9402,'If your language is not in the list, select <em>Custom language...</em> and enter the <em>Language code</em>, <em>Language name</em>, and <em>Direction</em> for the language. Click <em>Add custom language</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9403,'Wait for the translation system to be updated. Also, if you have the core Update Manager module installed and translations are available for your language, wait for translations to be downloaded. You should be returned to the <em>Languages</em> page when this completes.','','10.5.6'),(9404,'Configuring language detection and selection','','none'),(9405,'Configure the methods used to decide which language will be used to display text on your site.','','10.5.6'),(9406,'What is a language detection method?','','10.5.6'),(9407,'A language detection method is a way for your site to decide what language should be used to display text. This decision is made by evaluating a series of detection methods for languages; the first detection method that gets a result will determine which language is used. If you have more than one language on your site, you can configure the detection methods that are used and the order they are evaluated, for both user interface text and content text. Configuration text always uses the interface text method, and most sites use the same detection methods for all types of text.','','10.5.6'),(9408,'What language detection methods are available?','','10.5.6'),(9409,'The available detection methods depend on what modules you have installed. Some of the most commonly-used language detection methods are:','','10.5.6'),(9410,'Use the language from the URL, which can either be in a path prefix like <em>example.com/fr/page_path</em> for French (fr) language, or in a domain like <em>fr.example.com/page_path</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9411,'For logged in users, use the language they have set in their profiles.','','10.5.6'),(9412,'Use the language preferences from the user\'s browser.','','10.5.6'),(9413,'Use the language most recently selected from a <em>Language switcher</em> block.','','10.5.6'),(9414,'Use the language from a session parameter or a request parameter; for example, adding <em>?language=fr</em> to the end of the URL.','','10.5.6'),(9415,'Check the boxes to enable the desired language detection methods, and uncheck boxes for the methods you do not want to use.','','10.5.6'),(9416,'Drag the methods to change their order, if desired.','','10.5.6'),(9417,'Click <em>Save settings</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9418,'Click <em>Configure</em> on each enabled detection method and verify that its configuration is correct (or update the configuration if not).','','10.5.6'),(9419,'Importing a translation file','','none'),(9420,'Import a file (.po extension) containing translations for user interface text.','','10.5.6'),(9421,'Browse to find the <em>Translation file</em> you want to import. Select the language and check the desired import options.','','10.5.6'),(9422,'Click <em>Import</em> and wait for your file to be imported.','','10.5.6'),(9423,'Translating user interface text','','none'),(9424,'Translate user interface text strings from English into a non-English language that is configured on your site.','','10.5.6'),(9425,'Using the filters, search for a string or set of strings that you want to translate; make sure to select the correct <em>Translation language</em> if you have more than one non-English language on your site.','','10.5.6'),(9426,'Enter new translations and click <em>Save translations</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9427,'Repeat these steps until all of the desired user interface text is translated for all languages on your site.','','10.5.6'),(9428,'Checking interface translation status','','none'),(9429,'Check the current status of interface translations, and see if there are any updates available.','','10.5.6'),(9430,'Look at the <em>Interface translation</em> column in the language table, to find the percentage of user interface text that has been translated for each language.','','10.5.6'),(9431,'Optionally, click <em>Check manually</em> to update the report.','','10.5.6'),(9432,'View the report to find out if any languages have translation updates that you can download.','','10.5.6'),(9433,'You can use the <em>Migration</em> group of modules to perform the migration step of upgrading from Drupal 6 or 7 to Drupal 8 or later, as well as other migrations. These modules also provide APIs that can be used by programmers to write custom software for migrations. Here are the functions of the core migration modules:','','none'),(9434,'[user:account-name]: The user\'s account name.','','10.5.6'),(9435,'Help search is not fully indexed. Some results may be missing or incorrect.','','none'),(9436,'If an upgrade has been performed on this site, you will be informed.','','none'),(9437,'You need to enter the database credentials of the Drupal site that you want to upgrade. You can also include its files directory in the upgrade. For example local files, /var/www/docroot, or remote files http://www.example.com.','','none'),(9438,'If there is existing content on the site that may be overwritten by this upgrade, you will be informed.','','none'),(9439,'Finally, a message is displayed about the number of upgrade tasks that were successful or failed.','','none'),(9440,'To import private files from your current Drupal site, enter a local file directory containing your site (e.g. /var/www/docroot). Leave blank to use the same value as Public files directory.','','none'),(9441,'Add <a href=\":modules\">contributed modules</a> to extend your site\'s functionality.','','10.5.6'),(9442,'Database driver provided by module','','none'),(9443,'The current database driver is provided by the module: %module. The module is currently not enabled. You should immediately <a href=\":enable\">enable</a> the module.','','none'),(9444,'Adding %project','','none'),(9445,'Error adding / updating','','none'),(9446,'Added / updated %project_name successfully','','none'),(9447,'Files were added successfully. Your site has been taken out of maintenance mode.','','none'),(9448,'Files were added successfully.','','none'),(9449,'File add failed! See the log below for more information.','','none'),(9450,'File add failed! See the log below for more information. Your site is still in maintenance mode.','','none'),(9451,'The Update Manager also allows administrators to add and update modules and themes through the administration interface.','','none'),(9452,'Adding new modules and themes through the Add new pages','','none'),(9453,'You can also add new modules and themes in the same fashion, through the <a href=\":install\">Add new modules and themes page</a>, or by clicking the <em>Add new module/theme</em> links at the top of the <a href=\":modules_page\">Extend page</a> and the <a href=\":themes_page\">Appearance page</a>. In this case, you are prompted to provide either the URL to the download, or to upload a packaged release file from your local computer.','','none'),(9454,'Add new module or theme','','none'),(9455,'Add new module','','10.2.3'),(9456,'Add new theme','','10.2.3'),(9457,'Add from a URL','','10.2.3'),(9458,'Upload a module or theme archive','','10.2.3'),(9459,'You must either provide a URL or upload an archive file.','','none'),(9460,'%project is already present.','','none'),(9461,'View user email addresses','','10.5.6'),(9462,'Users without this permission will not have access to email addresses on user pages or other places where they might be shown, such as Views and JSON:API responses.','','10.5.6'),(9463,'The username or email address is invalid.','','none'),(9464,'Password reset form was submitted with an unknown or inactive account: %name.','','none'),(9465,'Always show the default display','','none'),(9466,'Publish workspace','','none'),(9467,'Publish %source_label workspace','','none'),(9468,'There are no changes that can be published from %source_label to %target_label.','','none'),(9469,'Would you like to publish the contents of the %label workspace?','','none'),(9470,'Publish workspace contents.','','none'),(9471,'Successful publication.','','none'),(9472,'Publication failed. All errors have been logged.','','none'),(9473,'There is @count item that can be published from %source_label to %target_labelThere are @count items that can be published from %source_label to %target_label','','none'),(9474,'Publish @count item to @targetPublish @count items to @target','','none'),(9475,'Missing help topic %topic','','none'),(9476,'Failed to fetch security advisory data:','','none'),(9477,'See <a href=\":url\">Troubleshooting the advisory feed</a> for possible causes and resolutions.','','none'),(9478,'Check <a href=\":url\">your local system logs</a> for additional error messages.','','none'),(9479,'Critical security advisories','','none'),(9480,'The System module displays highly critical and time-sensitive security announcements to site administrators. Some security announcements will be displayed until a critical security update is installed. Announcements that are not associated with a specific release will appear for a fixed period of time. <a href=\":handbook\">More information on critical security advisories</a>.','','none'),(9481,'Only the most highly critical security announcements will be shown. <a href=\":advisories-list\">View all security announcements</a>.','','none'),(9482,'(<a href=\":system-help\">What are critical security announcements?</a>)','','none'),(9483,'Critical security announcements','','none'),(9484,'Security advisory settings','','none'),(9485,'Display critical security advisories','','none'),(9486,'How often to check for security advisories, in hours','','none'),(9487,'The security advisory JSON feed from Drupal.org could not be decoded.','','none'),(9488,'[user:display-name]\n\nA request to cancel your account has been made at [site:name].\n\nYou may now cancel your account on [site:url-brief] by clicking this link or copying and pasting it into your browser:\n\n[user:cancel-url]\n\nNOTE: The cancellation of your account is not reversible.\n\nThis link expires in one day and nothing will happen if it is not used.\n\n--  [site:name] team','','10.2.3'),(9489,'The label of the link.','','none'),(9490,'Pre-header','','none'),(9491,'Banner Top','','none'),(9492,'Hero (full width)','','none'),(9493,'Move content from %from state to %to state.Move content from %from states to %to state.','','none'),(9494,'Your server does not support updating modules and themes from this interface. Instead, update modules and themes by uploading the new versions directly to the server, as documented in <a href=\":doc_url\">Extending Drupal</a>.','','none'),(9495,'Your server does not support adding modules and themes from this interface. Instead, add modules and themes by uploading them directly to the server, as documented in <a href=\":doc_url\">Extending Drupal</a>.','','none'),(9496,'Updating modules and themes requires <strong>@backends access</strong> to your server. See <a href=\":doc_url\">Extending Drupal</a> for other update methods.Updating modules and themes requires access to your server via one of the following methods: <strong>@backends</strong>. See <a href=\":doc_url\">Extending Drupal</a> for other update methods.','','none'),(9497,'Adding modules and themes requires <strong>@backends access</strong> to your server. See <a href=\":doc_url\">Extending Drupal</a> for other methods.Adding modules and themes requires access to your server via one of the following methods: <strong>@backends</strong>. See <a href=\":doc_url\">Extending Drupal</a> for other methods.','','none'),(9498,'Creating an advanced action','','none'),(9499,'Create an advanced action. You can, for example, create an action to change the author of multiple content items. See @action_overview for more about actions.','','none'),(9500,'Who can create actions?','','none'),(9501,'Users with the <em>@action_permissions</em> permission (typically administrators) can create actions.','','none'),(9502,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>System</em> &gt; <em>@actions</em>. A list of all actions is shown.','','none'),(9503,'Choose an advanced action from the dropdown and click <em>Create</em>.','','none'),(9504,'Enter a name for the action in the <em>Label</em> field. This label will be visible for the user.','','none'),(9505,'Configure any of the other available options. These will depend on the kind of action that you have chosen.','','none'),(9506,'Click <em>Save</em>. You will be returned to the list of actions, with your new action added to the list.','','none'),(9507,'To edit an action you have previously created, click <em>Configure</em> in the <em>Operations</em> drop-down list. To delete an action you have previously created, click <em>Delete</em> in the <em>Operations</em> drop-down list.','','none'),(9508,'What are actions?','','none'),(9509,'Actions are module-defined tasks that can be executed on the site; for example, unpublishing content, sending an email message, or blocking a user.','','none'),(9510,'What are simple actions?','','none'),(9511,'Simple actions do not require configuration. They are automatically available to be executed, and are always listed as available on the @actions_page.','','none'),(9512,'What are advanced actions?','','none'),(9513,'How are actions executed?','','none'),(9514,'In the core software, actions can be executed through a <em>bulk operations form</em> added to a view; if you have the core Views module installed, see the related topic \"Managing content listings (views)\" for more information about views and bulk operations.','','none'),(9515,'Configuring actions overview','','none'),(9516,'Configuring comments','','none'),(9517,'Configure a content entity type/subtype to allow commenting, using a comment type that you have configured. See @content_structure_topic for more about content entities and fields, and @comment_type_topic to configure a comment type.','','10.5.6'),(9518,'Who can configure comments?','','10.5.6'),(9519,'In order to follow these steps, the Field UI module must be installed. You\'ll need the Comment module\'s <em>@comment_permissions_link</em> permission, in order to change comment settings for a comment field. You\'ll also need to have the appropriate permission for adding fields to the entity type or subtype that the comments are attached to. For example, to add a comment field to content items provided by the Node module, you would need the Node module\'s <em>Administer content types</em> permission.','','10.5.6'),(9520,'Follow the steps in the related <em>Adding a field to an entity sub-type</em> topic to add a field of type <em>Comments</em> to the desired entity type or sub-type.','','10.5.6'),(9521,'On the first field settings page, choose the <em>Comment type</em> to use for this entity type or sub-type. You\'ll also notice that the <em>Allowed number of values</em> field cannot be changed for comment fields.','','10.5.6'),(9522,'On the next field settings page, enter the desired settings for the comment field:','','10.5.6'),(9523,'<em>Threading</em>: whether or not the comments are collected by threads, with people able to reply to particular comments instead of to the content entity itself.','','10.5.6'),(9524,'<em>Comments per page</em>: the maximum number of comments displayed on one page (a pager will be added if you exceed this limit).','','10.5.6'),(9525,'<em>Anonymous commenting</em>: whether or not anonymous commenters are allowed or required to leave contact information with their comments (only applies if anonymous users have permission to post comments).','','10.5.6'),(9526,'<em>Show reply form on the same page as comments</em>: whether the comment reply form is displayed on the same page as the comments. If this is not selected, clicking <em>Reply</em> will open a new page with the reply form.','','10.5.6'),(9527,'<em>Preview comments</em>: whether previewing comments before submission is <em>Required</em>, <em>Optional</em>, or <em>Disabled</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9528,'<em>Default value</em>: each individual entity has its own comment settings, but here you can set defaults for the comment settings for this entity type or subtype. The comment settings values are:','','10.5.6'),(9529,'<em>Open</em>: comments are allowed.','','10.5.6'),(9530,'<em>Closed</em>: past comments remain visible, but no new comments are allowed.','','10.5.6'),(9531,'<em>Hidden</em>: past comments are hidden, and no new comments are allowed.','','10.5.6'),(9532,'Online documentation for content comment settings','','10.5.6'),(9533,'Creating a comment type','','none'),(9534,'Create a new comment type. See @comment_overview_topic for information about comments and comment types.','','10.5.6'),(9535,'Who can create a comment type?','','10.5.6'),(9536,'Users with the <em>@comment_permissions_link</em> permission (typically administrators) can create comment types.','','10.5.6'),(9537,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@comment_types_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9538,'Click <em>Add comment type</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9539,'In the <em>Label</em> field, enter a name for the comment type, which is how it will be listed in the administrative interface.','','10.5.6'),(9540,'In the <em>Target entity type</em> field, select the entity type to be commented on. See @content_structure_topic for more about content entities and fields.','','10.5.6'),(9541,'Click <em>Save</em>. The comment type will be created.','','10.5.6'),(9542,'Optionally, if you have the core Field UI module installed you can follow the steps in the related topics to add fields to the new comment type, set up the editing form, and configure the display.','','10.5.6'),(9543,'Disabling comments','','none'),(9544,'Turn off commenting for a particular entity (see @content_structure_topic for more about content entities and fields). Note that if you want to turn off commenting for all entities of an entity type or subtype, you will need to edit the field settings for the comment field; see @comment_config_topic for more about configuring the comment field.','','10.5.6'),(9545,'Who can disable comments?','','10.5.6'),(9546,'You will need the <em>@comment_permissions_link</em> permission in order to disable commenting. You will also need permission to edit the entity that the comments are on.','','10.5.6'),(9547,'Find the entity you want to disable comments for, and edit it. For example, to turn off comments on a content item, you could find it by navigating in the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu to <em>Content</em>, filtering to find the content item, and clicking <em>Edit</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9548,'Under <em>Comment settings</em>, select the desired comment setting:','','10.5.6'),(9549,'Save the entity.','','10.5.6'),(9550,'Moderating comments','','none'),(9551,'Decide which comments are shown on the website.','','10.5.6'),(9552,'Who can moderate comments?','','10.5.6'),(9553,'Users with the <em>@comment_permissions_link</em> permission (typically administrators) can moderate comments. You will also need the <em>Access the Content Overview page</em> permission from the Node module (if it is installed) to navigate to the comment management page.','','10.5.6'),(9554,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Content</em> &gt; <em>@comment_published_link</em>. A list of all comments is shown.','','10.5.6'),(9555,'To unpublish comments, select one or more comments by checking the boxes on the left side (right side in right-to-left languages). Then select <em>Unpublish comment</em> from the <em>Action</em> select list and click <em>Apply to selected items</em>. If you select the <em>Delete comment</em> action, you can instead delete the unwanted  comments.','','10.5.6'),(9556,'To change the content of a comment click <em>Edit</em> from the dropdown button for a particular comment.','','10.5.6'),(9557,'To publish comments that are not yet visible on the website, navigate to the <em>@comment_unpublished_link</em> tab. Select one or more comments by checking the boxes on the left side (right side in right-to-left languages). Then select <em>Publish comment</em> from the <em>Action</em> select list and click <em>Apply to selected items</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9558,'Online documentation for moderating comments','','10.5.6'),(9559,'Managing comments','','none'),(9560,'What is a comment?','','10.5.6'),(9561,'What is a comment type?','','10.5.6'),(9562,'Comments are divided into <em>comment types</em>, which are the entity sub-types for the comment entity type. Each comment type has its own fields and its own form and display settings; each type can be used to comment on a single entity type. You can set up different comment types for different commenting purposes on your web site; for example, you might set up a comment type for recipes that has fields \"How did it taste?\" and \"Did the instructions work?\", and another comment type for blog entries that has only a generic comment body field.','','10.5.6'),(9563,'What is moderation?','','10.5.6'),(9564,'<em>Moderation</em> is a workflow where comments posted by some users on your site are verified before being published, to prevent spam and other bad behavior. The core software provides basic moderation functionality: you can configure permissions so that new comments posted by some user roles start as unpublished until a user with a different role reviews and publishes them. Contributed modules provide additional moderation and spam-reduction functionality, such as requiring untrusted users pass a CAPTCHA test before submitting comments and letting community members flag comments as possible spam. See @users_overview_topic for more about users, permissions, and roles.','','10.5.6'),(9565,'Overview of managing comments','','10.5.6'),(9566,'The core Comment module provides the following functionality:','','10.5.6'),(9567,'Posting comments','','10.5.6'),(9568,'Creating comment types; the core Field UI module allows you to attach fields to comment types and attach comment reference fields to other entities so that people can comment on them.','','10.5.6'),(9569,'Configuring commenting','','10.5.6'),(9570,'Moderating comments as discussed above','','10.5.6'),(9571,'What is quick editing?','','10.5.6'),(9572,'Click the contextual links <em>Edit</em> button on the toolbar (in most themes, it looks like a pencil). Contextual <em>Edit</em> links with the same icon will appear all over your page.','','10.5.6'),(9573,'Find the contextual link for the part of the page you want to edit. For example, if you want to edit the settings for a block, the link should be in the top-right corner of the block, or top-left for right-to-left languages.','','10.5.6'),(9574,'Make your edits and submit the form.','','10.5.6'),(9575,'The core administrative interface has built-in compliance with many accessibility standards so that most pages are accessible to most users in their default state. However, certain pages become more accessible to some users through the use of a non-default or improved interface. These interfaces include:','','10.5.6'),(9576,'Enabling inline form errors','','10.5.6'),(9577,'Errors that occur when you submit a form, such as not filling in a required field, are sometimes difficult for users to understand and locate. In order to make these errors easier to find, the best practice is to put a summary of the errors at the top of the form page. To make them easier to understand, the best practice is to display error messages with the form fields they are related to. Both of these practices are implemented by the core Inline Form Errors module.','','10.5.6'),(9578,'What administrative interface components are available?','','10.5.6'),(9579,'Accessibility features, to enable all users to perform administrative tasks. See @accessibility_topic for more information.','','10.5.6'),(9580,'What are the sections of the administrative menu?','','10.5.6'),(9581,'The administrative menu, which you can navigate by visiting <em>@admin_link</em> on your site or by using an administrative toolbar, has the following sections (some may not be available, depending on which modules are currently installed on your site, and your permissions):','','10.5.6'),(9582,'<strong>Content:</strong> Find, manage, and create new pages; manage comments and files.','','10.5.6'),(9583,'<strong>Structure:</strong> Place and edit blocks, set up content types and fields, configure menus, administer taxonomy, and configure some contributed modules.','','10.5.6'),(9584,'<strong>Appearance:</strong> Switch between themes, install themes, and update existing themes.','','10.5.6'),(9585,'<strong>Extend:</strong> Update, install, and uninstall modules.','','10.5.6'),(9586,'<strong>Configuration:</strong> Configure the settings for various site functionality, including some contributed modules.','','10.5.6'),(9587,'<strong>People:</strong> Manage user accounts and permissions.','','10.5.6'),(9588,'<strong>Reports:</strong> Display information about site security, necessary updates, and site activity.','','10.5.6'),(9589,'<strong>Help:</strong> Get help on using the administrative interface.','','10.5.6'),(9590,'Install the core modules mentioned above to use the corresponding aspect of the administrative interface. See the related topics listed below for more details on some aspects of the administrative interface.','','10.5.6'),(9591,'Creating a content item','','none'),(9592,'Create and publish a content item. See @content_overview_topic for more about content types and content items.','','10.5.6'),(9593,'Who can create content?','','10.5.6'),(9594,'Users with the <em>@content_permissions_link</em> permission can visit the <em>Content</em> page as described in this topic. Each content type has its own create permissions. For example, to create content of type Article, a user would need the Article: Create new content permission. In addition, users with the <em>Bypass content access control</em> or <em>Administer content</em> permission can create content items of all types. Some contributed modules change the permission structure for creating content.','','10.5.6'),(9595,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>@content_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9596,'Click <em>Add content</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9597,'If there is more than one content type defined on your site that you have permission to create, click the name of the type of content you want to create.','','10.5.6'),(9598,'On the content edit form, enter the <em>Title</em> of your content, which will show as the page title when the content item is displayed on a page, and also as the label for the content item in administration screens.','','10.5.6'),(9599,'Fill in the other fields shown on the edit form for this specific content type.','','10.5.6'),(9600,'Leave the <em>Published</em> field checked to publish the content immediately, or uncheck it to make it unpublished. Unpublished content is generally not shown to non-administrative site users.','','10.5.6'),(9601,'Click <em>Save</em>. You will see the content displayed on a page.','','10.5.6'),(9602,'Creating a content type','','none'),(9603,'Create a new content type. See @content_overview_topic for more about content types.','','10.5.6'),(9604,'Who can create a content type?','','10.5.6'),(9605,'Users with the <em>@content_permissions_link</em> permission (typically administrators) can create new content types.','','10.5.6'),(9606,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@content_types_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9607,'Click <em>Add content type.</em>','','10.5.6'),(9608,'In the <em>Name</em> field, enter a name for the content type, which is how it will be listed in the administrative interface.','','10.5.6'),(9609,'Optionally, enter a <em>Description</em> for the content type. You may also want to adjust some of the settings in the vertical tabs section of the edit page.','','10.5.6'),(9610,'Click <em>Save and manage fields</em>. Your content type will be created, and assuming you have the core Field UI module installed, you will be taken to the <em>Manage fields</em> page for the content type. (If you do not have the core Field UI module installed, the button will say <em>Save</em> instead.)','','10.5.6'),(9611,'If you have the core Field UI module installed, follow the steps in the related topics to add fields to the new content type, set up the editing form, and configure the display.','','10.5.6'),(9612,'Editing a content item','','none'),(9613,'Find a content item and edit it, or update a group of content items in bulk. See @node_overview_topic for more about content types and content items.','','10.5.6'),(9614,'Who can find and edit content?','','10.5.6'),(9615,'Users with the <em>@content_permissions_link</em> permission can use the <em>Content</em> page to find content. Each content type has its own edit permissions. For example, to edit content of type Article, a user would need the <em>Article: Edit own content</em> permission to edit an article they created, or the <em>Article: Edit any content</em> permission to edit an article someone else created. In addition, users with the <em>Bypass content access control</em> or <em>Administer content</em> permission can edit content items of all types. Some contributed modules change the permission structure for editing content.','','10.5.6'),(9616,'Optionally, use filters to reduce the list of content items shown:','','10.5.6'),(9617,'<em>Title</em>: key word(s) from the title','','10.5.6'),(9618,'<em>Content type</em>','','10.5.6'),(9619,'<em>Published status</em>','','10.5.6'),(9620,'<em>Language</em>','','10.5.6'),(9621,'If you enter or select filter values, click <em>Filter</em> to apply the filters.','','10.5.6'),(9622,'Optionally, sort the list by clicking a column header. Click again to reverse the order.','','10.5.6'),(9623,'To edit the title or other field values for one content item, click <em>Edit</em> in the row of the content item. Update the values and click <em>Save</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9624,'A few types of edits can be done in bulk to multiple content items. For example, to publish several unpublished content items, check the boxes in the left column (right column in right-to-left languages) to select the desired content items. For <em>Action</em>, select the <em>Publish content</em> action. Click <em>Apply to selected items</em> to make the change. The other actions under <em>Action</em> work in a similar manner.','','10.5.6'),(9625,'What is a content item?','','10.5.6'),(9626,'A <em>content item</em> is a type of content entity for page-level content, which can have fields that store text, HTML markup, images, attached files, and other data. See @content_structure_topic for more about content entities and fields.','','10.5.6'),(9627,'What is a content type?','','10.5.6'),(9628,'Content items are divided into <em>content types</em>, which are the entity sub-types for the content item entity type; each content type has its own fields and display settings. For example, you might set up content types for pages, articles, recipes, events, and blog entries on your web site.','','10.5.6'),(9629,'Overview of managing content','','10.5.6'),(9630,'The core Node module allows you to define content types, and add and edit content items. The core Field UI module allows you to attach fields to each content type and manage the edit form and display for each content type. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks. Many other core and contributed modules and installation profiles provide pre-defined content types, modify the permission structure for content items, and provide other functionality.','','10.5.6'),(9631,'Creating a URL alias for a content item','','none'),(9632,'Give a content item page a human- or SEO-friendly URL alias; you can follow similar steps to create an alias for a taxonomy term page. See @overview_topic for more about aliases.','','10.5.6'),(9633,'Who can create URL aliases?','','10.5.6'),(9634,'Users with the <em>@path_permissions_link</em> permission can create aliases. To follow the steps in this topic, you will also need permission to edit the content item.','','10.5.6'),(9635,'Locate and open the content edit form for the content item, or create a new content item (see related topics on creating and editing content).','','10.5.6'),(9636,'Under <em>URL alias</em> on the edit form, enter the desired alias (for example, \"/about-us\"). Make sure the alias starts with a \"/\" character.','','10.5.6'),(9637,'Verify that the page can be visited with the new alias, for example <em>https://example.com/about-us</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9638,'Editing a URL alias','','none'),(9639,'Change an existing URL alias, to correct the path or the alias value. See @path_overview_topic for more about aliases.','','10.5.6'),(9640,'Who can manage URL aliases?','','10.5.6'),(9641,'Users with the <em>@path_permissions_link</em> permission can edit aliases.','','10.5.6'),(9642,'In the <em>Manage</em> administration menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Search and metadata</em> &gt; <em>@path_aliases_link</em>. A list of all the site\'s aliases will appear.','','10.5.6'),(9643,'Click <em>Edit</em> in the dropdown button for the alias that you would like to change.','','10.5.6'),(9644,'Make the required changes and click <em>Save</em>. You will be returned to the URL alias list page.','','10.5.6'),(9645,'Note that you can also add new aliases from this page, for any path on your site.','','10.5.6'),(9646,'Configuring aliases for URLs','','none'),(9647,'What is a URL?','','10.5.6'),(9648,'URL is the abbreviation for \"Uniform Resource Locator\", which is the page\'s address on the web. It is the \"name\" by which a browser identifies a page to display. In the example \"Visit us at <em>example.com</em>.\", <em>https://example.com</em> would be the URL for the home page of your website. Users use URLs to locate content on the web.','','10.5.6'),(9649,'What is a path?','','10.5.6'),(9650,'A path is the unique, last part of the URL for a specific function or piece of content. For example, for a page whose full URL is <em>https://example.com/node/7</em>, the path is <em>node/7</em>. Here are some examples of paths you might find in your site:','','10.5.6'),(9651,'node/7: Path to a particular content item.','','10.5.6'),(9652,'taxonomy/term/6: Path to a taxonomy term page.','','10.5.6'),(9653,'user/3: Path to a user profile page.','','10.5.6'),(9654,'What is an alias?','','10.5.6'),(9655,'The core software allows you to provide more understandable URLs for pages on your site, which are called <em>aliases</em>. For example, if you have an \"About Us\" page with the path <em>node/7</em>, you can set up an alias of <em>about</em> so that your visitors will see it as <em>https://www.example.com/about</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9656,'Overview of configuring paths, aliases, and URLs','','10.5.6'),(9657,'The core Path module provides the URL aliasing functionality. The contributed <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/pathauto\">Pathauto</a> module allows you to configure automatically-generated URL aliases for content items and other pages. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.5.6'),(9658,'Configuring taxonomy','','none'),(9659,'Create a taxonomy vocabulary and add a reference field for that vocabulary to a content entity. See @taxonomy_overview_topic for information about taxonomy and @content_structure_topic for more on content entities.','','10.5.6'),(9660,'Who can configure a taxonomy vocabulary?','','10.5.6'),(9661,'Users with the <em>@taxonomy_permissions_link</em> permission can configure a vocabulary. To add a field in the administrative interface, the core Field UI module must be installed, and you will also need the <em>Administer fields</em> permission for the entity you are adding the field to.','','10.5.6'),(9662,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@taxonomy_admin_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9663,'Click <em>Add vocabulary</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9664,'In the <em>Name</em> field, enter a name for the vocabulary (for example \"Ingredients\"), which is how it will be shown in the administrative interface. Optionally, add a description.','','10.5.6'),(9665,'Click <em>Save</em>. Your vocabulary will be created and you will see the page that lists all the terms in this vocabulary.','','10.5.6'),(9666,'Optionally, click <em>Add term</em> to add a term to the new vocabulary. In the <em>Name</em> field, enter the term name (for example \"Butter\"). Click <em>Save</em>. You will receive a confirmation about the term you created. You may optionally continue to add more terms.','','10.5.6'),(9667,'If you have the Field UI module installed, follow the instructions on the related <em>Adding a reference field to an entity sub-type</em> topic to add a taxonomy reference field to the entity type of your choice. The settings page will allow you to choose the <em>Vocabulary</em> that you created as the vocabulary to reference.','','10.5.6'),(9668,'You may also want to configure the display and form display of the new field (see related topics).','','10.5.6'),(9669,'Managing taxonomy','','none'),(9670,'What is taxonomy?','','10.5.6'),(9671,'<em>Taxonomy</em> is used to classify website content. One common example of taxonomy is the tags used to classify or categorize posts in a blog website; a cooking website could use an ingredients taxonomy to classify recipes. Individual taxonomy items are known as <em>terms</em> (the blog tags or recipe ingredients in these examples); and a set of terms is known as a <em>vocabulary</em> (the set of all blog post tags, or the set of all recipe ingredients in these examples). Technically, taxonomy terms are an entity type and the entity subtypes are the vocabularies; see @content_structure_topic for more on content entities. Like other entities, taxonomy terms can have fields attached; for instance, you could set up an image field to contain an icon for each term.','','10.5.6'),(9672,'An individual vocabulary can organize its terms in a hierarchy, or it could be flat. For example, blog tags normally have a flat structure, while a recipe ingredients vocabulary could be hierarchical (for example, tomatoes could be a sub-term of vegetables, and under tomatoes, you could have green and red tomatoes).','','10.5.6'),(9673,'Taxonomy terms are normally attached as reference fields to other content entities, which is how you can use them to classify content. When you set up a taxonomy reference field, you can let users enter terms in two ways:','','10.5.6'),(9674,'New terms can be created right on the content editing form.','','10.5.6'),(9675,'Fixed list of terms','','10.5.6'),(9676,'The list of terms is curated and managed outside the content editing form, and users can only select from the existing list when editing content.','','10.5.6'),(9677,'Overview of managing taxonomy','','10.5.6'),(9678,'The core Taxonomy module allows you to create and edit taxonomy vocabularies and taxonomy terms. The core Field UI module provides a user interface for adding fields to entities, including the taxonomy reference field, and configuring field editing and display. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.5.6'),(9679,'<em>Page settings</em>, <em>Block settings</em>, etc.: settings specific to the display type, such as the URL for a page display. Most display types support an <em>Access</em> setting, where you can choose a Permission or Role that a user must have in order to see the view.','','10.5.6'),(9680,'What are bulk operations?','','10.5.6'),(9681,'Adding a bulk operations form to a view','','none'),(9682,'Who can edit views?','','10.5.6'),(9683,'The core Views UI module will need to be installed and you will need <em>@views_permissions</em> permission in order to edit a view.','','10.5.6'),(9684,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@views</em>. A list of all views is shown.','','10.5.6'),(9685,'If there is not already an <em>Operations bulk form</em> in the <em>Fields</em> list for the view, click <em>Add</em> in the <em>Fields</em> section to add it. (The exact name of the bulk form field will vary, and may contain keywords like \"bulk update\", \"form element\" or \"operations\" -- not to be confused with <em>operations links</em>, which are applied to each item in a row.) If the bulk operations field already exists, click the field name to edit its settings.','','10.5.6'),(9686,'Check the action(s) you want to make available in the <em>Selected actions</em> list and click <em>Apply (all displays)</em>.','','10.5.6'),(9687,'Verify that the <em>Access</em> settings for the view are at least as restrictive as the permissions necessary to perform the bulk operations. People with permission to see the view, but who don\'t have permission to do the bulk operations, will experience problems.','','10.5.6'),(9688,'Click <em>Save</em>. The action(s) will be available as bulk operations in the view.','','10.5.6'),(9689,'The following permissions are needed to create and manage books; see @user_overview_topic and its related topics for more about permissions.','','none'),(9690,'Create and download an archive containing all your site\'s configuration, exported as YAML files. See @config_overview_topic for more information about configuration.','','10.5.6'),(9691,'Export a single configuration item to a file. See @config_overview_topic for more information about configuration.','','10.5.6'),(9692,'Import the complete configuration of your site from an archive file, such as one that was previously exported (see @export_full_topic). See @config_overview_topic for more information about configuration.','','10.5.6'),(9693,'Import a single configuration item in YAML format, such as one that was previously exported (see @export_single_topic). See @config_overview_topic for more information about configuration.','','10.5.6'),(9694,'Translate your site configuration to another language. See @language_add_topic if you need to add a new language.','','10.5.6'),(9695,'Find either the configuration entity type or the simple configuration item that you want to translate in the <em>Label</em> column of the list. Click <em>List</em> under <em>Operations</em> for a configuration entity, or <em>Translate</em> for simple configuration. (See @config_overview_topic to learn more about types of configuration and configuration entities.)','','10.5.6'),(9696,'The contact form will always have <em>Subject</em> and <em>Message</em> fields. If you want to add more fields, follow the steps in @adding_fields_topic.','','10.5.6'),(9697,'Change the workflow state of a particular entity. See @workflows_overview_topic for an overview of workflows, and @content_structure_topic for an overview of content entities.','','none'),(9698,'Create or edit a workflow with various workflow states (for example <em>Concept</em>, <em>Archived</em>, etc.) for moderating content. See @workflows_overview_topic for more information on workflows.','','none'),(9699,'Decide which roles should have permissions to make each transition; see @user_overview_topic for an overview of roles and permissions.','','none'),(9700,'Decide which <em>entity types</em> and subtypes the workflow should apply to. Only entity types that support revisions are possible to define workflows for. See @content_structure_topic for more information on content entities and fields.','','none'),(9701,'Configure language and translation settings for one or more content entity types (see @content_structure_topic for an overview of content entities). To do this, you must have at least two languages configured. Afterwards, you will have a <em>Translate</em> operation available for your content entities, either as a tab or link when you are viewing or editing content, or on content administration pages.','','10.5.6'),(9702,'A <em>layout</em> is a template that defines where blocks and other pieces of content should be displayed. The core Layout Discovery module allows modules and themes to register layouts, and the core Layout Builder module provides a visual interface for placing fields and blocks in layouts for entity sub-types and individual entity items (see @content_structure_topic for more on entities and fields).','','10.5.6'),(9703,'Core media items include audio, images, documents, and videos. You can add other media types, such as social media posts, through the use of contributed modules. Media items may be files located in your site\'s file system, or remote items referenced by a URL. Media items are content entities, and they are divided into media types (which are entity sub-types); media types can have fields. See @content_structure_topic for more information on content entities and fields.','','10.5.6'),(9704,'Content (blocks, content items, etc.) can be written in English or another language, and can be translated into additional languages. See @content_structure_topic to learn more about content.','','10.5.6'),(9705,'Many configuration items also include text that can be translated. Default configuration provided by your site\'s software is provided in English; you can also download community-provided translations. See @config_overview_topic to learn more about configuration.','','10.5.6'),(9706,'Exposes <em>entities</em> to other applications using a fully compliant implementation of the <a href=\"https://jsonapi.org\">JSON:API Specification</a>. See @content_structure_topic for more information on content entities and fields.','','10.5.6'),(9707,'Configure a text format so that when a user is editing text and selects this text format, a text editor installed on your site is shown. Configure the text editor, such as choosing which buttons and functions are available. See @filter_overview_topic for more about text formats.','','10.5.6'),(9708,'Follow the steps on @filter_overview_topic to add a new text format or configure an existing text format; when you reach the step about text editors, return to this topic.','','10.5.6'),(9709,'Return to @filter_overview_topic to complete the text format configuration, and be sure to save the text format.','','10.5.6'),(9710,'Add a field to an entity sub-type; see @content_structure_topic for an overview of entity types and sub-types, as well as an overview of field types.','','10.5.6'),(9711,'In <em>Add a new field</em>, select the type of field you want to add; see @content_structure_topic for an overview of field types.','','10.5.6'),(9712,'Configure the <em>formatters</em> used to display the fields of an entity sub-type, their order in the display, and the formatter settings. See @content_structure_topic for background information.','','10.5.6'),(9713,'Configure the <em>widgets</em> used to edit the fields of an entity sub-type, their order on the form, and the widget settings. See @content_structure_topic for background information.','','10.5.6'),(9714,'Add an entity reference field to an entity sub-type; see @content_structure_topic for more information on entities and reference fields.','','10.5.6'),(9715,'Decide on the hierarchy of containers and forums you want for your site; see @forum_concept_topic for an overview of forum hierarchy.','','none'),(9716,'Check the indexing status of the Help search page. If it is not fully indexed, see @cron_topic about how to run Cron until indexing is complete.','','10.5.6'),(9717,'In the future, you can click <em>Rebuild search index</em> on this page, or @cache_topic, in order to force help topic text to be reindexed for searching. This should be done whenever a module, theme, language, or string translation is updated.','','10.5.6'),(9718,'Add a new image style, which can be used to process and display images. See @media_topic for an overview of image styles.','','10.5.6'),(9719,'Configure an entity sub-type to have its fields displayed using a layout (see @content_structure_topic for more on entities and fields).','','none'),(9720,'A layout consists of one or more <em>sections</em>. Each section can have from one to four <em>columns</em>. You can place blocks, including special blocks for the fields on the entity sub-type, in each column of each section (see @block_overview_topic for more on blocks).','','none'),(9721,'Add a new media type that can be referenced in Media reference fields; media types are a content entity type. See @media_topic for an overview of media items and media types, and @content_structure_topic for more information on content entities and fields.','','10.5.6'),(9722,'Migrate data into a new, empty site, as part of an upgrade from an older version of Drupal. See @migrate_overview_topic for an overview of migrating and upgrading.','','none'),(9723,'Configure a responsive image style, which can be used to display images at different sizes on different devices. See @media_topic for an overview of responsive image styles, and @breakpoint_overview_topic for an overview of breakpoints.','','10.5.6'),(9724,'Select a <em>Fallback image style</em> to use when none of the other styles apply. See @image_style_topic if you need to add a new style.','','10.5.6'),(9725,'Follow the steps in @search_index_topic to make sure that the search index is updated.','','10.5.6'),(9726,'The <em>Content</em> and <em>Help</em> search types provided by the core software pre-index their content and store the results in several database tables that are collectively called the <em>search index</em>. The process of indexing renders the content and breaks it up into words, which can then be matched more efficiently with keyword queries when users perform searches. Search indexing happens during cron runs; see @cron_topic for more information about cron.','','10.5.6'),(9727,'Follow the steps in @cron_topic to make sure a cron task has been configured.','','10.5.6'),(9728,'In order to configure site search using the core Search module, you will need to configure one or more search pages. You will also need to verify or alter permissions so that the desired user roles can search the site. (See @user_overview_topic for more information about roles and permissions.) For content search, you will also need to make sure that the search index is configured and that the site is fully indexed. Finally, you may wish to place the <em>Search form</em> block on pages of your site, or add the search page to a navigation menu, to give users easy access to search. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.5.6'),(9729,'Clear the site cache. See @cache_topic for instructions.','','10.5.6'),(9730,'Uninstall a module. Your site should be in <em>maintenance mode</em> when you uninstall modules. See @maintenance_topic for details.','','10.5.6'),(9731,'Follow the steps in @view_edit_topic to edit the other settings for the display.','','10.5.6'),(9732,'Find the section whose settings you want to change, such as <em>Format</em> or <em>Filter criteria</em>. (See @views_overview_topic for more information.)','','10.5.6'),(9733,'The core software allows you to configure workflows in which each transition has an associated permission that can be granted to a particular role. See @configuring_workflows_topic for more information.','','none'),(9734,'Users with sufficient permissions can change the workflow state of a particular entity. See @changing_states_topic for more information.','','none'),(9735,'Remote oEmbed providers could not be retrieved due to error: @error. Using previously stored data. This may contain out of date information.','','none'),(9736,'Remote oEmbed providers database returned invalid or empty list. Using previously stored data. This may contain out of date information.','','none'),(9737,'Block type settings','','none'),(9738,'@bundle_type is not @bundles or @last','','none'),(9739,'@bundle_type is not @bundle','','none'),(9740,'Are you sure you want to remove the @entity-type %label from the %region region?','','none'),(9741,'This will remove the block placement. You will need to <a href=\":url\">place it again</a> in order to undo this action.','','none'),(9742,'The @entity-type %label has been removed from the %region region.','','none'),(9743,'Destination file \"%file\" exists','','none'),(9744,'The file could not be uploaded because the destination \"%destination\" is invalid.','','none'),(9745,'For more information see the <a href=\":html-specifications\">HTML Living Standard</a> or use your favorite search engine to find other sites that explain HTML.','','none'),(9746,'Converts an image to a format (such as JPEG).','','10.4.5'),(9747,'Determines the content language from the request parameter named \'language_content_entity\'.','','10.5.6'),(9748,'The source field definition for the %type media type is missing.','','none'),(9749,'Author/owner name','','none'),(9750,'Author/owner URL','','none'),(9751,'Media item default name','','none'),(9752,'Thumbnail local URI','','none'),(9753,'Resource source URL','','none'),(9754,'Resource width','','none'),(9755,'Resource height','','none'),(9756,'Resource HTML representation','','none'),(9757,'Module %name has been enabled. Configure <a href=\":link\">related permissions</a>.@count modules have been enabled: %names. Configure <a href=\":link\">related permissions</a>.','','10.2.3'),(9758,'Defined on the <a href=\"@appearance\">Appearance Settings</a> page.','','none'),(9759,'Save and go to list','','none'),(9760,'Automatic updating of Drupal core is not supported. See the <a href=\":update-guide\">Updating Drupal guide</a> for information on how to update Drupal core manually.','','none'),(9761,'You must provide a URL to install.','','none'),(9762,'The role %role has had the following non-existent permission(s) removed: %permissions.','','none'),(9763,'The role %role_list has had non-existent permissions removed. Check the logs for details.The roles %role_list have had non-existent permissions removed. Check the logs for details.','','none'),(9764,'Other permissions pages','','none'),(9765,'The main Permissions page can be overwhelming, so each module that defines permissions has its own page for setting them. There are links to these pages on the <a href=\":modules\">Extend page</a>. When editing a content type, vocabulary, etc., there is also a Manage permissions tab for permissions related to that configuration.','','none'),(9766,'Account %name has been disabled.','','none'),(9767,'Delete the account and make its content belong to the %anonymous-name user. This action cannot be undone.','','10.4.5'),(9768,'Delete the account and its content. This action cannot be undone.','','10.4.5'),(9769,'To log in to this site, your browser must accept cookies from the domain %domain.','','10.5.6'),(9770,'Cancellation method','','10.4.5'),(9771,'This view will be displayed by visiting this path on your site. You may use \"%\" or named route parameters like \"%node\" in your URL to represent values that will be used for contextual filters: For example, \"node/%node/feed\" or \"view_path/%\". Named route parameters are required when this path matches an existing path. For example, paths such as \"taxonomy/term/%taxonomy_term\" or \"user/%user/custom-view\".','','none'),(9772,'Sort field identifier','','none'),(9773,'This will appear in the URL after the ?, as value of \'sort_by\' parameter, to identify this sort field. Cannot be blank. Only letters, digits and the dot (\'.\'), hyphen (\'-\'), underscore (\'_\'), and tilde (\'~\') characters are allowed.','','none'),(9774,'This identifier is already used by %label sort handler.','','none'),(9775,'Switch to this workspace','','none'),(9776,'Workspace changes','','none'),(9777,'This workspace has no changes.','','none'),(9778,'@entity_type_label: @entity_bundle_label','','none'),(9779,'starterkit_theme','','none'),(9780,'admin/reports/dblog/event/{{ wid }}','','10.2.3'),(9781,'admin/content/files/usage/{{ fid }}','','10.2.3'),(9782,'@interval','','10.2.3'),(9783,'Code Block','','10.4.5'),(9784,'The CKEditor 5 module provides a highly-accessible, highly-usable visual text editor and adds a toolbar to text fields. Users can use buttons to format content and to create semantically correct and valid HTML. The CKEditor module uses the framework provided by the <a href=\":text_editor\">Text Editor module</a>. It requires JavaScript to be enabled in the browser. For more information, see the <a href=\":doc_url\">online documentation for the CKEditor 5 module</a> and the <a href=\":cke5_url\">CKEditor 5 website</a>.','','none'),(9785,'Enabling CKEditor 5 for individual text formats','','none'),(9786,'When CKEditor 5 is chosen from the <em>Text editor</em> drop-down menu, its toolbar configuration is displayed. You can add and remove buttons from the <em>Active toolbar</em> by dragging and dropping them. Separators and rows can be added to organize the buttons.','','none'),(9787,'Filtering HTML content','','none'),(9788,'Unlike other text editors, plugin configuration determines the tags and attributes allowed in text formats using CKEditor 5. If using the <em>Limit allowed HTML tags and correct faulty HTML</em> filter, this filter\'s values will be automatically set based on enabled plugins and toolbar items.','','none'),(9789,'Developing CKEditor 5 plugins in Drupal','','none'),(9790,'See the <a href=\":dev_docs_url\">online documentation</a> for detailed information on developing CKEditor 5 plugins for use in Drupal.','','none'),(9791,'The built in WYSIWYG editor (CKEditor 5) comes with a number of accessibility features. CKEditor 5 comes with built in <a href=\":shortcuts\">keyboard shortcuts</a>, which can be beneficial for both power users and keyboard only users.','','none'),(9792,'To support multilingual page content, CKEditor 5 can be configured to include a language button in the toolbar.','','none'),(9793,'With CKEditor 5 this is a\n          read-only field. The allowed HTML tags and attributes are determined\n          by the CKEditor 5 configuration. Manually removing tags would break\n          enabled functionality, and any manually added tags would be removed by\n          CKEditor 5 on render.','','10.4.5'),(9794,'CKEditor 5','','10.4.5'),(9795,'Text Format plus Text Editor pair using CKEditor 5','','none'),(9796,'CKEditor 5 settings','','none'),(9797,'Enabled Headings','','10.4.5'),(9798,'Source Editing','','none'),(9799,'Allowed Tag','','none'),(9800,'Button @name has been copied to the active toolbar.','','10.4.5'),(9801,'The <em>Source Editing</em> plugin was enabled to support tags and/or attributes that are not explicitly supported by any available CKEditor 5 plugins.','','none'),(9802,'The CKEditor 4 button %button does not have a known upgrade path. If it allowed editing markup, then you can do so now through the Source Editing functionality.','','none'),(9803,'The %cke4_plugin_id plugin settings do not have a known upgrade path.','','none'),(9804,'The CKEditor 5 plugin %button has a configurable subset of elements, but does not have a known upgrade path to configure that subset to match your text format. Hence it is now using its default configuration.','','none'),(9805,'These are the headings that will appear in the headings dropdown. If a heading is not chosen here, it does not necessarily mean the corresponding tag is disallowed in the text format.','','10.4.5'),(9806,'Manually editable HTML tags','','10.4.5'),(9807,'A list of HTML tags that can be used while editing source. It is only necessary to add tags that are not already supported by other enabled plugins. For example, if \"Bold\" is enabled, it is not necessary to add the <code>&lt;strong&gt;</code> tag, but it may be necessary to add <code>&lt;dl&gt;&lt;dt&gt;&lt;dd&gt;</code> in a format that does not have a definition list plugin, but requires definition list markup.','','10.4.5'),(9808,'CKEditor 5 toolbar configuration','','none'),(9809,'Press the down arrow key to add to the toolbar.','','10.4.5'),(9810,'Move this button in the toolbar by pressing the left or right arrow keys. Press the up arrow key to remove from the toolbar.','','10.4.5'),(9811,'Invalid toolbar value.','','none'),(9812,'CKEditor 5 element','Validation','none'),(9813,'The following tag is not valid HTML: %provided_element.','','none'),(9814,'CKEditor 5 enabled configurable plugins','Validation','none'),(9815,'Configuration for the enabled plugin \"%plugin_label\" (%plugin_id) is missing.','','none'),(9816,'CKEditor 5 fundamental text format compatibility','Validation','none'),(9817,'CKEditor 5 only works with HTML-based text formats. The \"%filter_label\" (%filter_plugin_id) filter implies this text format is not HTML anymore.','','none'),(9818,'CKEditor 5 needs at least the &lt;p&gt; and &lt;br&gt; tags to be allowed to be able to function. They are not allowed by the \"%filter_label\" (%filter_plugin_id) filter.','','none'),(9819,'The current CKEditor 5 build requires the following elements and attributes: <br><code>@list</code><br>The following elements are not supported: <br><code>@diff</code>','','none'),(9820,'The current CKEditor 5 build requires the following elements and attributes: <br><code>@list</code><br>The following elements are missing: <br><code>@diff</code>','','none'),(9821,'CKEditor 5 toolbar item conditions must be met','Validation','none'),(9822,'The %toolbar_item toolbar item requires image uploads to be enabled.','','none'),(9823,'The %toolbar_item toolbar item requires the %filter filter to be enabled.','','none'),(9824,'The %toolbar_item toolbar item requires the %plugin plugin to be enabled.','','none'),(9825,'The %toolbar_item toolbar item requires the %plugins plugins to be enabled.','','none'),(9826,'CKEditor 5 toolbar item','Validation','none'),(9827,'The provided toolbar item %toolbar_item is not valid.','','none'),(9828,'CKEditor 5 toolbar item dependency','Validation','none'),(9829,'Depends on %toolbar_item, which is not enabled.','','none'),(9830,'Move a button into the <em>Active toolbar</em> to enable it, or into the list of <em>Available buttons</em> to disable it. Buttons may be moved with the mouse or keyboard arrow keys.','','10.4.5'),(9831,'PostgreSQL pg_trgm extension','','none'),(9832,'Not created','','none'),(9833,'Preview failed','','10.5.6'),(9834,'Drupal Media toolbar','','10.5.6'),(9835,'Link media','','10.5.6'),(9836,'Add %label effect to style %style','','10.4.5'),(9837,'Edit %label effect on style %style','','none'),(9838,'Maintenance mode Retry-After header settings','','none'),(9839,'Minimum value for Retry-After header in seconds','','none'),(9840,'Maximum value for Retry-After header in seconds','','none'),(9841,'The MySQL module provides the connection between Drupal and a MySQL, MariaDB or equivalent database. For more information, see the <a href=\":mysql\">online documentation for the MySQL module</a>.','','none'),(9842,'The PostgreSQL module provides the connection between Drupal and a PostgreSQL database. For more information, see the <a href=\":pgsql\">online documentation for the PostgreSQL module</a>.','','none'),(9843,'The SQLite module provides the connection between Drupal and a SQLite database. For more information, see the <a href=\":sqlite\">online documentation for the SQLite module</a>.','','none'),(9844,'Deprecated modules enabled','','none'),(9845,'Deprecated modules found: %module_list.','','10.4.5'),(9846,'Deprecated themes enabled','','none'),(9847,'Deprecated themes found: %theme_list.','','none'),(9848,'Obsolete extensions enabled','','none'),(9849,'Database support for JSON','','10.5.6'),(9850,'Is required in Drupal 10.0.','','10.4.7'),(9851,'Non-stable modules','','none'),(9852,'@lifecycle','','10.5.6'),(9853,'View information on the @lifecycle status of the module @module','','10.5.6'),(9854,'Help <span class=\"visually-hidden\">for @module</span>','','10.5.6'),(9855,'Permissions <span class=\"visually-hidden\">for @module</span>','','10.5.6'),(9856,'Configure <span class=\"visually-hidden\">@module</span>','','10.5.6'),(9857,'Are you sure you wish to enable experimental and deprecated modules?','','none'),(9858,'<a href=\":url\">Deprecated modules</a> are modules that may be removed from the next major release of Drupal core and the relevant contributed module. Use at your own risk.','','none'),(9859,'<a href=\":url\">Deprecated modules</a> are modules that may be removed from the next major release of this project. Use at your own risk.','','none'),(9860,'<a href=\":url\">Deprecated modules</a> are modules that may be removed from the next major release of Drupal core. Use at your own risk.','','none'),(9861,'The @name module is deprecated. (more information)','','none'),(9862,'about the status of the @name module','','none'),(9863,'Are you sure you wish to enable an experimental module?Are you sure you wish to enable experimental modules?','','none'),(9864,'Are you sure you wish to enable a deprecated module?Are you sure you wish to enable deprecated modules?','','none'),(9865,'The following module is experimental: @modules.The following modules are experimental: @modules.','','none'),(9866,'Get the actual @label from a @label revision','','none'),(9867,'Database connection supports the JSON type.','','none'),(9868,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/system-requirements\">Database connection does not support JSON.</a>','','none'),(9869,'Media widget','','10.5.6'),(9870,'Not all functionality may be available because some information could not be retrieved.','','10.5.6'),(9871,'Allow the user to resize images','','10.4.5'),(9872,'PostgreSQL has the pg_trgm extension enabled.','','none'),(9873,'The <a href=\":pg_trgm\">pg_trgm</a> PostgreSQL extension is not present. The extension is required by Drupal 10 to improve performance when using PostgreSQL. See <a href=\":requirements\">Drupal database server requirements</a> for more information.','','none'),(9874,'Drupal could not check for the pg_trgm extension: @error.','','none'),(9875,'Alternative text override','','10.5.6'),(9876,'Default alternative text:','','10.2.3'),(9877,'Override media image alternative text','','10.5.6'),(9878,'Enter media caption','','10.5.6'),(9879,'Caption media','','10.5.6'),(9880,'Toggle caption off','','10.5.6'),(9881,'Toggle caption on','','10.5.6'),(9882,'Post updating @extension','','none'),(9883,'Press the down arrow key to activate','','10.4.5'),(9884,'Decorative image','','10.5.6'),(9885,'Add missing alternative text','','10.5.6'),(9886,'Change image alternative text','','10.5.6'),(9887,'The %last_item theme has ckeditor_stylesheets configured without a corresponding ckeditor5-stylesheets configuration. See the <a href=\":change_record\">change record</a> for details.The %first_items and %last_item themes have ckeditor_stylesheets configured, but without corresponding ckeditor5-stylesheets configurations. See the <a href=\":change_record\">change record</a> for details.','','none'),(9888,'Source editing should only use otherwise unavailable tags and attributes','Validation','none'),(9889,'The following @element_type(s) are already supported by enabled plugins and should not be added to the Source Editing \"Manually editable HTML tags\" field: %overlapping_tags.','','none'),(9890,'The following @element_type(s) are already supported by available plugins and should not be added to the Source Editing \"Manually editable HTML tags\" field. Instead, enable the following plugins to support these @element_types: %overlapping_tags.','','none'),(9891,'There is no staged configuration.','','none'),(9892,'The staged configuration is identical to the active configuration.','','none'),(9893,'The main way to change the overall appearance of your site is to switch the default theme. The core Layout Builder and Layout Discovery modules allow you to define layouts for your site\'s content, and the core Breakpoint module helps themes change appearance for different-sized devices. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.5.6'),(9894,'Using in-line (quick) settings editing','','none'),(9895,'Edit settings in place.','','10.5.6'),(9896,'The core Settings Tray module provides the ability to quickly edit settings inline. It requires the core Contextual Links module in order to expose the links that let you edit in place.','','10.5.6'),(9897,'Who can edit settings in place?','','10.5.6'),(9898,'In order to follow these steps to edit settings in place, the core Settings Tray module must be installed. Also, either the core Toolbar module or a contributed replacement must be installed. You will need to have <em>Use contextual links</em> permission, as well as permission to edit the particular content or settings.','','10.5.6'),(9899,'Find and visit a page on your site that has the settings that you would like to edit.','','10.5.6'),(9900,'Click the link to open the contextual links menu, and click <em>Quick edit</em>. An editing form for the settings should appear on the page.','','10.5.6'),(9901,'In-place or <em>quick</em> editing. In-place editing of configuration is provided by the core Settings Tray module. See @settings_tray_topic for more information.','','10.5.6'),(9902,'Exposes entities and other resources to other applications using a <a href=\"https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Representational_state_transfer\">REST</a> implementation. Data is exchanged using a serialization format such as JSON, and transferred using an authentication method such as HTTP Basic Authentication.','','10.5.6'),(9903,'Image loading settings','','none'),(9904,'Loading attribute','','none'),(9905,'Image loading','','10.4.5'),(9906,'Lazy render images with native image loading attribute (<em>loading=\"lazy\"</em>). This improves performance by allowing browsers to lazily load images.','','10.4.5'),(9907,'Lazy (<em>loading=\"lazy\"</em>)','','10.4.5'),(9908,'Eager (<em>loading=\"eager\"</em>)','','10.4.5'),(9909,'Image loading attribute','','10.4.5'),(9910,'Select the loading attribute for images. <a href=\":link\">Learn more about the loading attribute for images.</a>','','10.4.5'),(9911,'Delays loading the image until that section of the page is visible in the browser. When in doubt, lazy loading is recommended.','','10.4.5'),(9912,'Force browsers to download an image as soon as possible. This is the browser default for legacy reasons. Only use this option when the image is always expected to render.','','10.4.5'),(9913,'Image loading: @attribute','','10.4.5'),(9914,'Your PHP installation is too old. Drupal requires at least PHP %version. It is recommended to upgrade to PHP version %recommended or higher for the best ongoing support. See <a href=\"http://php.net/supported-versions.php\">PHP\'s version support documentation</a> and the <a href=\":php_requirements\">Drupal PHP requirements</a> page for more information.','','10.2.3'),(9915,'It is recommended to upgrade to PHP version %recommended or higher for the best ongoing support.  See <a href=\"http://php.net/supported-versions.php\">PHP\'s version support documentation</a> and the <a href=\":php_requirements\">Drupal PHP requirements</a> page for more information.','','none'),(9916,'View information on the @lifecycle status of the theme @theme','','none'),(9917,'Assign or change the region of a block by clicking here. A dropdown list with all the regions will appear. You can place one block in multiple regions.','','none'),(9918,'Allow reverse list','','none'),(9919,'Allow start index','','none'),(9920,'Allow the user to reverse an ordered list','','10.4.5'),(9921,'Allow the user to specify the start index of an ordered list','','10.4.5'),(9922,'Check <a href=\":handbook\">this handbook page</a> for details about compatibility issues of contrib modules.','','none'),(9923,'Source Editing should never allow self-XSS.','Validation','none'),(9924,'The following tag in the Source Editing \"Manually editable HTML tags\" field is a security risk: %dangerous_tag.','','none'),(9925,'Enabled Alignments','','10.4.5'),(9926,'Alignment type','','none'),(9927,'Allow view mode override','','none'),(9928,'These are the alignment types that will appear in the alignment dropdown.','','10.4.5'),(9929,'Allow the user to override the default view mode','','10.4.5'),(9930,'CKEditor 5 Media plugin in sync with filter settings','Validation','none'),(9931,'The CKEditor 5 \"%cke5_media_plugin_label\" plugin\'s \"%cke5_allow_view_mode_override_label\" setting should be in sync with the \"%filter_media_plugin_label\" filter\'s \"%filter_media_allowed_view_modes_label\" setting: when checked, two or more view modes must be allowed by the filter.','','none'),(9932,'View update notifications','','10.2.3'),(9933,'These messages are displayed on most administrative pages when updates become available.','','10.2.3'),(9934,'You can choose to send email only if a security update is available, or to be notified about all newer versions. If there are updates available of Drupal core or any of your installed modules and themes, your site will always print a message on the <a href=\":status_report\">status report</a> page. If there is a security update, an error message will be printed on administration pages for users with <a href=\":update_permissions\">permission to view update notifications</a>.','','none'),(9935,'Congratulations and welcome to the Drupal community.','','none'),(9936,'The %plugin plugin needs another plugin to create <code>@non_creatable_tag</code>, for it to be able to create the following attributes: <code>@attributes_on_tag</code>. Enable a plugin that supports creating this tag. If none exists, you can configure the Source Editing plugin to support it.','','none'),(9937,'Olivero Color Scheme Settings','','none'),(9938,'These settings adjust the look and feel of the Olivero theme. Changing the color below will change the base hue, saturation, and lightness values the Olivero theme uses to determine its internal colors.','','none'),(9939,'Olivero Color Scheme','','none'),(9940,'Enter color in full hexadecimal format (#abc123).','','none'),(9941,'Derivatives will be formed from this color.','','none'),(9942,'Colors must be 7-character string specifying a color hexadecimal format.','','none'),(9943,'Base Primary Color','','none'),(9944,'@fieldName has changed to @fieldValue','','none'),(9945,'Unable to uninstall the %module module because: @reason.','','none'),(9946,'Unable to install the %theme theme since it requires the %required_module module.','','none'),(9947,'If the <em>Source</em> button is available in the toolbar, users can click this button to disable the visual editor and edit the HTML source directly. After toggling back, the visual editor uses the HTML tags allowed via plugin configuration (and not explicity disallowed by filters) to format the text. Tags not enabled via plugin configuration will be stripped out of the HTML source when the user toggles back to the text editor.','','none'),(9948,'@theme theme','','none'),(9949,'Resolve all issues below to continue the installation. For help configuring your database server, see the <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/installing-drupal\">installation handbook</a>, or contact your hosting provider.','','none'),(9950,'Updating to Drupal @current_major is only supported from Drupal version @required_min_version or higher. If you are trying to update from an older version, first update to the latest version of Drupal @previous_major. (<a href=\":url\">Drupal upgrade guide</a>)','','none'),(9951,'Migrating an Existing Text Format to CKEditor 5','','none'),(9952,'When switching an existing text format to use CKEditor 5, an automatic process is initiated that helps text formats switching to CKEditor 5 from CKEditor 4 (or no text editor) to do so with minimal effort and zero data loss.','','none'),(9953,'This process is designed for there to be no data loss risk in switching to CKEditor 5. However some of your editor\'s functionality may not be 100% equivalent to what was available previously. In most cases, these changes are minimal. After the process completes, status and/or warning messages will summarize any changes that occurred, and more detailed information will be available in the site\'s logs.','','none'),(9954,'CKEditor 5 will attempt to enable plugins that provide equivalent toolbar items to those used prior to switching to CKEditor 5. All core CKEditor 4 plugins and many popular contrib plugins already have CKEditor 5 equivalents. In some cases, functionality that required contrib modules is now built into CKEditor 5. In instances where a plugin does not have an equivalent, no data loss will occur but elements previously provided via the plugin may need to be added manually as HTML via source editing.','','none'),(9955,'Additional migration considerations for text formats with restricted HTML','','none'),(9956,'The “Allowed HTML tags\" field in the “Limit allowed HTML tags and correct Faulty HTML\" filter is now read-only','','none'),(9957,'This field accurately represents the tags/attributes allowed by a text format, but the allowed tags are based on which plugins are enabled and how they are configured. For example, enabling the Underline plugin adds the &lt;u&gt; tag to “Allowed HTML tags\".','','none'),(9958,'The &lt;p&gt; and &lt;br &gt; tags will be automatically added to your text format.','','none'),(9959,'CKEditor 5 requires the &lt;p&gt; and &lt;br &gt; tags to achieve basic functionality. They will be automatically added to “Allowed HTML tags\" on formats that previously did not allow them.','','none'),(9960,'Tags/attributes that are not explicitly supported by any plugin are supported by Source Editing','','none'),(9961,'When a necessary tag/attribute is not directly supported by an available plugin, the \"Source Editing\" plugin is enabled. This plugin is typically used for by passing the CKEditor 5 UI and editing contents as HTML source. In the settings for Source Editing, tags/attributes that aren\'t available via other plugins are added to Source Editing\'s \"Manually editable HTML tags\" setting so they are supported by the text format.','','none'),(9962,'To maintain the capabilities of this text format, <a target=\"_blank\" href=\":ck_migration_url\">the CKEditor 5 migration</a> did the following:','','none'),(9963,'To maintain the capabilities of this text format, the CKEditor 5 migration did the following:','','none'),(9964,'Enabled these plugins: (%plugins).','','none'),(9965,'Added these tags/attributes to the Source Editing Plugin\'s <a target=\"_blank\" href=\":source_edit_url\">Manually editable HTML tags</a> setting: @tag_list','','none'),(9966,'Added these tags/attributes to the Source Editing Plugin\'s Manually editable HTML tags setting: @tag_list','','none'),(9967,'Additional details are available <a target=\"_blank\" href=\":dblog_url\">in your logs</a>.','','none'),(9968,'Additional details are available in your logs.','','none'),(9969,'Updating to CKEditor 5 added support for some previously unsupported tags/attributes.','','none'),(9970,'A plugin introduced support for the following:','','none'),(9971,'for','Ckeditor 5 tag list','none'),(9972,'The @tag tag was added because it is <a target=\"_blank\" href=\":fundamental_tag_link\">required by CKEditor 5</a>.The @tag tags were added because they are <a target=\"_blank\" href=\":fundamental_tag_link\">required by CKEditor 5</a>.','','none'),(9973,'The @tag tag was added because it is required by CKEditor 5.The @tag tags were added because they are required by CKEditor 5.','','none'),(9974,'The tag %tags;The tags %tags;','','none'),(9975,'This attribute: %attributes;These attributes: %attributes;','','none'),(9976,'The migration of %text_format to CKEditor 5 has been saved.','','none'),(9977,'An error occurred during the execution of the Ajax response: !error','','10.5.6'),(9978,'Date range (Datetime range module): Stores time/date periods with a start and an end','','10.5.6'),(9979,'Find the view that you would like to edit, and click <em>Edit</em> from the dropdown button. Note that bulk operations work best in a view with a Page display, and a Table format.','','10.5.6'),(9980,'Note that anonymous users with this permission are able to edit any content created by any anonymous user.','','10.5.6'),(9981,'Note that anonymous users with this permission are able to delete any content created by any anonymous user.','','10.5.6'),(9982,'The fallback image style is typically the smallest size image you expect to appear in this space. The fallback image should only appear on a site if an error occurs.','','none'),(9983,'The %relationship_name relationship used in %handler_type %handler is not present in the %display_name display.','','none'),(9984,'Configure @type @current of @total: @item','','none'),(9985,'The readme could not be rewritten.','','none'),(9986,'Updates failed for the entity type %entity_type, for %entity_ids. Check the logs.','','none'),(9987,'Unable to update %entity_type %view due to error @message %function (line %line of %file). <pre>@backtrace_string</pre>','','none'),(9988,'Block content entity changed','Validation','none'),(9989,'Style label','','none'),(9990,'Style tag + classes','','none'),(9991,'A list of classes that will be provided in the \"Style\" dropdown. Enter one or more classes on each line in the format: element.classA.classB|Label. Example: h1.title|Title. Advanced example: h1.fancy.title|Fancy title.<br />These styles should be available in your theme\'s CSS file.','','10.4.5'),(9992,'Line @line-number does not contain a valid value. Enter a valid CSS selector containing one or more classes, followed by a pipe symbol and a label.Lines @line-numbers do not contain a valid value. Enter a valid CSS selector containing one or more classes, followed by a pipe symbol and a label.','','none'),(9993,'The following tag is missing the required attribute <code>@required_attribute_name</code>: <code>@provided_element</code>.','','none'),(9994,'The following tag does not have the minimum of @min_attribute_value_count allowed values for the required attribute <code>@required_attribute_name</code>: <code>@provided_element</code>.','','none'),(9995,'Styles can only be specified for already supported tags.','Validation','none'),(9996,'A style can only be specified for an HTML 5 tag. <code>@tag</code> is not an HTML5 tag.','','none'),(9997,'A style must only specify classes not supported by other plugins. The <code>@classes</code> classes on <code>@tag</code> are already supported by the enabled %plugin plugin.','','none'),(9998,'A style must only specify classes not supported by other plugins. The <code>@classes</code> classes on <code>@tag</code> are supported by the %plugin plugin. Remove this style and enable that plugin instead.','','none'),(9999,'Unique label in list','Validation','none'),(10000,'The label %label is not unique.','','none'),(10001,'To search help, you will need to install the core Search module, configure a search page, and add a search block to the Help page or another administrative page. (A search page is provided automatically, and if you use the core Claro administrative theme, a help search block is shown on the main Help page.) Then users with search permissions, and permission to view help, will be able to search help. See the <a href=\":search_help\">Search module help page</a> for more information.','','none'),(10002,'A base theme is a theme that is not meant to be used directly on a site, but instead acts as a scaffolding for building other themes. The core Stable 9 theme is one example; other base themes can be downloaded from the <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/project/project_theme\">Download &amp; Extend page on drupal.org</a>.','','10.5.6'),(10003,'The core Filter, Responsive Image, and Path modules provide settings and display options for entities and fields.','','10.5.6'),(10004,'A text editor is software (typically, a JavaScript library) that provides buttons and other command mechanisms to make editing HTML text easier. Some editors are called <em>visual</em> or <em>WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get)</em> editors; these editors hide the details of HTML from the user, and instead show formatted output on the screen. The core Text Editor module provides a framework for deploying text editors on your site. The core CKEditor 5 module provides CKEditor 5, which is a widely-used JavaScript text editor that creates clean and valid HTML; the module also enforces the HTML tag restrictions in the associated text format. Various contributed modules provide other editors; to install a new editor, besides installing the module, you may need to download the editor library from a third-party site.','','10.5.6'),(10005,'Select <em>CKEditor 5</em> as the <em>Text editor</em>, or another text editor that you have installed. The rest of these steps assume you selected <em>CKEditor 5</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10006,'Under <em>Toolbar configuration</em>, drag buttons between <em>Available buttons</em> and <em>Active toolbar</em>; only buttons in <em>Active toolbar</em> will be shown to the user. Focusing or hovering over a button will display a tooltip explaining what the button does.','','10.5.6'),(10007,'Drag buttons within <em>Active toolbar</em> to the desired order, and group buttons by dragging them between group identifiers; drag <em>a new group identifier</em> to the toolbar to add additional groups.','','10.5.6'),(10008,'If you add buttons that require configuration, the <em>CKEditor 5 plugin settings</em> section will be visible, and provide their respective configuration forms.','','10.5.6'),(10009,'Click the link for your administrative theme (such as the core Claro theme), near the top of the page, and verify that there is already a search block for help located in the Help region. If not, follow the steps in the related topic to place the <em>Search form</em> block in the Help region. When configuring the block, choose <em>Help</em> as the search page, and in the <em>Pages</em> tab under <em>Visibility</em>, enter <em>/admin/help</em> to make the search form only visible on the main <em>Help</em> page.','','10.5.6'),(10010,'Click the shortcut link to add the page to your shortcut list -- in the core Claro administrative theme, the link looks like a star, and is displayed next to the page title. However, if the page is already in your shortcut set, clicking the shortcut link will remove it from your shortcut set.','','10.5.6'),(10011,'The Shortcut module creates an add/remove link for each page on your site; the link lets you add or remove the current page from the currently-enabled set of shortcuts (if your theme displays it and you have permission to edit your shortcut set). The core Claro administration theme displays this link next to the page title, as a gray or yellow star. If you click on the gray star, you will add that page to your preferred set of shortcuts. If the page is already part of your shortcut set, the link will be a yellow star, and will allow you to remove the current page from your shortcut set.','','none'),(10012,'PHP %version has <a href=\":bug_url\">an OPcache bug that can cause fatal errors with class autoloading</a>. This can be fixed by upgrading to PHP 8.1.6 or later. See <a href=\"http://php.net/supported-versions.php\">PHP\'s version support documentation</a> and the <a href=\":php_requirements\">Drupal PHP requirements</a> page for more information.','','none'),(10013,'Grid - Responsive','','none'),(10014,'Maximum number of columns','','none'),(10015,'Minimum cell width','','none'),(10016,'The maximum number of columns that will be displayed within the grid.','','none'),(10017,'Minimum grid cell width','','none'),(10018,'The minimum width of the grid cells. If the grid container becomes narrow, the grid cells will reflow onto the next row as needed.','','none'),(10019,'Grid gutter spacing','','none'),(10020,'The spacing between the grid cells.','','none'),(10021,'Failed to download remote thumbnail file due to \"%error\".','','none'),(10022,'CKEditor 5 plugin settings','','10.4.5'),(10023,'Enter a value like \"512\" (bytes), \"80 KB\" (kilobytes) or \"50 MB\" (megabytes) in order to restrict the allowed file size. If left empty the file sizes could be limited only by PHP\'s maximum post and file upload sizes (current limit <strong>%limit</strong>).','','10.5.6'),(10024,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>People</em> &gt; <em>@ban_link</em>','','none'),(10025,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@layout_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10026,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Content</em> &gt; <em>@node_add_link</em> &gt; <em>Book page</em>. If you have configured additional content types that can be added to books, you can substitute a different content type for <em>Book page</em>; see @configuring_topic for more information.','','none'),(10027,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>Books</em> &gt; <em>@settings_link</em>.','','none'),(10028,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@overview_link</em>.','','none'),(10029,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Development</em> &gt; <em>Configuration synchronization</em> &gt; <em>@export_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10030,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Development</em> &gt; <em>Configuration synchronization</em> &gt; <em>Export</em> &gt; <em>@single_export_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10031,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Development</em> &gt; <em>Configuration synchronization</em> &gt; <em>@import_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10032,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Development</em> &gt; <em>Configuration synchronization</em> &gt; <em>Import</em> &gt; <em>@single_import_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10033,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@contact_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10034,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>People</em> &gt; <em>@config_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10035,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>People</em> &gt; <em>@permission_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10036,'In the <em>Manage</em> administration menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>System</em> &gt; <em>@cron_link</em>. Note the <em>Last run</em> time on the page.','','10.5.6'),(10037,'What are security advisories?','','10.5.6'),(10038,'A security advisory is a public announcement about a reported security problem in the core software. Contributed projects with a shield icon and \"Stable releases for this project are covered by the security advisory policy\" on their project page are also covered by Drupal\'s security advisory policy. Security advisories are managed by the <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/drupal-security-team\">Drupal Security Team</a>.','','10.5.6'),(10039,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/drupal-security-team/security-advisory-process-and-permissions-policy\">Security advisory process and permissions policy</a>','','10.5.6'),(10040,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Content Authoring</em> &gt; <em>@overview_link</em>. The <em>Text editor</em> column in the table shows the text editor that is currently connected to each text format, if any.','','10.5.6'),(10041,'Navigate to the page for managing the entity sub-type you want to add the field to. For example, to add a field to a content type, in the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@content_types_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10042,'Navigate to the page for managing the entity type you want to add the field to. For example, to add a field to a content type, in the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@content_types_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10043,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Content Authoring</em> &gt; <em>@overview_link</em>. If you do not have the core Text Editor module installed, the menu link and page title will instead be <em>Text formats</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10044,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>Forums</em> &gt; <em>@settings_link</em>.','','none'),(10045,'Add links to the main <em>@index_link</em> page (path: <em>/forum</em>), and optionally to individual forum pages, to navigation menus on your site, so that users can find the forums.','','none'),(10046,'Starting from @index_link (path: <em>/forums</em>), navigate to the forum that currently contains the topic.','','none'),(10047,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>@help_link</em>. Verify that the search block is visible, and try a search.','','10.5.6'),(10048,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Media</em> &gt; @styles_link.','','10.5.6'),(10049,'Navigate to the page for managing the entity type you want to add the field to. For example, to add a field to a content type, in the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; @content_types_link.','','none'),(10050,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Reports</em> &gt; <em>@translation_updates_link</em>. This report is only available if the core Update Status module is installed.','','10.5.6'),(10051,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; @media_link.','','10.5.6'),(10052,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; @content_types_link.','','10.5.6'),(10053,'In the <em>Manage</em> administration menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; @structure_menu_link.','','10.5.6'),(10054,'In the <em>Manage</em> administration menu, navigate <em>Structure</em> &gt; @structure_menu_link.','','10.5.6'),(10055,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Development</em> &gt; <em>@migrate_drupal_upgrade_link</em>.','','none'),(10056,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Media</em> &gt; <em>@styles_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10057,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Search and Metadata</em> &gt; <em>@search_settings_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10058,'Source connection','','none'),(10059,'- User defined -','','none'),(10060,'Choose one of the keys from the $databases array or else select \"User defined\" and enter database credentials.','','none'),(10061,'@recent_link: Shows the content that has been most recently added, updated, or commented on.','','none'),(10062,'The email address is not made public. It will only be used if you need to be contacted about your account or for opted-in notifications.','','10.5.6'),(10063,'Add HTML class','','10.4.5'),(10064,'Migration @id did not meet the requirements. @message','','none'),(10065,'Check the <a href=\"https://www.php.net/manual/en/image.installation.php\">PHP GD installation documentation</a> if you want to add support.','','none'),(10066,'@unsupported<br>@ref','','none'),(10067,'The GD Library for PHP is enabled, but was compiled without support for functions used by the rotate and desaturate effects. It was probably compiled using the official GD libraries from the <a href=\"https://libgd.github.io/\">gdLibrary site</a> instead of the GD library bundled with PHP. You should recompile PHP --with-gd using the bundled GD library. See <a href=\"https://www.php.net/manual/book.image.php\">the PHP manual</a>.','','none'),(10068,'Supported image file format: %formats.Supported image file formats: %formats.','','10.4.7'),(10069,'Unsupported image file format: %formats.Unsupported image file formats: %formats.','','none'),(10070,'No blocks settings to update.','','none'),(10071,'<a href=\":url\">@module</a>','','none'),(10072,'<a href=\":url\">@theme</a>','','none'),(10073,'For more information read the <a href=\":url\">documentation on deprecated modules.</a>','','none'),(10074,'For more information read the <a href=\":url\">documentation on deprecated themes.</a>','','none'),(10075,'You must add the following contributed module and reload this page.You must add the following contributed modules and reload this page.','','none'),(10076,'Removed core moduleRemoved core modules','','none'),(10077,'This module is installed on your site but is no longer provided by Core.These modules are installed on your site but are no longer provided by Core.','','none'),(10078,'You must add the following contributed theme and reload this page.You must add the following contributed themes and reload this page.','','none'),(10079,'Removed core themeRemoved core themes','','none'),(10080,'This theme is installed on your site but is no longer provided by Core.These themes are installed on your site but are no longer provided by Core.','','none'),(10081,'You do not have permission to view @item_label.','','none'),(10082,'Removing media.','','none'),(10083,'Single Directory Components','','none'),(10084,'These settings apply to the %field field everywhere it is used. Some also impact the way that data is stored and cannot be changed once data has been created.','','10.5.6'),(10085,'There is @count entity with @delta or more values in this field, so the allowed number of values cannot be set to @allowed.There are @count entities with @delta or more values in this field, so the allowed number of values cannot be set to @allowed.','','none'),(10086,'The depth of the book page in the hierarchy; top level book pages have a depth of 1.','','none'),(10087,'The CKEditor 5 migration enabled the following plugins to support tags that are allowed by the %text_format text format: %enabling_message_content. The text format must be saved to make these changes active.','','none'),(10088,'The following tags were permitted by the %text_format text format\'s filter configuration, but no plugin was available that supports them. To ensure the tags remain supported by this text format, the following were added to the Source Editing plugin\'s <em>Manually editable HTML tags</em>: @unsupported_string. The text format must be saved to make these changes active.','','none'),(10089,'The CKEditor 5 migration process enabled the following plugins to support specific attributes that are allowed by the %text_format text format: %enabled_for_attributes_message_content.','','none'),(10090,'As part of migrating to CKEditor 5, it was found that the %text_format text format\'s HTML filters includes plugins that support the following tags, but not some of their attributes. To ensure these attributes remain supported, the following were added to the Source Editing plugin\'s <em>Manually editable HTML tags</em>: @missing_attributes. The text format must be saved to make these changes active.','','none'),(10091,'As part of migrating the %text_format text format to CKEditor 5, the following tag(s) were added to <em>Limit allowed HTML tags and correct faulty HTML</em>, because they are needed to provide fundamental CKEditor 5 functionality : @missing_tags. The text format must be saved to make these changes active.','','none'),(10092,'Single Directory Components is a module that aims to simplify the front-end development workflow, and improve maintainability of core and contrib themes. For more information, see the <a href=\":docs\">online documentation for the Single Directory Components module</a>.','','none'),(10093,'Single Directory Components introduces the concept of UI components to Drupal core. A component is a combination of a Twig template, stylesheets, scripts, assets, and metadata, that live in the same directory. Components represent an encapsulated and re-usable UI element.','','none'),(10094,'<a href=\":sdc-docs\">Single Directory Components</a> reduce the number of framework implementation details required to put templated HTML, CSS, and JS in a Drupal page. They also define explicit component APIs, and provide a methodology to replace a component provided upstream (in a parent theme or module).','','none'),(10095,'C#','','10.2.3'),(10096,'C++','','10.2.3'),(10097,'TypeScript','','10.2.3'),(10098,'- Description not available -','','10.5.6'),(10099,'Tooltip date format','','none'),(10100,'Tooltip custom date format','','none'),(10101,'Time difference','','none'),(10102,'Show as time difference','','none'),(10103,'Time units','','none'),(10104,'A worker for @queue queue suspended further processing of the queue.','','none'),(10105,'Updates failed for the entity type %entity_type, for %entity_ids. <a href=\":url\">Check the logs</a>.','','none'),(10106,'Config exists','Validation','none'),(10107,'The \'@name\' config does not exist.','','none'),(10108,'Required config dependency types','Validation','none'),(10109,'This @entity_type requires a @dependency_type.','','none'),(10110,'Revision of %title','','none'),(10111,'<em>Current revision</em>','','none'),(10112,'Revision of @type %title has been deleted.','','none'),(10113,'@type %title has been reverted.','','none'),(10114,'Extension exists','Validation','none'),(10115,'Module \'@name\' is not installed.','','none'),(10116,'Theme \'@name\' is not installed.','','none'),(10117,'Valid extension name','Validation','none'),(10118,'Render the referenced entity.','','none'),(10119,'Display as a time difference (e.g. \'6 months ago\')','','none'),(10120,'Use the <code>@interval</code> placeholder to represent the formatted time difference interval. E.g. <code>@interval hence</code> will be displayed as <em>2 hours 5 minutes hence</em>.','','none'),(10121,'Use the <code>@interval</code> placeholder to represent the formatted time difference interval. E.g. <code>@interval ago</code> will be displayed as <em>2 hours 5 minutes ago</em>.','','none'),(10122,'How many time units will be used in formatting the time difference. For example, if \'1\' is selected then the displayed time difference will only contain a single time unit such as \'2 years\' or \'5 minutes\' never \'2 years 3 months\' or \'5 minutes 8 seconds\'.','','none'),(10123,'How often to refresh the displayed time difference. The time difference is refreshed on client-side, by JavaScript, without reloading the page.','','none'),(10124,'Fallback configuration','','none'),(10125,'The configuration below is used as a fallback when JavaScript is not available on the page.','','none'),(10126,'Select the date format to be used for the title and displayed on mouse hover.','','none'),(10127,'- No tooltip -','','none'),(10128,'Displayed as a time difference','','none'),(10129,'Refresh every @interval','','none'),(10130,'Disabled JavaScript format: @date_format','','none'),(10131,'Tooltip date format: @date_format','','none'),(10132,'Reference type: @entity_type','','10.5.6'),(10133,'The submitted value %choice in the %name element is not allowed.','','none'),(10134,'The image toolkit \'@toolkit\' failed processing \'@operation\' for image \'@image\'. Reported error: @class - @message','','none'),(10135,'Plugin exists','Validation','none'),(10136,'The \'@plugin_id\' plugin does not exist.','','none'),(10137,'The \'@plugin_id\' plugin must implement or extend @interface.','','none'),(10138,'Optimized assets files','','none'),(10139,'Public local optimized assets files served by the webserver.','','none'),(10140,'Valid mapping keys','Validation','none'),(10141,'\'@key\' is not a supported key.','','none'),(10142,'Numerically indexed arrays are not allowed.','','none'),(10143,'Edit machine name','','10.5.6'),(10144,'The Actions UI module provides tasks that can be executed by the site such as unpublishing content, sending email messages, or blocking a user. Other modules can trigger these actions when specific system events happen; for example, when new content is posted or when a user logs in. Modules can also provide additional actions. For more information, see the <a href=\":documentation\">online documentation for the Actions UI module</a>.','','none'),(10145,'<em>Simple actions</em> do not require configuration and are listed automatically as available on the <a href=\":actions\">Actions administration page</a>.','','none'),(10146,'<em>Advanced actions</em> are user-created and have to be configured individually. Create an advanced action on the <a href=\":actions\">Actions administration page</a> by selecting an action type from the drop-down list. Then configure your action, for example by specifying the recipient of an automated email message.','','none'),(10147,'Actions UI','','none'),(10148,'Actions administration page','','none'),(10149,'The Actions UI module provides a user interface for listing and configuring actions. The core Views UI module provides a user interface for creating views, which may include bulk operations forms for executing actions. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','none'),(10150,'Online documentation for the Actions UI module','','none'),(10151,'The Announcements module displays announcements from the Drupal community. For more information, see the <a href=\":documentation\">online documentation for the Announcements module</a>.','','none'),(10152,'Accessing announcements','','none'),(10153,'Displays announcements from the Drupal community.','','10.5.6'),(10154,'View official announcements related to Drupal','','10.5.6'),(10155,'Community announcements','','10.4.5'),(10156,'Announcements Settings','','none'),(10157,'Cache announcements for max-age seconds.','','none'),(10158,'Cron interval for fetching announcements in seconds.','','none'),(10159,'Number of announcements that will be displayed.','','none'),(10160,'The feed format is not valid.','','none'),(10161,'An error occurred while parsing the announcements feed, check the logs for more information.','','none'),(10162,'No announcements available','','none'),(10163,'Allows banning visits from specific IP addresses.','','10.5.6'),(10164,'Provides an HTTP Basic authentication provider.','','10.5.6'),(10165,'Adding content blocks','','none'),(10166,'You can add content blocks, if the <em>Block Content</em> module is installed. For more information, see the <a href=\":blockcontent-help\">Block Content help page</a>.','','none'),(10167,'Allows users to configure blocks (containing content, forms, etc.) and to place them in the regions of a theme.','','10.5.6'),(10168,'The Block Content module allows you to create and manage custom <em>block types</em> and <em>content-containing blocks</em>. For more information, see the <a href=\":online-help\">online documentation for the Block Content module</a>.','','none'),(10169,'Creating and managing block types','','none'),(10170,'Users with the <em>Administer blocks</em> permission can create and edit block types with fields and display settings, from the <a href=\":types\">Block types</a> page under the Structure menu. For more information about managing fields and display settings, see the <a href=\":field-ui\">Field UI module help</a> and <a href=\":field\">Field module help</a>.','','none'),(10171,'Creating content blocks','','none'),(10172,'Users with the <em>Administer blocks</em> permission can create, edit, and delete content blocks of each defined block type, from the <a href=\":block-library\">Content blocks page</a>. After creating a block, place it in a region from the <a href=\":blocks\">Block layout page</a>, just like blocks provided by other modules.','','none'),(10173,'Added revision routes to Content block entity type.','','none'),(10174,'Allows the creation of content blocks and block types.','','10.5.6'),(10175,'Add content block','','10.5.6'),(10176,'Create and manage fields, forms, and display settings for your content blocks.','','10.5.6'),(10177,'Access the Content blocks overview page','','10.5.6'),(10178,'Get an overview of all content blocks.','','10.5.6'),(10179,'Maintain the block types of block content available and the fields that are associated with those types.','','10.5.6'),(10180,'View, edit and delete all block content regardless of permission restrictions.','','10.5.6'),(10181,'Edit content block %label','','10.5.6'),(10182,'%type_name: Create new content block','','10.5.6'),(10183,'%type_name: Edit content block','','10.5.6'),(10184,'%type_name: Delete content block','','10.5.6'),(10185,'%type_name: View content block history pages','','10.5.6'),(10186,'%type_name: Revert content block revisions','','10.5.6'),(10187,'%type_name: Delete content block revisions','','10.5.6'),(10188,'Edit %label block type','','none'),(10189,'Block type %label has been updated.','','none'),(10190,'Block type %label has been added.','','none'),(10191,'Add %type content block','','10.5.6'),(10192,'You have been redirected from %old_path. Update links, shortcuts, and bookmarks to use %new_path.','','none'),(10193,'A user was redirected from %old_path to %new_path. This redirect will be removed in a future version of Drupal. Update links, shortcuts, and bookmarks to use %new_path. See %change_record for more information.','','none'),(10194,'Content block ID','','10.5.6'),(10195,'The content block ID.','','none'),(10196,'The content block UUID.','','none'),(10197,'The content block language code.','','10.5.6'),(10198,'The time that the content block was last edited.','','10.5.6'),(10199,'content block','','10.5.6'),(10200,'content blocks','','10.4.7'),(10201,'block types','','none'),(10202,'%label is used by 1 content block on your site. You can not remove this block type until you have removed all of the %label blocks.%label is used by @count content blocks on your site. You may not remove %label until you have removed all of the %label content blocks.','','none'),(10203,'Block with uuid %uuid does not exist. <a href=\":url\">Add content block</a>.','','none'),(10204,'Input format of the content block/box content.','','none'),(10205,'Add a <a href=\":url\">content block</a>.','','10.4.5'),(10206,'Provides the CKEditor 5 rich text editor.','','10.5.6'),(10207,'Language label','','none'),(10208,'Images can only be uploaded.','','10.4.5'),(10209,'Images can only be added by URL.','','10.4.5'),(10210,'A list of programming languages that will be provided in the \"Code Block\" dropdown. Enter one value per line, in the format key|label. Example: php|PHP.','','10.4.5'),(10211,'Line @line-number does not contain a valid value. Enter a valid language key followed by a pipe symbol and a label.Lines @line-numbers do not contain a valid value. Enter a valid language key followed by a pipe symbol and a label.','','none'),(10212,'Allows importing and exporting configuration changes.','','10.5.6'),(10213,'Content Moderation allows you to apply <a href=\":workflows\">Workflows</a> to content, content blocks, and other <a href=\":field_help\" title=\"Field module help, with background on content entities\">content entities</a>, to provide more fine-grained publishing options. For example, a Basic page might have states such as Draft and Published, with allowed transitions such as Draft to Published (making the current revision \"live\"), and Published to Draft (making a new draft revision of published content).','','none'),(10214,'Provides additional publication states that can be used by other modules to moderate content.','','10.5.6'),(10215,'The Content Translation module allows you to translate content, comments, content blocks, taxonomy terms, users and other <a href=\":field_help\" title=\"Field module help, with background on content entities\">content entities</a>. Together with the modules <a href=\":language\">Language</a>, <a href=\":config-trans\">Configuration Translation</a>, and <a href=\":locale\">Interface Translation</a>, it allows you to build multilingual websites. For more information, see the <a href=\":translation-entity\">online documentation for the Content Translation module</a>.','','none'),(10216,'Defines field types for storing dates and times.','','10.5.6'),(10217,'When enabled, images can only be uploaded. When disabled, images can only be added by URL.','','10.4.5'),(10218,'The Text Editor module provides a framework for managing editors. To use it, you also need to install a text editor. This can either be the core <a href=\":ckeditor5\">CKEditor5 module</a>, which can be installed on the <a href=\":extend\">Extend page</a>, or a contributed module for any other text editor. When installing a contributed text editor module, be sure to check the installation instructions, because you will most likely need to download an external library as well as the Drupal module.','','none'),(10219,'Provides a framework to associate text editors (like WYSIWYGs) and toolbars with text formats.','','10.5.6'),(10220,'Text editors','','none'),(10221,'Ensures that the latest versions of images uploaded via a Text Editor are displayed, along with their dimensions.','','10.4.5'),(10222,'The website\'s content and configuration is managed using <em>entities</em>, which are grouped into <em>entity types</em>. <em>Content entity types</em> are the entity types for site content (such as the main site content, comments, content blocks, taxonomy terms, and user accounts). <em>Configuration entity types</em> are used to store configuration information for your site, such as individual views in the Views module, and settings for your main site content types.','','none'),(10223,'Provides the capabilities to add fields to entities.','','10.5.6'),(10224,'Once you have created a field, you can use it again in other sub-types of the same entity type. For instance, if you create a field for the article content type, you can also use it for the page content type, but you cannot use it for content blocks or taxonomy terms. If there are fields available for re-use, after clicking <em>Add field</em> from the <em>Manage fields</em> page, you will see a list of available fields for re-use. After selecting a field for re-use, you can configure the sub-type-level settings.','','none'),(10225,'Provide a pre-filled value for the editing form.','','10.4.5'),(10226,'You need to select a field type.','','none'),(10227,'You can re-use a field from other sub-types of the same entity type. Re-using a field creates another usage of the same field storage.','','none'),(10228,'Filter by field or field type','','none'),(10229,'Used in: @list','','none'),(10230,'Re-use','','none'),(10231,'Reuse @field_name','','none'),(10232,'There was a problem reusing field %label: @message','','none'),(10233,'Single valueMultiple values: @cardinality','','none'),(10234,'Create a new field','','10.5.6'),(10235,'Provides a field type for files and defines a \"managed_file\" Form API element.','','10.5.6'),(10236,'Filters text content in preparation for display.','','10.5.6'),(10237,'Lazy load images','','10.4.5'),(10238,'Instruct browsers to lazy load images if dimensions are specified. Use in conjunction with and place after the \'Track images uploaded via a Text Editor\' filter that adds image dimensions required for lazy loading. Results can be overridden by <code>&lt;img loading=&quot;eager&quot;&gt;</code>.','','10.4.5'),(10239,'Generates help pages and provides a Help block with page-level help.','','10.5.6'),(10240,'What are content blocks?','','10.5.6'),(10241,'Content blocks are blocks whose content you can edit. You can define one or more <em>block types</em>, and attach fields to each block type. Content blocks can be placed just like blocks provided by other modules.','','10.5.6'),(10242,'Overview for managing blocks','','10.5.6'),(10243,'The <em>Block</em> module allows you to place blocks in regions of your installed themes, and configure block settings. The <em>Block Content</em> module allows you to manage block types and content blocks. See the related topics listed below for specific tasks.','','10.5.6'),(10244,'Creating a content block','','none'),(10245,'Create a content block, which can later be placed on the site.','','10.5.6'),(10246,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Content</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10247,'Open the @library_link tab.','','10.5.6'),(10248,'Click <em>Add content block</em>. If you have more than one block type defined on your site, click the name of the type you want to create.','','10.5.6'),(10249,'Defining a block type','','none'),(10250,'Define a block type and its fields.','','10.5.6'),(10251,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@types_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10252,'Click  <em>Add block type</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10253,'A comment is a piece of content, typically posted by a website visitor, which provides discussion or commentary on other content like blog posts and news articles. Comments are a type of content entity, and can have fields that store text, HTML markup, and other data. Comments are attached to other content entities via Comment fields. See @content_structure_topic for more about content entities and fields.','','10.5.6'),(10254,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Region and language</em> &gt; <em>@config_translation_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10255,'Both personal and site-wide contact forms will always have <em>Subject</em> and <em>Message</em> fields. You can add additional fields for users to fill out if desired. Note that if you want to display other content on a form page, such as text or images, you can use a content block.','','10.5.6'),(10256,'Users with <em>content moderation permissions</em> can change workflow states. There are separate permissions for each transition. See Permissions &gt; <em>@content_moderation_permissions_link</em> to configure content moderation permissions.','','none'),(10257,'Find the entity that you want to moderate in either the content moderation view page, if you created one, or the appropriate administrative page for managing that type of entity (such as the administration page for content items; see @content_link).','','none'),(10258,'Users with <em>workflows permissions</em> (typically administrators) can configure workflows. See Permissions &gt; <em>@workflows_permissions_link</em> to configure workflows permissions.','','none'),(10259,'To implement your plan, in the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Workflow</em> &gt; <em>@workflows_link</em>. A list of workflows is shown, including the default workflow <em>Editorial</em> that you can adapt.','','none'),(10260,'Under <em>This workflow applies to:</em>, find the entity type that you want this workflow to apply to, such as Content revisions, Content block revisions, or Taxonomy term revisions. Click <em>Select</em>.','','none'),(10261,'Follow the steps in @user_permissions_topic to assign permissions for each transition to roles. The permissions are listed under the <em>@content_moderation_permissions_link</em> section; there is one permission for each transition in each workflow.','','none'),(10262,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Region and language</em> &gt; <em>@translation_settings_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10263,'A <em>content entity</em> (or more commonly, <em>entity</em>) is an item of content data, which can consist of text, HTML markup, images, attached files, and other data. Content entities are grouped into <em>entity types</em>, which have different purposes and are displayed in very different ways on the site. Most entity types are also divided into <em>entity sub-types</em>, which are divisions within an entity type to allow for smaller variations in how the entities are used and displayed. For example, the <em>Content item</em> entity type that stores page-level content is divided into <em>content type</em> sub-types; the <em>Content block</em> entity type has <em>block types</em>; but the <em>User</em> entity type (for user profile information) does not have sub-types.','','10.5.6'),(10264,'The core Node, Comment, Content Block, Custom Menu Links, User, File, Image, Media, Taxonomy, and Contact modules all provide content entity types.','','10.5.6'),(10265,'Depending on the core and contributed modules that you currently have installed on your site, the related topics below and other topics listed on the main help page (see @help_link) will help you with tasks related to content structure.','','10.5.6'),(10266,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Region and language</em> &gt; @languages_link.','','10.5.6'),(10267,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Region and language</em> &gt; <em>Languages</em> &gt; @detection_link.','','10.5.6'),(10268,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Region and language</em> &gt; <em>User interface translation</em> &gt; @import_link.','','10.5.6'),(10269,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Region and language</em> &gt; @translate_link.','','10.5.6'),(10270,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Region and language</em> &gt; @language_link.','','10.5.6'),(10271,'When users visit the main search page (see @search_link), they will see the configured search pages that they have access to. Each search page has a search form on it, and the page will display search results after the user enters keywords into the form and clicks the search button.','','10.5.6'),(10272,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Development</em> &gt; <em>@performance_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10273,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>System</em> &gt; <em>@information_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10274,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Region and language</em> &gt; <em>@regional_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10275,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Region and language</em> &gt; <em>@datetime_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10276,'In the <em>Error pages</em> section, enter the URL for your 403/404 pages, starting after the site home page URL. For example, if your site URL is <em>https://example.com</em> and your 404 page is <em>https://example.com/not-found</em>, you would enter <em>/not-found</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10277,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Development</em> &gt; <em>@log_settings_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10278,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>Development</em> &gt; <em>@maintenance_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10279,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>@extend_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10280,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Extend</em> &gt; <em>@uninstall_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10281,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Reports</em> &gt; <em>@status_link</em> to see a report that summarizes the health and status of your site. If there are any warnings or errors, you will need to fix them. Take note of any upcoming highly critical security releases that may impact your site.','','10.5.6'),(10282,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>@themes_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10283,'Click the <em>Uninstall</em> link to uninstall the theme. If there is not an <em>Uninstall</em> link, the theme cannot be uninstalled because it is either being used as the site default theme, being used as the <em>Administration theme</em>, or is the base theme for another installed theme.','','10.5.6'),(10284,'Taxonomy reference fields can be added to any entity, such as user accounts, content blocks, or regular content items. If you use them to classify regular content items, your site will automatically be set up with taxonomy listing pages for each term; each of these pages lists all of the content items that are classified with that term.','','10.5.6'),(10285,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>@people_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10286,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>People</em> &gt; <em>@roles_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10287,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>People</em> &gt; <em>@permissions_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10288,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>People</em> &gt; <em>@account_settings_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10289,'Views using a table display format can include a bulk operations form, which allows users with sufficient permission to select one or more items from the view and apply an administrative action to them. The bulk actions available are specific to the base data type of the view; for example, a view of content items could support bulk publishing and unpublishing actions. If you have the core Actions UI module installed, see the related topic \"Configuring actions\" for more about actions.','','10.5.6'),(10290,'If you are not already editing your view, in the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@views_link</em>. Find the view you want to edit, and click its <em>Edit</em> link.','','10.5.6'),(10291,'Add one or more existing actions as bulk operations to an existing table-style view. If you have the core Actions UI module installed, see the related topic \"Configuring actions\" for more information about actions.','','10.5.6'),(10292,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Structure</em> &gt; <em>@views_link</em>.','','10.5.6'),(10293,'Records which content users have viewed and marks it as new or updated.','','10.5.6'),(10294,'Layout Builder allows you to use layouts to customize how content, content blocks, and other <a href=\":field_help\" title=\"Field module help, with background on content entities\">content entities</a> are displayed.','','none'),(10295,'Create and edit content blocks','','none'),(10296,'Add a new content block','','none'),(10297,'Provides a field type for internal and external URLs.','','10.5.6'),(10298,'Updated default configuration to %langcode','','10.5.6'),(10299,'Allows users to translate interface text and to switch between interface languages.','','10.5.6'),(10300,'oEmbed loading settings','','none'),(10301,'oEmbed loading','','none'),(10302,'Lazy render oEmbed with native loading attribute (<em>loading=\"lazy\"</em>). This improves performance by allowing browsers to lazily load assets.','','none'),(10303,'oEmbed loading attribute','','none'),(10304,'Select the loading attribute for oEmbed. <a href=\":link\">Learn more about the loading attribute for oEmbed.</a>','','none'),(10305,'Delays loading the resource until that section of the page is visible in the browser. When in doubt, lazy loading is recommended.','','none'),(10306,'Force browsers to download a resource as soon as possible. This is the browser default for legacy reasons. Only use this option when the resource is always expected to render.','','none'),(10307,'Loading attribute: @attribute','','10.4.5'),(10308,'Content of this type can be placed in the selected menus.','','10.4.5'),(10309,'Provides a user interface for managing menus.','','10.5.6'),(10310,'Provides a framework for migrating data to Drupal.','','10.5.6'),(10311,'Provides a framework to migrate data from previous versions of Drupal into the site.','','10.5.6'),(10312,'This is not supported by Drupal.','','none'),(10313,'The recommended level for Drupal is \"READ COMMITTED\".','','10.5.6'),(10314,'For this to work correctly, all tables must have a primary key. The following table(s) do not have a primary key: @tables.','','none'),(10315,'See the <a href=\":performance_doc\">setting MySQL transaction isolation level</a> page for more information.','','10.5.6'),(10316,'Transaction isolation level','','10.5.6'),(10317,'Provides the MySQL database driver.','','10.5.6'),(10318,'READ COMMITTED','','none'),(10319,'REPEATABLE READ','','none'),(10320,'Use database default','','none'),(10321,'The recommended database transaction level for Drupal is \"READ COMMITTED\". For more information, see the <a href=\":performance_doc\">setting MySQL transaction isolation level</a> page.','','none'),(10322,'Manages the creation, configuration, and display of the main site content.','','10.5.6'),(10323,'Defines field types with select lists, checkboxes, and radio buttons to select values from fixed lists of options.','','10.5.6'),(10324,'Allows users to create custom URLs for existing paths on the site.','','10.5.6'),(10325,'Provides the PostgreSQL database driver.','','10.5.6'),(10326,'Password Compatibility','','none'),(10327,'The breakpoint group typically only needs a single breakpoint with an empty media query in order to do <em>viewport sizing.</em> Multiple breakpoints are used for changing the crop or aspect ratio of images at different viewport sizes, which is often referred to as <em>art direction.</em> A new breakpoint group should be created for each aspect ratio to avoid content shift. Once you select a breakpoint group, you can choose which breakpoints to use for the responsive image style. By default, the option <em>do not use this breakpoint</em> is selected for each breakpoint. See the <a href=\":breakpoint_help\">help page of the Breakpoint module</a> for more information.','','none'),(10328,'While you have the option to provide only one image style per breakpoint, the sizes attribute allows you to provide more options to browsers as to which image file it can display. If using sizes field and art direction, all selected image styles should use the same aspect ratio to avoid content shifting. Breakpoints are defined in the configuration files of the theme.','','none'),(10329,'The sizes attribute paired with the srcset attribute provides information on how much space these images take up within the viewport at different browser breakpoints, but the aspect ratios should remain the same across those breakpoints. Once the sizes option is selected, you can let the browser know the size of this image in relation to the site layout, using the <em>Sizes</em> field. For a hero image that always fills the entire screen, you could simply enter 100vw, which means 100% of the viewport width. For an image that fills 90% of the screen for small viewports, but only fills 40% of the screen when the viewport is larger than 40em (typically 640px), you could enter \"(min-width: 40em) 40vw, 90vw\" in the Sizes field. The last item in the comma-separated list is the smallest viewport size: other items in the comma-separated list should have a media condition paired with an image width. <em>Media conditions</em> are similar to a media query, often a min-width paired with a viewport width using em or px units: e.g. (min-width: 640px) or (min-width: 40em). This is paired with the <em>image width</em> at that viewport size using px, em or vw units. The vw unit is viewport width and is used instead of a percentage because the percentage always refers to the width of the entire viewport.','','none'),(10330,'Provides functionality to output responsive images using the HTML5 picture tag.','','10.5.6'),(10331,'Select the image style you wish to use as the style when a browser does not support responsive images.','','10.4.5'),(10332,'Lazy render images with native image loading attribute (<em>loading=\"lazy\"</em>). This improves performance by allowing browsers to lazily load images. See <a href=\"@url\">Lazy loading</a>.','','10.4.5'),(10333,'Lazy','','10.4.5'),(10334,'Eager','','10.4.5'),(10335,'Lazy loading attribute','','10.4.5'),(10336,'Select the lazy loading attribute for images. <a href=\":link\">Learn more.</a>','','10.4.5'),(10337,'In order to use REST on a website, you need to install modules that provide serialization and authentication services. You can use the Core module <a href=\":serialization\">serialization</a> for serialization and <a href=\":basic_auth\">HTTP Basic Authentication</a> for authentication, or install a contributed or custom module.','','none'),(10338,'Provides a framework for exposing REST resources.','','10.5.6'),(10339,'Allows discovery and rendering of self-contained UI components.','','10.5.6'),(10340,'All Components','','10.5.6'),(10341,'Provides a service for converting data to and from formats such as JSON and XML.','','10.5.6'),(10342,'Allows users to create sets of shortcuts within the site.','','10.5.6'),(10343,'Provides the SQLite database driver.','','10.5.6'),(10344,'Logs how many times content is viewed.','','10.5.6'),(10345,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Configuration</em> &gt; <em>System</em> &gt; <em>@statistics_settings_link</em>.','','none'),(10346,'Logs events to the web server\'s system log.','','10.5.6'),(10347,'The base URL of the site, currently: @base_url','','none'),(10348,'The base path of the site, currently: @base_path','','none'),(10349,'The URL of the site\'s front page with the language prefix, if it exists.','','none'),(10350,'Regularly review available updates and update as required to maintain a secure and current site. Always run the <a href=\":update-php\">update script</a> each time a module is updated. Install the <a href=\":update-manager\">Update Manager module</a> to update and add modules and themes.','','none'),(10351,'Obsolete extensions found: %extensions. Obsolete extensions are provided only so that they can be uninstalled cleanly. You should immediately <a href=\":uninstall_url\">uninstall these extensions</a> since they may be removed in a future release.','','none'),(10352,'PHP APCu available caching','','10.5.6'),(10353,'APCu is using over 90% of its allotted memory (@apcu_actual_size). To improve APCu performance, consider increasing this limit.','','none'),(10354,'APCu is using over 75% of its allotted memory (@apcu_actual_size). To improve APCu performance, consider increasing this limit.','','none'),(10355,'SameSite cookie attribute','','10.5.6'),(10356,'This attribute should be explicitly set to Lax, Strict or None. If set to None then the request must be made via HTTPS. See <a href=\":url\" target=\"_blank\">PHP documentation</a>','','10.4.7'),(10357,'Provides user interfaces for core systems.','','10.5.6'),(10358,'Region and language','','10.5.6'),(10359,'Menu Linkset Settings','','10.5.6'),(10360,'Enable or disable the menu linkset endpoint','','10.5.6'),(10361,'System Feature Flags','','none'),(10362,'Enable the menu linkset endpoint','','none'),(10363,'Use this utility to update your database whenever a module, theme, or the core software is updated.','','none'),(10364,'Update your files (as described in the handbook page linked above).','','none'),(10365,'The phpinfo() function is disabled. For more information, visit the <a href=\":phpinfo\">Enabling and disabling phpinfo()</a> handbook page.','','none'),(10366,'Optimized assets file system path','','10.2.3'),(10367,'A local file system path where optimized assets files will be stored. This directory must exist and be writable by Drupal. This directory must be relative to the Drupal installation directory and be accessible over the web. This must be changed in settings.php','','10.2.3'),(10368,'See the <a href=\"@docs-link\">decoupled menus documentation</a> for more information.','','none'),(10369,'<strong class=\"error\">Set up the <a href=\":file-system\">optimized assets file system path</a> to make these optimizations available.</strong>','','none'),(10370,'Specify a relative URL to display as the front page.','','10.5.6'),(10371,'The path %path requires a leading forward slash when used with the Pages setting.','','none'),(10372,'The image toolkit \'@toolkit\' can not process image \'@image\'.','','none'),(10373,'The image toolkit \'@toolkit\' failed loading image \'@image\'. Reported error: @class - @message','','none'),(10374,'The image toolkit \'@toolkit\' failed saving image \'@image\'. Reported error: @class - @message','','none'),(10375,'The raw vocabulary ID.','','none'),(10376,'Defines field types for short and long text with optional summaries.','','10.5.6'),(10377,'Allowed text formats','','10.4.5'),(10378,'The selected text format is not allowed.','','none'),(10379,'Select the allowed text formats. If no formats are selected, all available text formats will be displayed to the user.','','10.4.5'),(10380,'Text editors may override this setting.','','none'),(10381,'Provides an administration toolbar to display links provided by modules.','','10.5.6'),(10382,'Displays recently added and updated content.','','10.5.6'),(10383,'Regularly review <a href=\":updates\">available updates</a> and update as required to maintain a secure and current site. Always run the <a href=\":update-php\">update script</a> each time you update software.','','10.5.6'),(10384,'You can automatically download your missing updates using the Update manager:','','none'),(10385,'See the <a href=\":available_updates\">available updates</a> page for more information and to update your software.','','10.5.6'),(10386,'Checks for updates and allows users to manage them through a user interface.','','10.5.6'),(10387,'Permissions let you control what users can do and see on your site. You can define a specific set of permissions for each role. (See the <a href=\":role\">Roles</a> page to create a role.) Any permissions granted to the Authenticated user role will be given to any user who is logged in to your site. On the <a href=\":settings\">Role settings</a> page, you can make any role into an Administrator role for the site, meaning that role will be granted all permissions. You should be careful to ensure that only trusted users are given this access and level of control of your site.','','10.5.6'),(10388,'Allows users to register and log in, and manages user roles and permissions.','','10.5.6'),(10389,'This role will be automatically granted all permissions.','','none'),(10390,'Provides a framework to fetch information from the database and to display it in different formats.','','10.5.6'),(10391,'Use the administration theme when rendering the view page','','none'),(10392,'Yes (admin path)','','10.4.5'),(10393,'Use the administration theme when rendering this display.','','10.4.5'),(10394,'Use the administration theme','','none'),(10395,'Paths starting with \"@admin\" always use the administration theme.','','none'),(10396,'No %title option selected.','','none'),(10397,'The view %id failed to load an entity of type %entity_type at row %index for field %field','','none'),(10398,'Nightwatch A11y Testing','','none'),(10399,'Minimal profile for running A11y Nightwatch tests. Includes absolutely required modules only.','','none'),(10400,'Perform actions on the selected items in the %view_title view','','10.5.6'),(10401,'There are no content blocks available.','','10.2.3'),(10402,'Create and edit content blocks.','','10.2.3'),(10403,'Field %field_name exists but is missing a corresponding field definition and may be misconfigured.','','none'),(10404,'Enter 0 to show all comments.','','none'),(10405,'Viewing Drupal announcements','','none'),(10406,'What are Drupal announcements?','','10.5.6'),(10407,'A feed of announcements about the Drupal project and Drupal Association programs.','','10.5.6'),(10408,'The purpose of this feed is to provide a channel for outreach directly to Drupal site owners. This content must be highly relevant to site owners interests, serve the strategic goals of the project, and/or promote the sustainability of the project and the Drupal Association.','','10.5.6'),(10409,'The module sources its content from a JSON feed generated from <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/about/announcements\">here</a>. The governance policy for the content is documented <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/node/3274085\">here</a>.','','10.5.6'),(10410,'How can I see the Announcements in my site?','','10.5.6'),(10411,'If you have the toolbar module enabled, you will see a direct link to them in the toolbar. If the toolbar module is not enabled, the content can always be accessed in the <em>@actions_link</em> page.','','10.5.6'),(10412,'Who can see the Announcements?','','10.5.6'),(10413,'Users with the <em>@permissions_link</em> permission can view Drupal announcements.','','10.5.6'),(10414,'Announcement module overview','','10.5.6'),(10415,'Twig development mode','','10.4.5'),(10416,'Twig development mode settings are turned on. Go to @link to disable them.','','10.2.3'),(10417,'Markup caching disabled','','10.4.5'),(10418,'Render cache, dynamic page cache, and page cache are bypassed. Go to @link to enable them.','','10.2.3'),(10419,'Configure theme development settings','','10.5.6'),(10420,'These settings should only be enabled on development environments and never on production.','','10.4.5'),(10421,'Exposes Twig development settings.','','10.4.5'),(10422,'Provides Twig\'s <code>dump()</code> function for debugging, outputs template suggestions to HTML comments, and automatically recompile Twig templates after changes.','','10.4.5'),(10423,'Disable Twig cache','','10.4.5'),(10424,'Twig templates are not cached and are always compiled when rendered.','','10.4.5'),(10425,'Do not cache markup','','10.4.5'),(10426,'Disables render cache, dynamic page cache, and page cache.','','10.4.5'),(10427,'A user was redirected from %old_path. This redirect will be removed in a future version of Drupal. Update links, shortcuts, and bookmarks to use %new_path. See %change_record for more information.','','none'),(10428,'The Password Compatibility module provides the password checking algorithm for user accounts created with Drupal prior to version 10.1.0. For more information, see the <a href=\":phpass\">online documentation for the Password Compatibility module</a>.','','none'),(10429,'Drupal 10.1.0 and later use a different algorithm to compute the hashed password. This provides better security against brute-force attacks. The hashed passwords are different from the ones computed with Drupal versions before 10.1.0.','','none'),(10430,'When the Password Compatibility module is installed, a user can log in with a username and password created before Drupal 10.1.0. The first time these credentials are used, a new hash is computed and saved. From then on, the user will be able to log in with the same username and password whether or not this module is installed.','','none'),(10431,'Passwords created before Drupal 10.1.0 <strong>will not work</strong> unless they are used at least once while this module is installed. Make sure that you can log in before uninstalling this module.','','none'),(10432,'Make sure that you can log in before uninstalling the Password Compatibility module. For more information, see the <a href=\":phpass\">online documentation for the Password Compatibility module</a>.','','none'),(10433,'Provides the password checking algorithm for user accounts created with Drupal prior to version 10.1.0.','','10.5.6'),(10434,'Users with the \"View drupal.org announcements\" permission may click on the \"Announcements\" item in the administration toolbar, or access @link, to see all announcements relevant to the Drupal version of your site.','','none'),(10435,'Unable to send password reset email for blocked or not yet activated user %identifier.','','none'),(10436,'Unable to send password reset email for unrecognized username or email address %identifier.','','none'),(10437,'Related recipes','','none'),(10438,'Related recipes listing','','none'),(10439,'Continue to <a href=\":error_url\">the error page</a>','','10.5.6'),(10440,'The %field date is invalid. Enter a date in the correct format.','','none'),(10441,'Properties are unchanged','Validation','none'),(10442,'The \'@name\' property cannot be changed.','','none'),(10443,'The website encountered an unexpected error. Try again later.','','10.5.6'),(10444,'Field to store a true or false value.','','none'),(10445,'Field to store an email address.','','none'),(10446,'The minimum value must be less than or equal to %max.','','none'),(10447,'Security warning: Couldn\'t write .htaccess file. Create a .htaccess file in your %directory directory which contains the following lines: <pre><code>@htaccess</code></pre>','','none'),(10448,'Entry @human_index: @validation_error_message','','none'),(10449,'Symfony mailer (Experimental)','','10.4.5'),(10450,'The email address %mail is not valid. Use the format user@example.com.','','10.4.5'),(10451,'You cannot use an external URL. Enter a relative path.','','none'),(10452,'Advanced actions require configuration. Before they are available for listing and execution, they need to be created and configured. For example, for an action that sends email, you would need to configure the email address.','','none'),(10453,'Announcements Feed','','10.4.5'),(10454,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/blocks-chapter.html\">Blocks (Drupal User Guide)</a>','','10.5.6'),(10455,'The human-readable name for this block type, displayed on the <em>Block types</em> page.','','none'),(10456,'Unique machine-readable name: lowercase letters, numbers, and underscores only.','','10.4.5'),(10457,'Displays on the <em>Block types</em> page.','','none'),(10458,'Working with breakpoints in Drupal','','10.5.6'),(10459,'Allowed list attributes','','none'),(10460,'Allow blocks to be created in list items','','none'),(10461,'An error occurred while trying to preview the media. Save your work and reload this page.','','10.5.6'),(10462,'The list of languages in the CKEditor \"Language\" dropdown can present the <a href=\":united-nations-official\">@count_united_nations official languages of the UN</a>, all @count_predefined languages predefined in Drupal, or the <a href=\":admin-configure-languages\">@count_configured languages configured for this site</a>.','','none'),(10463,'The list of languages in the CKEditor \"Language\" dropdown can present the <a href=\":united-nations-official\">@count_united_nations official languages of the UN</a>, all @count_predefined languages predefined in Drupal, or the languages configured for this site.','','none'),(10464,'United Nations\' official languages (@count)','','none'),(10465,'Drupal predefined languages (@count)','','none'),(10466,'Site-configured languages (@count)','','none'),(10467,'Allow the user to create paragraphs in list items (or other block elements)','','10.4.5'),(10468,'Edit %label comment type','','none'),(10469,'The human-readable name for this comment type, displayed on the <em>Comment types</em> page.','','none'),(10470,'Displays on the <em>Comment types</em> page.','','none'),(10471,'Comments and the comment form are hidden from view.','','none'),(10472,'the form displayed on the default contact page','','10.5.6'),(10473,'Set a site-wide contact form to be the default contact form (@contact_page_link; for example, <em>/contact</em>).','','10.5.6'),(10474,'Error sending auto-reply, missing sender email address in %contact_form','','none'),(10475,'Add %label for @entity-type','','10.4.5'),(10476,'This text will be displayed on the @mode_label list page.','','10.4.5'),(10477,'Enable this @display-mode for the following @bundle-label types:','','10.4.5'),(10478,'This @display-mode will still be available for the rest of the @bundle-label types if not checked here, but it will not be enabled by default.','','10.4.5'),(10479,'<a href=\":url\">Configure the %display_mode_label %mode mode for %bundle_label</a>.','','10.4.5'),(10480,'The field %field has been deleted from the %type %source_label.','','none'),(10481,'There was a problem removing the %field from the %type %source_label.','','none'),(10482,'Field Storage','','10.5.6'),(10483,'An error occurred while saving the field: @error','','none'),(10484,'Choose a type of field','','none'),(10485,'Change field group','','none'),(10486,'Choose an option below','','none'),(10487,'The file\'s name is empty. Enter a name for the file.','','none'),(10488,'The file\'s name exceeds the 240 characters limit. Rename the file and try again.','','none'),(10489,'Sanitize filenames','','10.2.3'),(10490,'These settings only apply to new files as they are uploaded. Changes here do not affect existing file names.','','10.2.3'),(10491,'Dash (-)','','10.2.3'),(10492,'Used when replacing whitespace, replacing non-alphanumeric characters or transliterating unknown characters.','','10.2.3'),(10493,'Transliteration replaces any characters that are not alphanumeric, underscores, periods or hyphens with the replacement character. It ensures filenames only contain ASCII characters. It is recommended to keep transliteration enabled.','','10.2.3'),(10494,'Replace whitespace with the replacement character','','10.2.3'),(10495,'Replace non-alphanumeric characters with the replacement character','','10.2.3'),(10496,'Alphanumeric characters, dots <span aria-hidden=\"true\">(.)</span>, underscores <span aria-hidden=\"true\">(_)</span> and dashes <span aria-hidden=\"true\">(-)</span> are preserved.','','10.2.3'),(10497,'Replace sequences of dots, underscores and/or dashes with the replacement character','','10.2.3'),(10498,'Uploaded filename sanitization options','','none'),(10499,'Replace whitespace','','none'),(10500,'Replace non-alphanumeric characters except dot, underscore and dash','','none'),(10501,'Character to use in replacements','','none'),(10502,'File Extension','Validation','none'),(10503,'File Extension Secure','Validation','none'),(10504,'File Image Dimensions','Validation','none'),(10505,'File Is Image','Validation','none'),(10506,'File Name Length','Validation','none'),(10507,'File Size Limit','Validation','none'),(10508,'The Help module generates <a href=\":help-page\">Help topics and reference pages</a> to guide you through the use and configuration of modules, and provides a Help block with page-level help. The reference pages are a starting point for <a href=\":handbook\">Drupal.org online documentation</a> pages that contain more extensive and up-to-date information, are annotated with user-contributed comments, and serve as the definitive reference point for all Drupal documentation. For more information, see the <a href=\":help\">online documentation for the Help module</a>.','','none'),(10509,'Modules and themes can provide help topics as Twig-file-based plugins in a project sub-directory called <em>help_topics</em>; plugin meta-data is provided in YAML front matter within each Twig file. Plugin-based help topics provided by modules and themes will automatically be updated when a module or theme is updated. Use the plugins in <em>core/modules/help/help_topics</em> as a guide when writing and formatting a help topic plugin for your theme or module.','','none'),(10510,'Use help pages','','10.5.6'),(10511,'Extending and Customizing Your Site (Drupal User Guide)','','10.5.6'),(10512,'Theming Drupal','','10.5.6'),(10513,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/configuration-management/workflow-using-drush\">Configuration Management: Workflow using Drush</a>','','10.5.6'),(10514,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/understanding-data.html\">Concept: Types of Data (Drupal User Guide)</a>','','10.5.6'),(10515,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/install-dev-sites.html\">Concept: Development Sites (Drupal User Guide)</a>','','10.5.6'),(10516,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/install-dev-making.html\">Making a Development Site (Drupal User Guide)</a>','','10.5.6'),(10517,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/planning-chapter.html\">Planning your Site (Drupal User Guide)</a>','','10.5.6'),(10518,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/structure-reference-fields.html\">Concept: Reference Fields (Drupal User Guide)</a>','','10.5.6'),(10519,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/security-cron-concept.html\">Concept: Cron (Drupal User Guide)</a>','','10.5.6'),(10520,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/security-cron.html\">Configuring Cron Maintenance Tasks (Drupal User Guide)</a>','','10.5.6'),(10521,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/understanding-modules.html\">Concept: Modules (Drupal User Guide)</a>','','10.5.6'),(10522,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/extend-chapter.html\">Extending and Customizing Your Site (Drupal User Guide)</a>','','10.5.6'),(10523,'When performing maintenance, such as installing, uninstalling, or updating a module, put your site in maintenance mode.','','10.5.6'),(10524,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/prevent-chapter.html\">Preventing and Fixing Problems (Drupal User Guide)</a>','','10.5.6'),(10525,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/security-chapter.html\">Security and Maintenance (Drupal User Guide)</a>','','10.5.6'),(10526,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/menu-concept.html\">Concept: Menu (Drupal User Guide)</a>','','10.5.6'),(10527,'The following core software modules and mechanisms can improve your site\'s performance:','','10.5.6'),(10528,'The following administrative interface components are provided by the core software and its modules (some contributed modules offer additional functionality):','','10.5.6'),(10529,'The following core software modules provide web services:','','10.5.6'),(10530,'Provides a way for web services to be authenticated using HTTP Basic authentication against site user accounts.','','10.5.6'),(10531,'In the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>@extend_link</em>. Verify that the Search, Help, and Block modules are installed (or install them if they are not already installed).','','10.5.6'),(10532,'Working with help topics','','none'),(10533,'What is a help topic?','','10.5.6'),(10534,'A help topic describes a concept, or steps to accomplish a task, related to a feature provided by one or more modules or themes. If the core Search module is enabled, these topics are also searchable.','','10.5.6'),(10535,'Where are help topics listed?','','10.5.6'),(10536,'The top-level help topics are listed at @help_link. Links to other topics, including non-top-level help topics, can be found under the \"Related\" heading when viewing a topic page.','','10.5.6'),(10537,'How are help topics provided?','','10.5.6'),(10538,'Modules and themes can provide help topics as Twig-file-based plugins in a project sub-directory called <em>help_topics</em>; plugin metadata is provided in YAML front matter within each Twig file. Plugin-based help topics provided by modules and themes will automatically be updated when a module or theme is updated. Use the plugins in <em>core/modules/help/help_topics</em> as a guide when writing and formatting a help topic plugin for your theme or module.','','10.5.6'),(10539,'How are help topics translated?','','10.5.6'),(10540,'The title and body text of help topics provided by contributed modules and themes are translatable using @translate_link (provided by Interface Translation module). Topics provided by custom modules and themes are also translatable if they have been viewed at least once in a non-English language, which triggers putting their translatable text into the translation database.','','10.5.6'),(10541,'How can users search for help topics?','','10.5.6'),(10542,'To enable users to search help, including help topics, you will need to install the core Search module, configure a search page, and add a search block to the Help page or another administrative page. (A search page is provided automatically, and if you use the core Claro administrative theme, a help search block is shown on the main Help page.) Then users with search permissions, and permission to view help, will be able to search help. See the related topic, @help_search_topic, for step-by-step instructions.','','10.5.6'),(10543,'Help Topics Standards','','10.5.6'),(10544,'The Help Topics module has been moved to the Help module.','','none'),(10545,'See the <a href=\":help_page\">Help page</a> to view topics.','','none'),(10546,'Field to reference media. Allows uploading and selecting from uploaded media.','','none'),(10547,'The human-readable name for this media type, displayed on the <em>Media types</em> page.','','10.4.5'),(10548,'Displays on the <em>Media types</em> page.','','10.4.5'),(10549,'There are currently @total items selected. The maximum number of items for the field is @max. Remove @count item from the selection.There are currently @total items selected. The maximum number of items for the field is @max. Remove @count items from the selection.','','none'),(10550,'There are no allowed media types configured for this field. Contact the site administrator.','','none'),(10551,'Provides data migration from older versions of the core software into a new site.','','none'),(10552,'Provides a user interface for performing data migration from older versions of the core software into a new site.','','none'),(10553,'If the source of the data you want to migrate is a different content management system, or if the data source is a site that was built using contributed modules that the core migration modules do not support, then you will also need one or more contributed or custom modules in order to migrate your data.','','none'),(10554,'Migration @migration_id: Source ID @source_id: @message','','none'),(10555,'The publication status of the node (\"Published\" or \"Unpublished\").','','none'),(10556,'Basic Page Management (Drupal User Guide)','','10.5.6'),(10557,'Creating a Content Item (Drupal User Guide)','','10.5.6'),(10558,'Adding a Content Type (Drupal User Guide)','','10.5.6'),(10559,'Setting Up Content Structure (Drupal User Guide)','','10.5.6'),(10560,'Editing a Content Item (Drupal User Guide)','','10.5.6'),(10561,'The human-readable name for this content type, displayed on the <em>Content types</em> page.','','10.4.5'),(10562,'Displays on the <em>Content types</em> page.','','10.4.5'),(10563,'@language_name revisions for %title','','10.2.3'),(10564,'The date and time that the content was created.','','10.5.6'),(10565,'The name will be used in displayed options and edit forms. The value is the stored value, and must be numeric.','','none'),(10566,'Cannot be removed: option in use.','','none'),(10567,'Adding a new item...','','none'),(10568,'The name will be used in displayed options and edit forms.','','none'),(10569,'The value is automatically generated machine name of the name provided and will be the stored value.','','none'),(10570,'Concept: Paths, Aliases, and URLs (Drupal User Guide)','','10.5.6'),(10571,'1 orphaned sequence fixed.@count orphaned sequences fixed','','none'),(10572,'Number of items to index per run','','none'),(10573,'The maximum number of items processed per indexing run. If necessary, reduce the number of items to prevent timeouts and memory errors while indexing. Some search page types may have their own setting for this.','','none'),(10574,'Changing these settings will cause the default search index to be rebuilt to reflect the new settings. Searching will continue to work, based on the existing index, but new content will not be indexed until all existing content has been re-indexed.','','none'),(10575,'Enter some keywords.','','none'),(10576,'Make sure that the core Shortcut module is installed, and that you have a role with <em>Edit current shortcut set</em> or <em>Administer shortcuts</em> permission. Also, make sure that a toolbar module is installed (either the core Toolbar module or a contributed module replacement).','','10.5.6'),(10577,'Output Buffering','','none'),(10578,'<a href=\"https://www.php.net/manual/en/function.ob-start.php\">Output buffering</a> is not enabled. This may degrade Drupal\'s performance. You can enable output buffering by default <a href=\"https://www.php.net/manual/en/outcontrol.configuration.php#ini.output-buffering\">in your PHP settings</a>.','','none'),(10579,'Multibyte string input conversion in PHP is active and must be disabled. Check the php.ini <em>mbstring.encoding_translation</em> setting. Refer to the <a href=\"http://php.net/mbstring\">PHP mbstring documentation</a> for more information.','','none'),(10580,'Symfony mailer transport DSN','','none'),(10581,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/prevent-cache.html\">Concept: Cache (Drupal User Guide)</a>','','10.5.6'),(10582,'If you have the core Update Manager module installed, in the <em>Manage</em> administrative menu, navigate to <em>Reports</em> &gt; <em>Available updates</em> to see a report of the updates that are available for your site software. If <em>Last checked</em> is far in the past, click <em>Check manually</em> to update the report. Scan the report; if the core software or any modules or themes have security updates available, you should update them as soon as possible.','','10.5.6'),(10583,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/security-chapter.html\">Security and Maintenance (Drupal User Guide)</a>, which includes information on how to update your site\'s core software, modules, and themes.','','10.5.6'),(10584,'Log in to access this page.','','none'),(10585,'Note that the administration theme is still set to the %admin_theme theme; consequently, the theme on this page remains unchanged. All non-administrative sections of the site, however, will show the selected %selected_theme theme by default.','','none'),(10586,'The selected modules could not be uninstalled, either due to a website problem or due to the uninstall confirmation form timing out.','','none'),(10587,'Success (@status_code)','','10.4.5'),(10588,'Access denied (@status_code)','','10.4.5'),(10589,'Page not found (@status_code)','','10.4.5'),(10590,'Shows the block on pages with any matching response status. If nothing is checked, the block is shown on all pages. Other response statuses are not used.','','10.4.5'),(10591,'Request response code is not: @codesRequest response code is not one of the following: @codes','','none'),(10592,'Request response code is: @codesRequest response code is one of the following: @codes','','none'),(10593,'Creates a new transparent object and sets it for the image.','','none'),(10594,'Setting Up a Taxonomy (Drupal User Guide)','','10.5.6'),(10595,'Concept: Taxonomy (Drupal User Guide)','','10.5.6'),(10596,'An invalid vocabulary is selected. Change it in the options.','','none'),(10597,'This field stores a telephone number.','','none'),(10598,'Another user (%other_user) is already logged into the site on this computer, but you tried to use a one-time link for user %resetting_user. <a href=\":logout\">Log out</a> and try using the link again.','','none'),(10599,'You have just used your one-time login link. It is no longer necessary to use this link to log in. It is recommended that you set your password.','','none'),(10600,'You have tried to use a one-time login link that has expired. Request a new one using the form below.','','none'),(10601,'You have tried to use an account cancellation link that has expired. Request a new one using the form below.','','none'),(10602,'Filter by permission name','','10.5.6'),(10603,'<a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/docs/user_guide/en/views-chapter.html\">Creating Listings with Views (Drupal User Guide)</a>','','10.5.6'),(10604,'%current_display: The link in the %area area points to the %linked_display display which uses different settings than the %current_display display for: %unequal_options. To make sure users see the exact same result when clicking the link, check that the settings are the same.','','none'),(10605,'Numeric placeholders may not be used. Use plain placeholders (%).','','none'),(10606,'If checked, multiple values for this field will be shown in the same row. If not checked, each value in this field will create a new row. If using group by, make sure to group by \"Entity ID\" for this setting to have any effect.','','10.4.5'),(10607,'This will appear in the URL after the ? to identify this filter. Cannot be blank. Only letters, digits and the dot (\".\"), hyphen (\"-\"), underscore (\"_\"), and tilde (\"~\") characters are allowed. @reserved_identifiers are reserved words and cannot be used.','','none'),(10608,'Negated regular expression','','none'),(10609,'Hero tiny','','none'),(10610,'Hero medium','','none'),(10611,'Hero large','','none'),(10612,'Hero wide','','none'),(10613,'Scale crop 7:3 medium','','none'),(10614,'Scale crop 7:3 small','','none'),(10615,'Scale crop 7:3 tiny','','none'),(10616,'Scale crop 7:3 wide','','none'),(10617,'Sark','','10.4.5'),(10618,'Türkiye','','10.4.5'),(10619,'CKEditor 5 has to be installed and configured separately for individual text formats from the <a href=\":formats\">Text formats and editors page</a> because the filter settings for each text format can be different. For more information, see the <a href=\":text_editor\">Text Editor help page</a> and <a href=\":filter\">Filter help page</a>.','','none'),(10620,'The <code>@tag</code> tag is not yet supported by the Style plugin.','','none'),(10621,'Comment functionality can be enabled for any entity sub-type (for example, a <a href=\":content-type\">content type</a>) by adding a <em>Comments</em> field on its <em>Manage fields page</em>. Adding or removing commenting for an entity through the user interface requires the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI</a> module to be installed, even though the commenting functionality works without it. For more information on fields and entities, see the <a href=\":field\">Field module help page</a>.','','none'),(10622,'Commenting settings can be configured by editing the <em>Comments</em> field on the <em>Manage fields page</em> of an entity type if the <em>Field UI module</em> is installed. Configuration includes the label of the comments field, the number of comments to be displayed, and whether they are shown in threaded list. Commenting can be configured as: <em>Open</em> to allow new comments, <em>Closed</em> to view existing comments, but prevent new comments, or <em>Hidden</em> to hide existing comments and prevent new comments. Changing this configuration for an entity type will not change existing entity items.','','none'),(10623,'If you have the <a href=\":toolbar\">Toolbar module</a> installed, clicking the contextual links button in the toolbar (which looks like a pencil) will make all contextual links buttons on the page visible. Clicking this button again will toggle them to invisible.','','none'),(10624,'The Field module provides the infrastructure for fields; the field types, formatters, and widgets are provided by Drupal core or additional modules. Some of the modules are required; the optional modules can be installed from the <a href=\":modules\">Extend administration page</a>. Additional fields, formatters, and widgets may be provided by contributed modules, which you can find in the <a href=\":contrib\">contributed module section of Drupal.org</a>.','','none'),(10625,'Here is a list of the currently installed field, formatter, and widget modules:','','none'),(10626,'The Field UI module provides an administrative user interface (UI) for managing and displaying fields. Fields can be attached to most content entity sub-types. Different field types, widgets, and formatters are provided by the modules installed on your site, and managed by the Field module. For background information and terminology related to fields and entities, see the <a href=\":field\">Field module help page</a>. For more information about the Field UI, see the <a href=\":field_ui_docs\">online documentation for the Field UI module</a>.','','none'),(10627,'There are two reports available that list the fields defined on your site. The <a href=\":entity-list\" title=\"Entities field list report\">Entities</a> report lists all your fields, showing the field machine names, types, and the entity types or sub-types they are used on (each sub-type links to the Manage fields page). If the <a href=\":views\">Views</a> and <a href=\":views-ui\">Views UI</a> modules are installed, the <a href=\":views-list\" title=\"Used in views field list report\">Used in views</a> report lists each field that is used in a view, with a link to edit that view.','','none'),(10628,'You can create and edit text formats on the <a href=\":formats\">Text formats page</a> (if the Text Editor module is installed, this page is named Text formats and editors). One text format is included by default: Plain text (which removes all HTML tags). Additional text formats may be created during installation. You can create a text format by clicking \"<a href=\":add_format\">Add text format</a>\".','','none'),(10629,'Finished updating forum index rows.','','none'),(10630,'Processed @count entry of @total.Processed @count entries of @total.','','none'),(10631,'Installing the Forum module provides a default <em>Forums</em> menu link in the Tools menu that links to the <a href=\":forums\">Forums page</a>.','','none'),(10632,'Added primary key to the forum_index table.','','none'),(10633,'Index already exists','','none'),(10634,'Removed 1 duplicate entry from forum_indexRemoved @count duplicate entries from forum_index','','none'),(10635,'<strong>Enable additional functionality</strong> Next, visit the <a href=\":modules\">Extend page</a> and install modules that suit your specific needs. You can find additional modules at the <a href=\":download_modules\">Drupal.org modules page</a>.','','none'),(10636,'Help topics provided by modules and themes are also part of the Help module. If the core Search module is installed, these topics are searchable. For more information, see the <a href=\":online\">online documentation, Help Topic Standards</a>.','','none'),(10637,'A few of the settings for image fields are defined once when you create the field and cannot be changed later; these include the choice of public or private file storage and the number of images that can be stored in the field. The rest of the settings can be edited later; these settings include the field label, help text, allowed file extensions, image dimensions restrictions, and the subdirectory in the public or private file storage where the images will be stored. The editable settings can also have different values for different entity sub-types; for instance, if your image field is used on both Page and Article content types, you can store the files in a different subdirectory for the two content types.','','none'),(10638,'You can also configure a minimum and/or maximum dimensions for uploaded images. Images that are too small will be rejected. Images that are to large will be resized. During the resizing the <a href=\"http://wikipedia.org/wiki/Exchangeable_image_file_format\">EXIF data</a> in the image will be lost.','','none'),(10639,'Minimum image dimensions','','10.5.6'),(10640,'The Language module allows you to configure the languages used on your site, and provides information for the <a href=\":content\">Content Translation</a>, <a href=\":interface\">Interface Translation</a>, and <a href=\":configuration\">Configuration Translation</a> modules, if they are installed. For more information, see the <a href=\":doc_url\">online documentation for the Language module</a>.','','none'),(10641,'You can add languages on the <a href=\":language_list\">Languages</a> page by selecting <em>Add language</em> and choosing a language from the drop-down menu. This language is then displayed in the languages list, where it can be configured further. If the <a href=\":interface\">Interface translation module</a> is installed, and the <em>translation server</em> is set as a translation source, then the interface translation for this language is automatically downloaded as well.','','none'),(10642,'If the Block module is installed, then you can add a language switcher block on the <a href=\":blocks\">Block layout</a> page to allow users to switch between languages.','','none'),(10643,'If the Block module is installed, then the Language module allows you to set the visibility of a block based on selected languages on the <a href=\":blocks\">Block layout</a> page.','','none'),(10644,'Translation files with translated interface text are imported automatically when languages are added on the <a href=\":languages\">Languages</a> page, or when modules or themes are installed. On the <a href=\":locale-settings\">Interface translation settings</a> page, the <em>Translation source</em> can be restricted to local files only, or to include the <a href=\":server\">Drupal translation server</a>. Although modules and themes may not be fully translated in all languages, new translations become available frequently. You can specify whether and how often to check for translation file updates and whether to overwrite existing translations on the <a href=\":locale-settings\">Interface translation settings</a> page. You can also manually import a translation file on the <a href=\":import\">Interface translation import</a> page.','','none'),(10645,'Interface translations are automatically imported when a language is added, or when new modules or themes are installed. The report <a href=\":update\">Available translation updates</a> shows the status. Interface text can be customized in the <a href=\":translate\">user interface translation</a> page.','','10.5.6'),(10646,'Translation files are automatically downloaded and imported when <a title=\"Languages\" href=\":language\">languages</a> are added, or when modules or themes are installed.','','none'),(10647,'Use <em>Media</em> reference fields for most files, images, audio, videos, and remote media. Use <em>File</em> or <em>Image</em> reference fields when creating your own media types, or for legacy files and images created before installing the Media module.','','none'),(10648,'%type_name: View any media revision pages','','10.5.6'),(10649,'Revert %type_name: Revert media revisions','','10.5.6'),(10650,'Delete %type_name: Delete media revisions','','10.5.6'),(10651,'For more information, see the <a href=\":drupal-org-help\">online documentation for the Custom Menu Links module</a>. If you install the Menu UI module, it provides an interface for managing menus and menu links.','','none'),(10652,'If you have the Block module installed, then each menu that you create is rendered in a block that you enable and position on the <a href=\":blocks\">Block layout page</a>. In some <a href=\":themes\">themes</a>, the main menu and possibly the secondary menu will be output automatically; you may be able to disable this behavior on the <a href=\":themes\">theme\'s settings page</a>.','','none'),(10653,'You need to install all modules on this site that are installed on the previous site. For example, if you have used the Book module on the previous site then you must install the Book module on this site for that data to be available on this site.','','none'),(10654,'The RESTful Web Services module provides a framework for exposing REST resources on your site. It provides support for content entity types such as the main site content, comments, content blocks, taxonomy terms, and user accounts, etc. (see the <a href=\":field\">Field module help page</a> for more information about entities). REST support for content items of the Node module is installed by default, and support for other types of content entities can be enabled. Other modules may add support for other types of REST resources. For more information, see the <a href=\":rest\">online documentation for the RESTful Web Services module</a>.','','none'),(10655,'Modules providing search page plugins generally ensure that content-related actions on your site (creating, editing, or deleting content and comments) automatically cause affected content items to be marked for indexing or reindexing at the next cron run. When content is marked for reindexing, the previous content remains in the index until cron runs, at which time it is replaced by the new content. However, there are some actions related to the structure of your site that do not cause affected content to be marked for reindexing. Examples of structure-related actions that affect content include deleting or editing taxonomy terms, installing or uninstalling modules that add text to content (such as Taxonomy, Comment, and field-providing modules), and modifying the fields or display parameters of your content types. If you take one of these actions and you want to ensure that the search index is updated to reflect your changed site structure, you can mark all content for reindexing by clicking the \"Re-index site\" button on the <a href=\":search-settings\">Search pages page</a>. If you have a lot of content on your site, it may take several cron runs for the content to be reindexed.','','none'),(10656,'The Search module includes a block, which can be enabled and configured on the <a href=\":blocks\">Block layout page</a>, if you have the Block module installed; the default block title is Search, and it is the Search form block in the Forms category, if you wish to add another instance. The block is available to users with the <a href=\":search_permission\">Use search</a> permission, and it performs a search using the configured default search page.','','none'),(10657,'The current date in \'short\' format. (%date)','','none'),(10658,'The current date in \'medium\' format. (%date)','','none'),(10659,'The current date in \'long\' format. (%date)','','none'),(10660,'The current date in a custom format. See <a href=\"https://www.php.net/manual/datetime.format.php#refsect1-datetime.format-parameters\">the PHP documentation</a> for details.','','none'),(10661,'The current date in \'time-since\' format. (%date)','','none'),(10662,'The current date in UNIX timestamp format (%date)','','none'),(10663,'The Update Manager module periodically checks for new versions of your site\'s software (including contributed modules and themes), and alerts administrators to available updates. The Update Manager system is also used by some other modules to manage updates and downloads; for example, the Interface Translation module uses the Update Manager to download translations from the localization server. Note that whenever the Update Manager system is used, anonymous usage statistics are sent to Drupal.org. If desired, you may uninstall the Update Manager module from the <a href=\":modules\">Extend page</a>; if you do so, functionality that depends on the Update Manager system will not work. For more information, see the <a href=\":update\">online documentation for the Update Manager module</a>.','','none'),(10664,'The installed version of at least one of your modules or themes has been revoked and is no longer available for download. Upgrading or uninstalling is strongly recommended!','','none'),(10665,'The installed version of at least one of your modules or themes is no longer supported. Upgrading or uninstalling is strongly recommended. See the project homepage for more details.','','10.4.5'),(10666,'<em>Roles</em> are used to group and classify users; each user can be assigned one or more roles. Typically there are two pre-defined roles: <em>Anonymous user</em> (users that are not logged in), and <em>Authenticated user</em> (users that are registered and logged in). Depending on how your site was set up, an <em>Administrator</em> role may also be available: users with this role will automatically be assigned any new permissions whenever a module is installed. You can create additional roles on the <a href=\":roles\">Roles administration page</a>.','','none'),(10667,'The <a href=\":accounts\">Account settings page</a> allows you to manage settings for the displayed name of the Anonymous user role, personal contact forms, user registration settings, and account cancellation settings. On this page you can also manage settings for account personalization, and adapt the text for the email messages that users receive when they register or request a password recovery. You may also set which role is automatically assigned new permissions whenever a module is installed (the Administrator role).','','none'),(10668,'In order to create and modify your own views using the administration and configuration user interface, you will need to install either the Views UI module in core or a contributed module that provides a user interface for Views. See the <a href=\":views-ui\">Views UI module help page</a> for more information.','','none'),(10669,'The following @element_type(s) can optionally be supported by enabled plugins and should not be added to the Source Editing \"Manually editable HTML tags\" field: %overlapping_tags.','','none'),(10670,'Text field that does not support markup.','','none'),(10671,'Field to store number. I.e. id, price, or quantity.','','none'),(10672,'Field to reference other content.','','none'),(10673,'Field to store date and time values.','','none'),(10674,'Field to upload any type of files.','','none'),(10675,'Selection list','','none'),(10676,'Field to select from predefined options.','','none'),(10677,'Text field with markup support and optional editor.','','none'),(10678,'Checked version of %project.','','none'),(10679,'Ideal for exact counts and measures (prices, temperatures, distances, volumes, etc.)','','none'),(10680,'Stores a number in the database in a fixed decimal format','','none'),(10681,'For example, 12.34 km or € when used for further detailed calculations (such as summing many of these)','','none'),(10682,'In most instances, it is best to use Number (decimal) instead, as decimal numbers stored as floats may contain errors in precision','','none'),(10683,'This type of field offers faster processing and more compact storage, but the differences are typically negligible on modern sites','','none'),(10684,'For example, 123.4 km when used in imprecise contexts such as a walking trail distance','','none'),(10685,'Number without decimals','','none'),(10686,'For example, 123','','none'),(10687,'Ideal for titles and names','','none'),(10688,'Efficient storage for short text','','none'),(10689,'Requires specifying a maximum length','','none'),(10690,'Good for fields with known or predictable length','','none'),(10691,'Ideal for longer texts, like body or description','','none'),(10692,'Supports long text without specifying a maximum length','','none'),(10693,'May use more storage and be slower for searching and sorting','','none'),(10694,'Ideal for using date and time calculations or comparisons','','none'),(10695,'Date and time stored in the form of seconds since January 1, 1970 (UTC)','','none'),(10696,'Compact and efficient for storage, sorting and calculations','','none'),(10697,'Ideal when date and time needs to be input by users, like event dates and times','','none'),(10698,'Date or date and time stored in a readable string format','','none'),(10699,'Easy to read and understand for humans','','none'),(10700,'Ideal for storing durations that consist of start and end dates (and times)','','none'),(10701,'Choose between setting both date and time, or date only, for each duration','','none'),(10702,'The system automatically validates that the end date (and time) is later than the start, and both fields are completed','','none'),(10703,'For uploading files','','none'),(10704,'Can be configured with options such as allowed file extensions and maximum upload size','','none'),(10705,'For uploading images','','none'),(10706,'Allows a user to upload an image with configurable extensions, image dimensions, upload size','','none'),(10707,'Can be configured with options such as allowed file extensions, maximum upload size and image dimensions minimums/maximums','','none'),(10708,'Values stored are floating-point numbers','','none'),(10709,'For example, \'Fraction\': 0 => 0, .25 => 1/4, .75 => 3/4, 1 => 1','','none'),(10710,'Values stored are numbers without decimals','','none'),(10711,'For example, \'Lifetime in days\': 1 => 1 day, 7 => 1 week, 31 => 1 month','','none'),(10712,'Values stored are text values','','none'),(10713,'For example, \'US States\': IL => Illinois, IA => Iowa, IN => Indiana','','none'),(10714,'Ideal for titles and names that need to support markup such as bold, italics or links','','none'),(10715,'Good for fields with known or predictable lengths','','none'),(10716,'Ideal for longer texts, like body or description without a summary','','none'),(10717,'Ideal for longer texts, like body or description with a summary','','none'),(10718,'Allows specifying a summary for the text','','none'),(10719,'Logout','','10.5.6'),(10720,'Missing','','none'),(10721,'Render cache','','none'),(10722,'Reinstall modules','','none'),(10723,'Session viewer','','none'),(10724,'Devel','','none'),(10725,'All types','','10.5.6'),(10726,'Rebuild menu','','none'),(10727,'Execute PHP Code','','none'),(10728,'Theme registry','','none'),(10729,'Devel settings','','none'),(10730,'Flush all caches','','10.5.6'),(10731,'Menu depth','','none'),(10732,'Add custom block','','10.2.3'),(10733,'Install new module','','10.2.3'),(10734,'Install new theme','','10.2.3'),(10735,'Entity info','','none'),(10736,'Rebuild theme registry','','10.5.6'),(10737,'Local Tasks','','none'),(10738,'All caches cleared.','','10.5.6'),(10739,'Custom block library','','10.2.3'),(10740,'Admin Toolbar','','10.5.6'),(10741,'Admin Toolbar Tools','','10.5.6'),(10742,'Static caches','','none'),(10743,'CSS and JavaScript cache cleared.','','none'),(10744,'Admin Toolbar Extra Tools','','none'),(10745,'Config editor','','none'),(10746,'State editor','','none'),(10747,'Uninstall module','','10.5.6'),(10748,'Element Info','','none'),(10749,'Webprofiler settings','','none'),(10750,'Flush plugins cache','','10.5.6'),(10751,'Flush static cache','','10.5.6'),(10752,'Flush routing and links cache','','10.5.6'),(10753,'Flush render cache','','10.5.6'),(10754,'Plugins cache cleared.','','none'),(10755,'Static cache cleared.','','none'),(10756,'Routing and links cache cleared.','','none'),(10757,'Render cache cleared.','','none'),(10758,'Devel Toolbar Settings','','none'),(10759,'Admin Toolbar Links Access Filter','','none'),(10760,'Provides a workaround for the common problem that users with \'Use the administration pages and help\' permission see menu links they don\'t have access permission for. Once the issue <a href=\'https://www.drupal.org/node/296693\'>https://www.drupal.org/node/296693</a> be solved, this module will be deprecated.','','10.2.3'),(10761,'Flush views cache','','10.5.6'),(10762,'Views cache cleared.','','none'),(10763,'The Admin Toolbar module enhances the <a href=\":toolbar\">Toolbar</a> module by providing fast access to all the administrative links at the top of your site. Admin Toolbar remains a very \"lightweight\" module by closely integrating with all Toolbar functionality. It can be used in conjunction with all the sub modules included on Admin Toolbar, for quick access to system commands such as Flush all caches, <a href=\":automated_cron\">Run cron</a>, Run Updates, etc.','','none'),(10764,'The Admin Toolbar greatly improves the user experience for those who regularly interact with the site Toolbar by providing fast, full access to all links in the site Toolbar without having to click to get there.','','none'),(10765,'The Admin Toolbar Links Access Filter module provides a workaround for the common problem that users with <em>Use the administration pages and help</em> permission see menu links they done not have access permission for.','','none'),(10766,'To use Admin Toolbar Extra Tools just install it like any other module. There is no other configuration required.','','none'),(10767,'Flush twig cache','','10.5.6'),(10768,'Twig cache cleared.','','none'),(10769,'Provides an improved drop-down menu interface to the site Toolbar.','','10.5.6'),(10770,'Admin Toolbar Search','','none'),(10771,'The Admin Toolbar Extra Tools module comes packaged with the <a href=\":admin-toolbar\">Admin Toolbar</a> module and adds functionality to it. The additional functionality is accessed through extra links on the main administration Toolbar. Some links to Admin Toolbar Extra Tools administration pages are located at the bottom of this page.</a>','','none'),(10772,'@entity_type > @bundle','','none'),(10773,'All menus','','none'),(10774,'Use Admin Toolbar search','','none'),(10775,'Theme Rebuild','','none'),(10776,'The Admin Toolbar Search module add a search option to the toolbar for site administrative tasks.','','none'),(10777,'Admin Toolbar quick search','','none'),(10778,'Provides search of Admin Toolbar items.','','10.5.6'),(10779,'Adds menu links like Flush cache, Run cron, Run updates, and Logout under Drupal icon.','','10.5.6'),(10780,'Flush CSS and JavaScript','','10.5.6'),(10781,'Configure the Admin Toolbar Tools module.','','10.5.6'),(10782,'Admin Toolbar Tools settings','','none'),(10783,'Number of bundles per entity type to display','','none'),(10784,'Maximum number of bundle sub-menus to display','','none'),(10785,'Loading a large number of items can cause performance issues.','','none'),(10786,'Enable or disable hoverintent functionality','','none'),(10787,'Enable/Disable the hoverintent functionality','','none'),(10788,'Check it if you want to enable the hoverintent feature.','','none'),(10789,'Menus > @menu_label','','none'),(10790,'Configure the Admin Toolbar module.','','10.5.6'),(10791,'Admin Toolbar settings','','none'),(10792,'Configure the Admin Toolbar Search module.','','none'),(10793,'Admin toolbar search settings','','none'),(10794,'Admin Toolbar Search settings','','none'),(10795,'Display the search input as a menu item.','','none'),(10796,'Depth of displayed menu','','none'),(10797,'Maximal depth of displayed menu.','','none'),(10798,'Menus > @menu_label > Add link','','none'),(10799,'Menus > @menu_label > Delete','','none'),(10800,'Menus > @menu_label > Devel','','none'),(10801,'How the search input will be displayed','','none'),(10802,'If set, instead of displaying a text input field, it displays a menu item in the toolbar so the user has to click on it to toggle the search input.','','none'),(10803,'Show local tasks in toolbar','','none'),(10804,'Enable/Disable local tasks display','','none'),(10805,'Local tasks such as node edit and delete.','','none'),(10806,'Theme registry rebuilt.','','none'),(10807,'cron','','none'),(10808,'Schedule','','10.5.6'),(10809,'Frequency','','none'),(10810,'Backups','','none'),(10811,'Backup','','10.5.6'),(10812,'Destination','','10.4.5'),(10813,'Sources','','none'),(10814,'Exclude these files','','none'),(10815,'Keep','','none'),(10816,'Schedules','','10.5.6'),(10817,'Add schedule','','none'),(10818,'Next cron run','','none'),(10819,'Directory Path','','none'),(10820,'Restore','','10.5.6'),(10821,'Last Run','','none'),(10822,'Profile Name','','none'),(10823,'Source Type','','none'),(10824,'Backup and Migrate','','10.5.6'),(10825,'Saved Backups','','10.5.6'),(10826,'Compression','','none'),(10827,'Upload a Backup File','','none'),(10828,'Add Schedule','','none'),(10829,'Edit source','','10.4.7'),(10830,'Edit schedule','','none'),(10831,'MySQL Database','','none'),(10832,'Default Database','','none'),(10833,'Backup Source','','10.5.6'),(10834,'Destinations','','none'),(10835,'destination','','none'),(10836,'Take site offline','','none'),(10837,'Take the site offline during backup and show a maintenance message. Site will be taken back online once the backup is complete.','','none'),(10838,'schedules','','none'),(10839,'Schedule Name','','none'),(10840,'Settings Profile','','10.5.6'),(10841,'restore feature','','none'),(10842,'settings profiles','','none'),(10843,'Restore Tab','','none'),(10844,'manual backups','','none'),(10845,'Quick Backup','','10.5.6'),(10846,'Backup now','','10.5.6'),(10847,'Backup Destination','','10.5.6'),(10848,'Advanced Backup','','10.5.6'),(10849,'Restore now','','none'),(10850,'Delete schedule','','none'),(10851,'Edit destination','','none'),(10852,'Run on cron','','none'),(10853,'Perform a backup','','10.5.6'),(10854,'Access backup files','','10.5.6'),(10855,'Access and download the previously created backup files.','','10.5.6'),(10856,'Restore the site','','10.5.6'),(10857,'Restore the site\'s database from a backup file.','','10.5.6'),(10858,'Edit Backup and Migrate profiles, schedules and destinations.','','10.5.6'),(10859,'Type: @type','','none'),(10860,'Delete source','','none'),(10861,'Run every','','none'),(10862,'in @time','','none'),(10863,'Daily Schedule','','10.2.3'),(10864,'Administer Backup and Migrate','','10.5.6'),(10865,'Are you sure you want to delete this backup?','','none'),(10866,'Are you sure you want to restore this backup?','','none'),(10867,'Settings Profiles','','none'),(10868,'Public Files Directory','','10.2.3'),(10869,'Private Files Directory','','10.2.3'),(10870,'File Directory','','none'),(10871,'content @type: deleted @label.','','none'),(10872,'%title is required.','','none'),(10873,'documentation page','','none'),(10874,'Add Settings Profile','','none'),(10875,'Add Backup Destination','','none'),(10876,'Add Backup Source','','none'),(10877,'Back up any of the available sources.','','10.5.6'),(10878,'Add settings profile','','none'),(10879,'Edit settings profile','','none'),(10880,'Delete settings profile','','none'),(10881,'Add destination','','none'),(10882,'Delete destination','','none'),(10883,'Downlod Backup','','none'),(10884,'Backup sources','','none'),(10885,'Append Timestamp','','none'),(10886,'Timestamp Format','','none'),(10887,'Backups to keep','','none'),(10888,'Destination Type','','none'),(10889,'Add one item per line.','','none'),(10890,'Backups in @destination_name','','none'),(10891,'There are no backups in this destination.','','none'),(10892,'The schedule settings have been updated.','','none'),(10893,'Last 1 backupLast @count backups','','none'),(10894,'Scheduled backup \'%name\' failed: @err','','none'),(10895,'Restore To','','none'),(10896,'Deleted @label.','','none'),(10897,'Period number','','none'),(10898,'Period type','','none'),(10899,'Created %label.','','none'),(10900,'Saved %label.','','none'),(10901,'Server File Directory','','none'),(10902,'Back up to a directory on your web server.','','none'),(10903,'Public Files','','none'),(10904,'Back up the Drupal public files.','','none'),(10905,'Back up a MySQL compatible database.','','none'),(10906,'Default Drupal Database','','10.2.3'),(10907,'Backup Complete.','','none'),(10908,'Restore Complete.','','none'),(10909,'Uninstalling Backup and Migrate will delete any custom Backup and Migrate configuration. <strong>Previously created backups will not be deleted.</strong>','','none'),(10910,'Full Site Backup Source','','none'),(10911,'%title must be at least %count characters.','','none'),(10912,'%title must be at no more than %count characters.','','none'),(10913,'%title contains invalid characters.','','none'),(10914,'Exclude these tables entirely','','none'),(10915,'Exclude data from these tables','','none'),(10916,'Exclude Files from %source','','none'),(10917,'%title must contain only letters, numbers, dashes (-) and underscores (_).','','none'),(10918,'Most recent backups in %dest','','none'),(10919,'View all backups in %dest','','none'),(10920,'Number to keep','','none'),(10921,'Your @scheme stream is not configured.','','none'),(10922,'<p><strong>Backup and Migrate</strong> makes the task of backing up your Drupal database and migrating data from one Drupal install to another easier. It provides a function to backup the entire database to file or download, and to restore from a previous backup. You can also schedule the backup operation. Compression of backup files is also supported. The database backup files created with this module can be imported into this or any other Drupal installation with the @restore, or you can use a database tool such as @phpmyadmin or the mysql command line command. Access for backup migrate is controlled by module permissions, contact the administrator or any privileged user to get access to full module features.</p>','','none'),(10923,'phpMyAdmin','','none'),(10924,'<h3>@title</h3><p>Use this form to run simple @manual of your database. Visit the @documentation for more help using this module.</p>','','none'),(10925,'Backup Tab - Quick Backup','','none'),(10926,'Backup Tab - Advanced Backup','','none'),(10927,'Shedules Tab','','none'),(10928,'Settings Tab - Settings Profiles','','none'),(10929,'quick backups','','none'),(10930,'Settings Tab - Destinations','','none'),(10931,'Settings Tab - Sources','','none'),(10932,'Create or import backups of your project database or files','','10.5.6'),(10933,'Backup and Migrate Settings','','none'),(10934,'Encrypt File','','none'),(10935,'Decrypt file','','none'),(10936,'Password for encrypting / decrypting the file','','none'),(10937,'Encryption Password','','none'),(10938,'Decryption Password','','none'),(10939,'This will permanently remove %backupId from %destination_name.','','none'),(10940,'Backup Migrate MySQL Settings','','none'),(10941,'It is recommended to not use the \"Entire site\" backup as it has a tendency of failing on anything but the tiniest of sites. Hopefully this will be fixed in a future release.','','10.5.6'),(10942,'Entire Site (do not use)','','10.2.3'),(10943,'Attribute','','10.2.3'),(10944,'Attributes','','none'),(10945,'Class','','10.2.3'),(10946,'Operation','','none'),(10947,'Maxlength','','10.4.5'),(10948,'Are you sure?','','none'),(10949,'Confirm Deletion','','none'),(10950,'Global Settings','','none'),(10951,'Run','','none'),(10952,'Uppercase','','10.4.5'),(10953,'CSS class(es)','','10.4.5'),(10954,'Block Class','','10.2.3'),(10955,'Usage','','none'),(10956,'Global Configuration','','none'),(10957,'Bulk Operations','','10.2.3'),(10958,'Lowercase','','10.4.5'),(10959,'Categories','','10.5.6'),(10960,'Block field','','none'),(10961,'Available blocks','','none'),(10962,'Data type','','none'),(10963,'Data Type','','none'),(10964,'Order','','none'),(10965,'Information','','10.4.7'),(10966,'Hide','','none'),(10967,'Add required context','','none'),(10968,'Finish','','none'),(10969,'Add Relationship','','none'),(10970,'Context type','','none'),(10971,'@description','','none'),(10972,'Chaos tool suite','','10.5.6'),(10973,'Add a relationship','','none'),(10974,'Pager offset','','none'),(10975,'@entity','','none'),(10976,'Hide fields','','none'),(10977,'Context value','','none'),(10978,'Block display variant','','none'),(10979,'Add new context','','none'),(10980,'Plugin Id','','none'),(10981,'Configure Required Context','','none'),(10982,'Provides a number of utility and helper APIs for Drupal developers and site builders.','','10.5.6'),(10983,'Are you sure you want to delete the @label condition?','','none'),(10984,'That machine name is in use by another context definition.','','none'),(10985,'No required conditions have been configured.','','none'),(10986,'No required contexts have been configured.','','none'),(10987,'<strong>Label:</strong> @label<br /> <strong>Type:</strong> @type','','none'),(10988,'Are you sure you want to delete the @label context?','','none'),(10989,'Context ID','','none'),(10990,'No contexts or relationships have been added.','','none'),(10991,'Configure Relationship','','none'),(10992,'Context label','','none'),(10993,'Are you sure you want to delete the @label relationship?','','none'),(10994,'Add Condition','','none'),(10995,'A set of improvements to the core Views code that allows for greater control over Blocks.','','10.5.6'),(10996,'Reorder fields','','none'),(10997,'Disable filters','','none'),(10998,'Configure sorts','','none'),(10999,'Inherit from view','','none'),(11000,'@label bundle','','none'),(11001,'Provides improvements to blocks that will one day be added to Drupal core.','','10.5.6'),(11002,'Chaos tool suite (Experimental)','','10.5.6'),(11003,'Entity field block','','none'),(11004,'Description of the context','','none'),(11005,'Set a context value','','none'),(11006,'No relationships have been added.','','none'),(11007,'Chaos Tools','','none'),(11008,'Chaos Tools Blocks','','none'),(11009,'The @entity-type %label has been updated.','','none'),(11010,'The @entity-type %label has been added.','','none'),(11011,'Updated @entity-type %label.','','none'),(11012,'Added @entity-type %label.','','none'),(11013,'For the moment, it includes the following tools:','','none'),(11014,'General settings','','10.4.7'),(11015,'a','','10.2.3'),(11016,'CSS classes','','10.5.6'),(11017,'Open in new window','','10.5.6'),(11018,'Advanced Link','','none'),(11019,'Populates the title attribute of the link, usually shown as a small tooltip on hover.','','none'),(11020,'Add title, target etc. attributes to Text Editor\'s link dialog if the text format allows them.','','10.5.6'),(11021,'Enabled attributes','','10.4.5'),(11022,'Allows linking to this content using a <a href=\"https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fragment_identifier\" target=\"_blank\">URL fragment</a>. Must be unique.','','none'),(11023,'Open in new window/tab','','none'),(11024,'Provide an alternative text value/label for assistive technologies.','','none'),(11025,'An error occurred while processing @operation with arguments : @args','','none'),(11026,'Display the referenced entities rendered by entity_view().','','none'),(11027,'View handler settings','','none'),(11028,'Target UUID','','none'),(11029,'Recursive rendering detected when rendering entity @entity_type @entity_id. Aborting rendering.','','none'),(11030,'Reference revisions','','none'),(11031,'Entity Reference Revisions','','10.4.5'),(11032,'Adds a Entity Reference field type with revision support.','','10.5.6'),(11033,'Entity Reference Revisions inline fields','','none'),(11034,'Entity Reference Revisions list','','none'),(11035,'Entity reference revisions','','10.4.7'),(11036,'Entity Revision','','none'),(11037,'All kind of entities with revision information, e.g. nodes, comments or users.','','none'),(11038,'@label revision ID','','10.5.6'),(11039,'The referenced entity revision','','none'),(11040,'Selects referenceable entities for an entity reference revisions field.','','none'),(11041,'The Entity Reference Revisions module allows you to create fields that contain links to other entities (such as content items, taxonomy terms, etc.) within the site. This allows you, for example, to include a link to a user within a content item. For more information, see <a href=\":er_do\">the online documentation for the Entity Reference Revisions module</a> and the <a href=\":field_help\">Field module help page</a>.','','none'),(11042,'Field Diff for Paragraphs','','none'),(11043,'This batch encountered an error.','','none'),(11044,'An entity field containing an entity reference to a specific revision.','','none'),(11045,'Processed @current of @total entity types.','','none'),(11046,'Delete orphaned composite entities','','10.5.6'),(11047,'Delete revisions of entities that are no longer used in Entity Reference Revisions fields.','','10.5.6'),(11048,'Delete orphan revisions','','10.5.6'),(11049,'Removing orphaned entities.','','none'),(11050,'@label: Deleted @revision_count revisions (@entity_count entities) in @interval.','','none'),(11051,'The submission of the current form can cause the deletion of entities that are still used, backup all data first.','','none'),(11052,'Delete orphaned composite revisions','','none'),(11053,'Choose the entity type to clear','','none'),(11054,'px','','10.4.5'),(11055,'Top','','10.4.5'),(11056,'days','','10.4.7'),(11057,'Text color','','10.4.5'),(11058,'ms','','10.4.5'),(11059,'Accept','','none'),(11060,'User ID.','','none'),(11061,'Installation','','none'),(11062,'No, thanks','','none'),(11063,'More info','','none'),(11064,'Domains list','','10.4.5'),(11065,'Cookie settings','','10.4.5'),(11066,'Save preferences','','none'),(11067,'Specify pages by using their paths. Enter one path per line. The \'*\' character is a wildcard. Example paths are %blog for the blog page and %blog-wildcard for every personal blog. %front is the front page.','','10.4.5'),(11068,'How it works','','none'),(11069,'Exclude paths','','10.4.5'),(11070,'Cookie lifetime','','10.4.5'),(11071,'Cookie name','','10.4.5'),(11072,'Privacy settings','','none'),(11073,'<h2>Thank you for accepting cookies</h2><p>You can now hide this message or find out more about cookies.</p>','','none'),(11074,'EU Cookie Compliance','','10.5.6'),(11075,'This module aims at making the website compliant with the new EU cookie regulation','','10.5.6'),(11076,'Consent by clicking','','10.4.5'),(11077,'Privacy policy link','','10.4.5'),(11078,'px or %','','10.4.5'),(11079,'Banner height','','10.4.5'),(11080,'Agree button message','','none'),(11081,'%name must be a HEX value (without leading #) or empty.','','none'),(11082,'Make your website compliant with the EU Directive on Privacy and Electronic Communications.','','10.5.6'),(11083,'EU Cookie Compliance Settings','','none'),(11084,'Privacy policy','','10.4.5'),(11085,'Consent by scrolling','','10.4.5'),(11086,'For developers','','none'),(11087,'Agree button label','','10.4.5'),(11088,'Disagree button label','','10.4.5'),(11089,'More info button label','','10.4.5'),(11090,'Hide button label','','10.4.5'),(11091,'Use position:fixed for the banner when displayed at the top.','','10.4.5'),(11092,'Scrolling makes the visitors to accept the cookie policy. In some countries, like Italy, it is permitted.','','10.4.5'),(11093,'Sets the domain of the cookie to a specific url. Used when you need consistency across domains. This is language independent. Note: Make sure you actually enter a domain that the browser can make use of. For example if your site is accessible at both www.domain.com and domain.com, you will not be able to hide the banner at domain.com if your value for this field is www.domain.com.','','10.4.5'),(11094,'Let screen readers see the banner before other links on the page.','','10.4.5'),(11095,'Enable this if you want to place the banner as the first HTML element on the page. This will make it possible for screen readers to close the banner without tabbing through all links on the page.','','10.4.5'),(11096,'Unzip the files to the \"sites/all/modules\" OR \"modules\" directory and enable the module.','','none'),(11097,'NOTICE: The module does not audit your cookies nor does it prevent cookies from being set.','','none'),(11098,'If you want to conditionally set cookies in your module, there is a javascript function provided that returns TRUE if the current user has given his consent:','','none'),(11099,'Mobile breakpoint','','10.4.5'),(11100,'Use a different message for mobile phones','','none'),(11101,'The mobile message will be used when the window width is below or equal to the given value.','','10.4.5'),(11102,'Enter an integer value for a desired height in pixels or leave empty for automatically adjusted height.','','10.4.5'),(11103,'Specify domains with protocol (e.g., http or https). Enter one domain per line.','','10.4.5'),(11104,'Invalid protocol specified for the %name (valid protocols: %protocols).','','none'),(11105,'Invalid %name (:message).','','none'),(11106,'Invalid URL in %name field (:message).','','none'),(11107,'If you want to show the message in EU countries only, install the Smart IP module: http://drupal.org/project/smart_ip and enable the option on the admin page.','','none'),(11108,'Include minimal CSS, I want to style the overlay in the theme CSS','','none'),(11109,'Let screen readers see the banner before other links on the page','','none'),(11110,'If desired, give the administer EU Cookie Compliance banner permissions that allow users of certain roles access the administration page. You can do so on the admin/user/permissions page.','','none'),(11111,'there is also a \'display eu cookie compliance banner\' permission that helps you show the banner to the roles you desire.','','none'),(11112,'Administer EU Cookie Compliance banner','','10.5.6'),(11113,'Display EU Cookie Compliance banner','','10.5.6'),(11114,'Enable banner','','10.4.5'),(11115,'Place the banner at the top of the website','','none'),(11116,'Cookie information banner message','','10.4.5'),(11117,'Cookie information banner message - mobile','','10.4.5'),(11118,'Thank you banner message','','none'),(11119,'Banner height in pixels','','none'),(11120,'Banner width in pixels or a percentage value','','10.4.5'),(11121,'Banner sliding animation time in milliseconds','','none'),(11122,'Add/Remove banner on specified domains','','none'),(11123,'Thank you banner','','10.4.5'),(11124,'Include minimal CSS, I want to style the banner in the theme CSS.','','10.4.5'),(11125,'This may be useful if you want the banner to share the button style of your theme. Note that you will have to configure values like the banner width, text color and background color in your CSS file.','','10.4.5'),(11126,'Change the text color of the banner. Provide HEX value without the #.','','10.4.5'),(11127,'Change the background color of the banner. Provide HEX value without the #.','','10.4.5'),(11128,'Set the width of the banner. This can be either an integer value or percentage of the screen width. For example: 200 or 50%.','','10.4.5'),(11129,'Add/remove banner on specified domains','','10.4.5'),(11130,'Specify if you want to add or remove banner on the listed below domains.','','10.4.5'),(11131,'Cookie policy button label','','10.4.5'),(11132,'The module provides a settings page where the banner can be customized. There are also template files for the banners that can be overridden by your theme.','','none'),(11133,'You may want to create a page that would explain how your site uses cookies. Alternatively, if you have a privacy policy, you can link the banner to that page (see next step).','','none'),(11134,'Go to the admin/config/system/eu-cookie-compliance page to configure and enable the banner.','','none'),(11135,'If you want to theme your banner override the themes in the template file.','','none'),(11136,'Your privacy policy link is pointing at the front page. This is the default value after installation, and unless your privacy policy is actually posted at the front page, you will need to create a separate page for the privacy policy and link to that page.','','none'),(11137,'Cookie Policy button message','','none'),(11138,'Show \"Cookie Policy\" and \"More info\" buttons','','10.4.5'),(11139,'Display the banner for','','10.4.5'),(11140,'Cookie information banner','','10.4.5'),(11141,'By default by clicking any link or button on the website the visitor accepts the cookie policy. Uncheck this box if you don’t require this functionality. You may want to edit the banner message below accordingly.','','10.4.5'),(11142,'EU countries','','10.4.5'),(11143,'Do not store','','10.4.5'),(11144,'Consent for processing of personal information','','10.4.5'),(11145,'Consent method','','10.4.5'),(11146,'Consent by default. Don\'t provide any option to opt out.','','10.4.5'),(11147,'Opt-in. Don\'t track visitors unless they specifically give consent. (GDPR compliant)','','10.4.5'),(11148,'Opt-out. Track visitors by default, unless they choose to opt out.','','10.4.5'),(11149,'Automatic. Respect the DNT (Do not track) setting in the browser, if present. Uses opt-in when DNT is 1 or not set, and consent by default when DNT is 0.','','10.4.5'),(11150,'Disable the following JavaScripts when consent isn\'t given','','10.4.5'),(11151,'Disable JavaScripts','','10.4.5'),(11152,'Cookie handling','','10.4.5'),(11153,'Store record of consent','','10.4.5'),(11154,'Consent storage method','','10.4.5'),(11155,'Use a different message for mobile phones.','','10.4.5'),(11156,'Withdraw consent','','10.4.5'),(11157,'Enable floating privacy settings tab and withdraw consent banner','','10.4.5'),(11158,'Withdraw consent banner message','','10.4.5'),(11159,'Text that will be displayed in the banner that appears when the privacy settings tab is clicked.','','10.4.5'),(11160,'Privacy settings tab label','','10.4.5'),(11161,'Withdraw consent action button label','','none'),(11162,'This button will withdraw consent when clicked.','','10.4.5'),(11163,'Enable \"Thank you\" banner.','','none'),(11164,'Clicking hides \"Thank you\" banner.','','10.4.5'),(11165,'Open privacy policy link in a new window.','','10.4.5'),(11166,'Only display banner in EU countries.','','none'),(11167,'If the banner is at the top, don\'t scroll the banner with the page.','','10.4.5'),(11168,'Banner sliding animation time','','10.4.5'),(11169,'Reload page after user clicks the \"Agree\" button.','','10.4.5'),(11170,'How many days the system remember the user\'s choice.','','10.4.5'),(11171,'Exclude admin pages.','','10.4.5'),(11172,'Don\'t show the banner for UID 1.','','none'),(11173,'Invalid cookie name, please remove any special characters and try again.','','none'),(11174,'EU Cookie Compliance store consent','','none'),(11175,'Basic storage','','10.4.5'),(11176,'This module intends to deal with the EU Directive on Privacy and Electronic Communications that comes into effect on 26th May 2012. From that date, if you are not compliant or visibly working towards compliance, you run the risk of enforcement action, which can include a fine of up to half a million pounds for a serious breach.','','none'),(11177,'The module displays a banner at the bottom or the top of website to make users aware of the fact that cookies are being set. The user may then give his/her consent or move to a page that provides more details. Consent is given by user pressing the agree buttons or by continuing browsing the website. Once consent is given another banner appears with a \"Thank you\" message.','','none'),(11178,'Privacy policy link not provided','','none'),(11179,'Only display banner in EU countries (Javascript based).','','none'),(11180,'Cookie session','','none'),(11181,'Do not show cookie policy when the user clicks the \"Cookie Policy\" button.','','10.4.5'),(11182,'If this option is checked, the cookie policy button will be shown on the site. Disabling this option will hide both the \"Cookie Policy\" button on the information banner and the \"More info\" button on the \"Thank you\" banner.','','10.4.5'),(11183,'Enable \"Thank you\" banner','','10.4.5'),(11184,'Clicking a link or button hides the \"Thank you\" message automatically.','','10.4.5'),(11185,'\"Thank you\" banner message','','10.4.5'),(11186,'<h2>We use cookies on this site to enhance your user experience</h2><p>You have given your consent for us to set cookies.</p>','','none'),(11187,'Privacy Policy Version','','10.4.5'),(11188,'Info banner template','','10.4.5'),(11189,'Template to use for \"consent by default\" method','','none'),(11190,'Opt-in with categories. Let visitors choose which cookie categories they want to opt-in for (GDPR compliant).','','10.4.5'),(11191,'Cookie categories','','10.4.5'),(11192,'Replace the Agree button with \"Save preferences\" and \"Accept all categories\" buttons.','','10.4.5'),(11193,'Accept all cookies','','10.4.5'),(11194,'<h2>We use cookies on this site to enhance your user experience</h2><p>By clicking the Accept button, you agree to us doing so.</p>','','none'),(11195,'<h2>We use cookies on this site to enhance your user experience</h2><p>By tapping the Accept button, you agree to us doing so.</p>','','none'),(11196,'Allowed cookies','','10.4.5'),(11197,'Group name','','none'),(11198,'Clone','','10.5.6'),(11199,'Tab','','10.4.5'),(11200,'Default state','','none'),(11201,'Collapsible','','none'),(11202,'Slow','','none'),(11203,'Fast','','none'),(11204,'Speed','','none'),(11205,'Add a new group','','none'),(11206,'Create group','','none'),(11207,'Accordion','','none'),(11208,'Fieldset','','10.4.7'),(11209,'Description of the item','','none'),(11210,'Field group label','','none'),(11211,'Bounce slide','','none'),(11212,'More Information','','none'),(11213,'Label element','','none'),(11214,'Field group format:','','none'),(11215,'The css class must include only letters, numbers, underscores and dashes.','','none'),(11216,'Are you sure you want to delete the group %group?','','none'),(11217,'The group %group has been deleted from the %type content type.','','none'),(11218,'This fieldgroup renders child groups as jQuery accordion.','','none'),(11219,'This fieldgroup renders the content in a div, part of accordion group.','','none'),(11220,'Extra CSS classes','','none'),(11221,'Blind','','none'),(11222,'Horizontal Tabs','','none'),(11223,'Fieldgroups','','none'),(11224,'<p class=\"fieldgroup-help\">Fields can be dragged into groups with unlimited nesting. Each fieldgroup format comes with a configuration form, specific for that format type.<br />Note that some formats come in pair. These types have a html wrapper to nest its fieldgroup children. E.g. Place accordion items into the accordion, vertical tabs in vertical tab group and horizontal tabs in the horizontal tab group. There is one exception to this rule, you can use a vertical tab without a wrapper when the additional settings tabs are available. E.g. node forms.</p>','','none'),(11225,'New group %label successfully created.','','none'),(11226,'The field name','','none'),(11227,'Weight: @weight','','none'),(11228,'Fieldgroup @group is not cloned since a group already exists with the same name.','','none'),(11229,'Fieldgroup @group cloned successfully.','','none'),(11230,'Show label','','none'),(11231,'Add field group','','10.5.6'),(11232,'E.g. name=\"anchor\"','','none'),(11233,'Skipping @group because this type does not exist in current mode','','none'),(11234,'No field groups were found in selected view mode.','','none'),(11235,'This fieldgroup renders the inner content in a fieldset with the title as legend.','','none'),(11236,'Field Group','','10.2.3'),(11237,'This fieldgroup renders the inner content in a HTML element with classes and attributes.','','none'),(11238,'E.g. div, section, aside etc.','','none'),(11239,'The id must include only letters, numbers, underscores and dashes.','','none'),(11240,'Mark group as required if it contains required fields.','','none'),(11241,'Provides the ability to group your fields on both form and display.','','10.5.6'),(11242,'Field group settings on entity view','','none'),(11243,'A field group','','none'),(11244,'The fields belonging to the group','','none'),(11245,'The parent group of this group','','none'),(11246,'The weight of the group','','none'),(11247,'The formatter of the group','','none'),(11248,'Field group settings on entity form','','none'),(11249,'Mapping for the accordion formatter settings','','none'),(11250,'Effect on the accordion','','none'),(11251,'Mapping for the accordion item formatter settings','','none'),(11252,'Formatting of the item','','none'),(11253,'Mark for required fields','','none'),(11254,'Mapping for the details formatter settings','','none'),(11255,'Display element open by default.','','none'),(11256,'Mapping for the fieldset formatter settings','','none'),(11257,'Mapping for the html element formatter settings','','none'),(11258,'html element tag to be used','','none'),(11259,'show the label','','none'),(11260,'html element tag to be used for the label','','none'),(11261,'html attributes for the element','','none'),(11262,'effect on the element','','none'),(11263,'speed of the effect','','none'),(11264,'Mapping for the tab formatter settings','','none'),(11265,'default state for the tab','','none'),(11266,'Direction of the tabs','','none'),(11267,'Mapping for the base formatter settings','','none'),(11268,'Classes of the fieldgroup','','none'),(11269,'Html id of the fieldgroup','','none'),(11270,'Field Group Migrate','','none'),(11271,'Provides the ability to migrate field groups from D6/D7 to D8.','','10.5.6'),(11272,'Select source display','','none'),(11273,'Clone fieldgroups from selected display to the current display','','none'),(11274,'Id: @id','','none'),(11275,'Effect : @effect','','none'),(11276,'Mark as required','','none'),(11277,'Description : @description','','none'),(11278,'Accordion Item','','none'),(11279,'Default state open','','none'),(11280,'Default state closed','','none'),(11281,'Add a details element','','none'),(11282,'Element: @element','','10.4.5'),(11283,'Label element: @element','','none'),(11284,'Attributes: @attributes','','none'),(11285,'This fieldgroup renders the content as a tab.','','none'),(11286,'Direction: @direction','','none'),(11287,'This fieldgroup renders child groups in its own tabs wrapper.','','none'),(11288,'Parent name','','none'),(11289,'The region of this group','','none'),(11290,'For more information about this module please visit the <a href=\"@link\">module page</a>.','','none'),(11291,'html classes to be used for the label','','none'),(11292,'default state for the tabs','','none'),(11293,'description of the tabs','','none'),(11294,'Label element HTML classes','','none'),(11295,'Label element HTML classes: @label_classes','','none'),(11296,'Description of the element','','none'),(11297,'Mapping for the details sidebar formatter settings','','none'),(11298,'Description of the tab','','none'),(11299,'- Select a field group type -','','none'),(11300,'Details Sidebar','','10.4.5'),(11301,'Add a details sidebar element','','none'),(11302,'jQuery UI Accordion not enabled','','10.2.3'),(11303,'The jQuery UI Accordion module is installed','','none'),(11304,'The \"jquery_ui_accordion\" module has been installed.','','none'),(11305,'Readable name of the group','','none'),(11306,'Disable Tabs widget if the window width is equal or smaller','','none'),(11307,'Label of the fieldgroup','','none'),(11308,'Show Empty Fields','','none'),(11309,'@label of @entity_type (bundle: @bundle)','','none'),(11310,'Display element also when empty','','none'),(11311,'Display this field group even if the contained fields are currently empty.','','none'),(11312,'Width Breakpoint','','none'),(11313,'Auto-disable the Tabs widget if the window width is equal or smaller than this breakpoint.','','none'),(11314,'Google Tag Manager','','10.5.6'),(11315,'Meta tags (computed)','','none'),(11316,'Computed meta tags','','none'),(11317,'Images','','10.4.7'),(11318,'French','','10.4.5'),(11319,'Buttons','','10.4.5'),(11320,'Parent type','','10.5.6'),(11321,'Paragraph','','10.5.6'),(11322,'Behavior settings','','10.5.6'),(11323,'Collapse all','','10.5.6'),(11324,'Default icon','','none'),(11325,'Add mode','','none'),(11326,'Title: @title','','none'),(11327,'Paragraph field','','none'),(11328,'Modal form','','none'),(11329,'Paragraphs','','10.5.6'),(11330,'Paragraph type','','10.5.6'),(11331,'Label to appear as title on the button as \"Add new [title]\", this label is translatable','','none'),(11332,'Dropdown button','','none'),(11333,'Title in its plural form.','','none'),(11334,'%type_name: View content','','none'),(11335,'%type_name: Create content','','none'),(11336,'%type_name: Edit content','','none'),(11337,'%type_name: Delete content','','none'),(11338,'Paragraphs types','','10.5.6'),(11339,'Administer Paragraphs types','','10.5.6'),(11340,'Allow to define the existing Paragraphs types and their Fields','','10.5.6'),(11341,'Paragraphs type config','','none'),(11342,'Paragraphs Type Permissions','','none'),(11343,'The paragraphs entity language code.','','none'),(11344,'Paragraphs type','','10.5.6'),(11345,'Label for the Paragraphs type.','','10.5.6'),(11346,'Saved the %label Paragraphs type.','','none'),(11347,'Edit mode','','none'),(11348,'Form display mode','','none'),(11349,'Plural title: @title_plural','','none'),(11350,'Edit mode: @edit_mode','','none'),(11351,'Add mode: @add_mode','','none'),(11352,'Form display mode: @form_display_mode','','none'),(11353,'Confirm removal','','none'),(11354,'Paragraph types','','10.5.6'),(11355,'Weight for type @type','','none'),(11356,'The time that the Paragraph was created.','','none'),(11357,'Paragraph Title','','none'),(11358,'Plural Paragraph Title','','none'),(11359,'The form display mode to use when rendering the paragraph form.','','none'),(11360,'The mode the paragraph is in by default. Preview will render the paragraph in the preview view mode.','','none'),(11361,'You are not allowed to edit this @title.','','none'),(11362,'You are not allowed to remove this @title.','','none'),(11363,'You are not allowed to edit or remove this @title.','','none'),(11364,'You are not allowed to view this @title.','','none'),(11365,'@title type','','none'),(11366,'Add @title','','none'),(11367,'Add another @title','','none'),(11368,'You are not allowed to add any of the @title types.','','none'),(11369,'You did not add any @title types yet.','','none'),(11370,'There are no settings yet.','','none'),(11371,'The ID of the parent entity of which this entity is referenced.','','none'),(11372,'The entity parent type to which this entity is referenced.','','none'),(11373,'Parent field name','','10.5.6'),(11374,'The entity parent field name to which this entity is referenced.','','none'),(11375,'Paragraphs Demo','','none'),(11376,'<strong>Note:</strong> Field options do not appear until a type has been chosen and saved.','','none'),(11377,'Not yet configured.','','none'),(11378,'Using the %field field on a %type paragraph.','','none'),(11379,'Edit %title paragraph type','','10.5.6'),(11380,'No @title added yet.','','none'),(11381,' to %type','','none'),(11382,'Nested Paragraph','','none'),(11383,'Paragraphed article','','none'),(11384,'Image + Text','','none'),(11385,'Text + Image','','none'),(11386,'Paragraphs demo index','','none'),(11387,'Paragraphs demo server','','none'),(11388,'Paragraphs fields do not support translation. See the <a href=\":documentation\">online documentation</a>.','','none'),(11389,'(* unsupported) Paragraphs fields do not support translation. See the <a href=\":documentation\">online documentation</a>.','','10.5.6'),(11390,'%type Paragraphs type is used by 1 piece of content on your site. You can not remove this %type Paragraphs type until you have removed all from the content.%type Paragraphs type is used by @count pieces of content on your site. You may not remove %type Paragraphs type until you have removed all from the content.','','none'),(11391,'Deleted @title: %type','','none'),(11392,'No widget available for: %label.','','none'),(11393,'The behavior plugin settings','','none'),(11394,'Enables the creation of paragraphs entities.','','10.5.6'),(11395,'Behavior plugins','','none'),(11396,'Settings for base paragraphs behavior plugin','','none'),(11397,'Default paragraph type','','none'),(11398,'When creating a new host entity, a paragraph of this type is added.','','none'),(11399,'Default paragraph type: @default_paragraph_type','','none'),(11400,'@messages','','none'),(11401,'You have unsaved changes on this @title item.','','none'),(11402,'The Paragraphs module provides a field type that can contain several other fields and thereby allows users to break content up on a page. Administrators can predefine <em>Paragraphs types</em> (for example a simple text block, a video, or a complex and configurable slideshow). Users can then place them on a page in any order instead of using a text editor to add and configure such elements. For more information, see the <a href=\":online\">online documentation for the Paragraphs module</a>.','','none'),(11403,'Creating Paragraphs types','','none'),(11404,'<em>Paragraphs types</em> can be created by clicking <em>Add Paragraphs type</em> on the <a href=\":paragraphs\">Paragraphs types page</a>. By default a new Paragraphs type does not contain any fields.','','none'),(11405,'Configuring Paragraphs types','','none'),(11406,'Administrators can add fields to a <em>Paragraphs type</em> on the <a href=\":paragraphs\">Paragraphs types page</a> if the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI</a> module is enabled. The form display and the display of the Paragraphs type can also be managed on this page. For more information on fields and entities, see the <a href=\":field\">Field module help page</a>.','','none'),(11407,'Creating content with Paragraphs','','none'),(11408,'Administrators can add a <em>Paragraph</em> field to content types or other entities, and configure which <em>Paragraphs types</em> to include. When users create content, they can then add one or more paragraphs by choosing the appropriate type from the dropdown list. Users can also dragdrop these paragraphs. This allows users to add structure to a page or other content (for example by adding an image, a user reference, or a differently formatted block of text) more easily then including it all in one text field or by using fields in a pre-defined order.','','none'),(11409,'@field_label (* unsupported)','','10.5.6'),(11410,'Add paragraph type','','10.5.6'),(11411,'Create and manage Paragraph types.','','10.5.6'),(11412,'Edit behavior plugin settings','','10.5.6'),(11413,'Users with this permission can edit behavior plugin settings on Paragraphs behavior instance','','10.5.6'),(11414,'Add Paragraphs type','','none'),(11415,'Icon uuid','','none'),(11416,'The Paragraphs Demo module provides several <em>Paragraphs types</em> for the <a href=\":paragraphs\">Paragraphs module</a>, but no separate user interface. For more information, see the <a href=\":online\">online documentation for the Paragraphs module</a>.','','none'),(11417,'Changing demo Paragraphs types','','none'),(11418,'Administrators can edit the provided <em>Paragraphs types</em> on the <a href=\":paragraphs\">Paragraphs types page</a> if the <a href=\":field_ui\">Field UI</a> module is enabled. For more information on fields and entities, see the <a href=\":field\">Field module help page</a>.','','none'),(11419,'Deleting demo Paragraphs types','','none'),(11420,'The provided <em>demo Paragraph types</em> stay available even when the Paragraphs Demo module is uninstalled. They can be deleted individually on the <a href=\":paragraphs\">Paragraphs types page</a>.','','none'),(11421,'Provides multilingual demo Paragraphs types.','','10.5.6'),(11422,'The Paragraphs Type permission module allows administrators to configure permissions individually for each <em>Paragraphs type</em>. For more information, see the <a href=\":online\">online documentation for the Paragraphs module</a>.','','none'),(11423,'Configuring permissions per Paragraphs type','','none'),(11424,'Administrators can configure the permissions to view, create, edit, and delete each <em>Paragraphs type</em> individually on the <a href=\":permissions\">Permissions page</a>.','','none'),(11425,'Allows users to configure permissions for individual Paragraphs types.','','10.5.6'),(11426,'Bypass Paragraphs type content access control','','none'),(11427,'Is able to administer content for all Paragraph types','','none'),(11428,'Is able to view Paragraphs content of type %type_name','','none'),(11429,'Is able to create Paragraphs content of type %type_name','','none'),(11430,'Is able to update Paragraphs content of type %type_name','','none'),(11431,'Is able to delete Paragraphs content of type %type_name','','none'),(11432,'1 child@count children','','none'),(11433,'Paragraph type icon','','10.5.6'),(11434,'This text will be displayed on the <em>Add new paragraph</em> page.','','10.5.6'),(11435,'Exclude the selected below','','none'),(11436,'Include the selected below','','none'),(11437,'Which Paragraph types should be allowed?','','none'),(11438,'Selection of Paragraph types for this field. Select none to allow all Paragraph types.','','none'),(11439,'You did not add any Paragraph types yet, click <a href=\":here\">here</a> to add one.','','none'),(11440,'Paragraph summary','','10.4.5'),(11441,'The way to add new Paragraphs.','','none'),(11442,'The mode the paragraph is in by default.','','none'),(11443,'Closed mode','','none'),(11444,'How to display the paragraphs, when the widget is closed. Preview will render the paragraph in the preview view mode and typically needs a custom admin theme.','','none'),(11445,'Autocollapse','','none'),(11446,'When a paragraph is opened for editing, close others.','','none'),(11447,'Closed mode: @closed_mode','','none'),(11448,'Autocollapse: @autocollapse','','none'),(11449,'Current path for @number','','none'),(11450,'Complete drag & drop','','none'),(11451,'Drag & drop','','10.5.6'),(11452,'Edit all','','10.5.6'),(11453,'Edit All','','none'),(11454,'Toggle Actions','','10.5.6'),(11455,'Revision from %revision-date has been deleted.','','none'),(11456,'Paragraphs settings','','10.5.6'),(11457,'View unpublished paragraphs','','10.5.6'),(11458,'Users with this permission can view paragraphs that are unpublished','','10.5.6'),(11459,'Administer Paragraphs settings','','10.5.6'),(11460,'Allow users with \"View unpublished paragraphs\" permission to see unpublished paragraphs.','','none'),(11461,'Add above','','none'),(11462,'Unlink from library','','none'),(11463,'Promote to library','','none'),(11464,'The user ID of the library item author.','','none'),(11465,'Paragraphs Library','','none'),(11466,'Provides a library for reusing paragraphs.','','10.5.6'),(11467,'Add library item','','none'),(11468,'Paragraphs library item settings','','none'),(11469,'Manage paragraphs library items.','','none'),(11470,'Configure Paragraphs library item.','','none'),(11471,'Administer Paragraphs library','','none'),(11472,'Allow to manage the library of re-usable paragraphs.','','none'),(11473,'Create paragraph library item','','none'),(11474,'Allow to create the paragraph library items.','','none'),(11475,'Edit paragraph library item','','none'),(11476,'Allow to edit the paragraph library items.','','none'),(11477,'Paragraphs library per-paragraph type third party settings','','none'),(11478,'Allow conversion to paragraph library item','','none'),(11479,'Paragraph relationship','','none'),(11480,'Allows users to add paragraphs entity fields.','','none'),(11481,'Revisions for %label','','none'),(11482,'@date: @label by @author','','none'),(11483,'The time that the library item was created.','','none'),(11484,'The time that the library item was last edited.','','none'),(11485,'Paragraphs library item','','none'),(11486,'Paragraph %label has been created.','','none'),(11487,'Paragraph %label has been updated.','','none'),(11488,'Are you sure you want to delete revision from %revision-date?','','none'),(11489,'Are you sure you want to revert revision from %revision-date?','','none'),(11490,'%title has been reverted to the revision from %revision-date.','','none'),(11491,'Paragraphs type of Paragraphs library item\'s root is allowed in the parent field.','Validation','none'),(11492,'The @library_item_field_label field cannot contain a @paragraphs_type_label paragraph, because the parent @paragraph_field_label field disallows it.','','none'),(11493,'Show unpublished Paragraphs','','none'),(11494,'Enable widget features','','none'),(11495,'When editing, available as action. \"Add above\" only works in add mode \"Modal form\"','','none'),(11496,'Collapse / Edit all','','none'),(11497,'Features: @features','','none'),(11498,'The field_collection_item id','','none'),(11499,'The field_collection_item revision id','','none'),(11500,'The field_collection bundle','','none'),(11501,'The field_collection field_name','','none'),(11502,'Original field collection bundle/field_name','','none'),(11503,'Paragraph type machine name','','none'),(11504,'Paragraph type label','','none'),(11505,'Paragraph type description','','none'),(11506,'The paragraph_item id','','none'),(11507,'The paragraph_item revision id','','none'),(11508,'The paragraph bundle','','none'),(11509,'Paragraphs library items','','none'),(11510,'Available library items','','none'),(11511,'Paragraph types that are used in moderated content requires non-translatable fields to be edited in the original language form and this must be checked.','','10.5.6'),(11512,'Delete existing ParagraphDelete all @count existing Paragraphs','','none'),(11513,'Entity is successfully deleted.All @count entities are successfully deleted.','','none'),(11514,'Closed mode threshold','','none'),(11515,'Number of items considered to leave paragraphs open e.g the threshold is 3, if a paragraph has less than 3 items, leave it open.','','none'),(11516,'Closed, show nested','','none'),(11517,'Closed mode threshold: @mode_limit','','none'),(11518,'Select reusable paragraph','','none'),(11519,'Behaviors','paragraphs','10.5.6'),(11520,'Content','paragraphs','10.5.6'),(11521,'Behavior','paragraphs','10.5.6'),(11522,'The paragraph field_name','','none'),(11523,'Article with Paragraphs.','','none'),(11524,'Use <em>Image + Text</em> for adding an image on the left and a text on the right.','','none'),(11525,'Use <em>Images</em> for adding one or multiple images.','','none'),(11526,'Use <em>Nested Paragraph</em> for nesting more paragraphs inside.','','none'),(11527,'Use <em>Text</em> for adding a text.','','none'),(11528,'Use <em>User</em> for adding a reference to an existing user.','','none'),(11529,'From library','','none'),(11530,'Orphaned @type: @summary','','none'),(11531,'Validation error on collapsed paragraph @path: @message','','none'),(11532,'Use <em>Text + Image</em> for adding a text on the left and an image  on the right.','','none'),(11533,'Allow users with \"View unpublished paragraphs\" permission to see unpublished Paragraphs. Disable this if unpublished paragraphs should be hidden for all users, including super administrators.','','none'),(11534,'Library item summary','','none'),(11535,'Unknown migration process element type: @type.','','none'),(11536,'Behavior plugins are only supported by the stable paragraphs widget.','paragraphs','10.5.6'),(11537,'Paragraphs Legacy','','none'),(11538,'The legacy paragraphs inline form widget.','','none'),(11539,'Paragraphs (stable)','','none'),(11540,'The stable paragraphs inline form widget.','','none'),(11541,'The type of the parent entity','','none'),(11542,'The identifier of the parent entity','','none'),(11543,'Allow promoting to library','','none'),(11544,'Note: Regular paragraph fields should use the revision based reference fields, entity reference fields should only be used for cases when an existing paragraph is referenced from somewhere else.','','10.2.3'),(11545,'Create structured content.','','none'),(11546,'If selected the conversion will return two paragraphs.','','none'),(11547,'Convert to Text','','none'),(11548,'Convert to Text and User','','none'),(11549,'Convert…','','none'),(11550,'Conditions','','10.4.7'),(11551,'Verbose','','10.2.3'),(11552,'Display alias changes (except during bulk updates).','','10.2.3'),(11553,'Replace by separator','','10.2.3'),(11554,'Maximum alias length','','10.2.3'),(11555,'Maximum component length','','10.2.3'),(11556,'Update action','','10.2.3'),(11557,'Strings to Remove','','10.2.3'),(11558,'Pathauto','','none'),(11559,'Provides a mechanism for modules to automatically generate aliases for the content they manage.','','10.5.6'),(11560,'Period','','10.2.3'),(11561,'Asterisk','','10.2.3'),(11562,'The automatically generated alias %original_alias conflicted with an existing alias. Alias changed to %alias.','','none'),(11563,'Delete aliases','','10.2.3'),(11564,'Automatic alias','','10.5.6'),(11565,'Character used to separate words in titles. This will replace any spaces and punctuation characters. Using a space or + character can cause unexpected results.','','10.2.3'),(11566,'Character case','','10.2.3'),(11567,'Do nothing. Leave the old alias intact.','','10.2.3'),(11568,'Create a new alias. Leave the existing alias functioning.','','10.2.3'),(11569,'Create a new alias. Delete the old alias.','','10.2.3'),(11570,'Transliterate prior to creating alias','','10.2.3'),(11571,'Filters the new alias to only letters and numbers found in the ASCII-96 set.','','10.2.3'),(11572,'No action (do not replace)','','10.2.3'),(11573,'Delete all aliases. Number of aliases which will be deleted: %count.','','none'),(11574,'Delete aliases for all @label. Number of aliases which will be deleted: %count.','','none'),(11575,'Delete aliases now!','','none'),(11576,'All of your path aliases have been deleted.','','none'),(11577,'Patterns','','10.2.3'),(11578,'Colon','','10.2.3'),(11579,'Path pattern','','10.2.3'),(11580,'Context definitions','','none'),(11581,'Semicolon','','10.4.7'),(11582,'Slash','','10.2.3'),(11583,'Punctuation','','10.2.3'),(11584,'Pathauto Settings','','none'),(11585,'What should Pathauto do when updating an existing content item which already has an alias?','','10.2.3'),(11586,'Reduce strings to letters and numbers','','10.2.3'),(11587,'Words to strip out of the URL alias, separated by commas. Do not use this to remove punctuation.','','10.2.3'),(11588,'Choose aliases to delete','','none'),(11589,'All aliases','','none'),(11590,'Ignoring alias %alias because it is the same as the internal path.','','none'),(11591,'Created new alias %alias for %source, replacing %old_alias.','','none'),(11592,'Created new alias %alias for %source.','','none'),(11593,'Administer pathauto','','10.5.6'),(11594,'Allows a user to configure patterns for automated aliases and bulk delete URL-aliases.','','10.2.3'),(11595,'Notify of Path Changes','','10.5.6'),(11596,'Determines whether or not users are notified.','','10.5.6'),(11597,'Bulk updating URL aliases','','none'),(11598,'Generated 1 URL alias.Generated @count URL aliases.','','none'),(11599,'Update URL alias','','10.2.3'),(11600,'Underscore','','10.2.3'),(11601,'No new URL aliases to generate.','','none'),(11602,'Double quotation marks','','10.2.3'),(11603,'Single quotation marks (apostrophe)','','10.2.3'),(11604,'Back tick','','10.2.3'),(11605,'Hyphen','','10.2.3'),(11606,'Vertical bar (pipe)','','10.2.3'),(11607,'Left curly bracket','','10.2.3'),(11608,'Left square bracket','','10.2.3'),(11609,'Right curly bracket','','10.2.3'),(11610,'Right square bracket','','10.2.3'),(11611,'Plus sign','','10.2.3'),(11612,'Equal sign','','10.2.3'),(11613,'Percent sign','','10.2.3'),(11614,'Caret','','10.2.3'),(11615,'Dollar sign','','10.2.3'),(11616,'Number sign (pound sign, hash)','','10.2.3'),(11617,'At sign','','10.2.3'),(11618,'Exclamation mark','','10.2.3'),(11619,'Tilde','','10.2.3'),(11620,'Left parenthesis','','10.2.3'),(11621,'Right parenthesis','','10.2.3'),(11622,'Question mark','','10.2.3'),(11623,'Less-than sign','','10.2.3'),(11624,'Greater-than sign','','10.2.3'),(11625,'Backslash','','10.2.3'),(11626,'Generate automatic URL alias','','10.5.6'),(11627,'Uncheck this to create a custom alias below.','','10.4.7'),(11628,'Joined path','','10.5.6'),(11629,'The array values each cleaned by Pathauto and then joined with the slash into a string that resembles an URL.','','none'),(11630,'Selection criteria','','none'),(11631,'Bulk generate','','10.2.3'),(11632,'Selection logic','','none'),(11633,'Pattern type','','10.2.3'),(11634,'Delete options','','none'),(11635,'All of your %label path aliases have been deleted.','','none'),(11636,'See <a href=\":pathauto-help\">Pathauto help</a> for details.','','10.2.3'),(11637,'Maximum length of aliases to generate. 100 is the recommended length. @max is the maximum possible length.','','10.2.3'),(11638,'Maximum text length of any component in the alias (e.g., [title]). 100 is the recommended length. @max is the maximum possible length.','','10.2.3'),(11639,'The <a href=\":url\">Redirect module settings</a> affect whether a redirect is created when an alias is deleted.','','none'),(11640,'Considering installing the <a href=\":url\">Redirect module</a> to get redirects when your aliases change.','','10.2.3'),(11641,'Uncheck this to create a custom alias below. <a href=\"@admin_link\">Configure URL alias patterns.</a>','','10.5.6'),(11642,'Selection condition','','none'),(11643,'Entity of type @type was not processed. It defines the following patterns: @patterns','','none'),(11644,'Unrecognized entity bundle @entity:@bundle was not processed. It defines the following patterns: @patterns','','none'),(11645,'Add Pathauto pattern','','10.2.3'),(11646,'Pathauto pattern config','','none'),(11647,'Pathauto state','','none'),(11648,'Whether an automated alias should be created or not.','','none'),(11649,'Pathauto pattern','','10.5.6'),(11650,'Check to which types this pattern should be applied. Leave empty to allow any.','','10.2.3'),(11651,'Check to which languages this pattern should be applied. Leave empty to allow any.','','10.2.3'),(11652,'@label being aliased','','none'),(11653,'Updated alias for %label @id.','','none'),(11654,'Updated 1 %label URL alias.Updated @count %label URL aliases.','','none'),(11655,'When a pattern includes certain characters (such as those with accents) should Pathauto attempt to transliterate them into the US-ASCII alphabet?','','10.2.3'),(11656,'This page provides a list of all patterns on the site and allows you to edit and reorder them.','','10.2.3'),(11657,'The %element-title is using the following invalid characters: @invalid-characters.','','none'),(11658,'Convert token values to lowercase.','','10.2.3'),(11659,'Are you sure you want to disable the pattern %label?','','none'),(11660,'Disabled patterns are ignored when generating aliases.','','none'),(11661,'Disabled pattern %label.','','none'),(11662,'Are you sure you want to enable the pattern %label?','','none'),(11663,'Enabled pattern %label.','','none'),(11664,'Update URL alias of an entity','','none'),(11665,'The Pathauto module provides a mechanism to automate the creation of <a href=\"path\">path</a> aliases. This makes URLs more readable and helps search engines index content more effectively.  For more information, see the <a href=\":online\">online documentation for Pathauto</a>.','','none'),(11666,'Pathauto is accessed from the tabs it adds to the list of <a href=\":aliases\">URL aliases</a>.','','none'),(11667,'Creating Pathauto Patterns','','none'),(11668,'The <a href=\":pathauto_pattern\">\"Patterns\"</a> page is used to configure automatic path aliasing.  New patterns are created here using the <a href=\":add_form\">Add Pathauto pattern</a> button which presents a form to simplify pattern creation thru the use of <a href=\"token\">available tokens</a>. The patterns page provides a list of all patterns on the site and allows you to edit and reorder them. An alias is generated for the first pattern that applies.','','none'),(11669,'The <a href=\":settings\">\"Settings\"</a> page is used to customize global Pathauto settings for automated pattern creation.','','none'),(11670,'Bulk Generation','','none'),(11671,'The <a href=\":pathauto_bulk\">\"Bulk Generate\"</a> page allows you to create URL aliases for items that currently have no aliases. This is typically used when installing Pathauto on a site that has existing un-aliased content that needs to be aliased in bulk.','','none'),(11672,'Delete Aliases','','none'),(11673,'The <a href=\":pathauto_delete\">\"Delete Aliases\"</a> page allows you to remove URL aliases from items that have previously been assigned aliases using pathauto.','','none'),(11674,'You need to select a pattern type, then a pattern and filter, and a label. Additional types can be enabled on the <a href=\":settings\">Settings</a> page.','','none'),(11675,'Enabled entity types','','10.2.3'),(11676,'Enable to add a path field and allow to define alias patterns for the given type. Disabled types already define a path field themselves or currently have a pattern.','','10.2.3'),(11677,'Broken type','','none'),(11678,'AliasType','','none'),(11679,'Bulk generation can be used to generate URL aliases for items that currently have no aliases. This is typically used when installing Pathauto on a site that has existing un-aliased content that needs to be aliased in bulk.','','10.2.3'),(11680,'It can also be used to regenerate URL aliases for items that have an old alias and for which the Pathauto pattern has been changed.','','10.2.3'),(11681,'Note that this will only affect items which are configured to have their URL alias automatically set. Items whose URL alias is manually set are not affected.','','10.2.3'),(11682,'The %element-title doesn\'t allow the patterns ending with whitespace.','','none'),(11683,'Select the types of paths for which to generate URL aliases','','10.2.3'),(11684,'Select which URL aliases to generate','','10.2.3'),(11685,'Generate a URL alias for un-aliased paths only','','10.2.3'),(11686,'<a href=\":url\">Pathauto settings</a> are set to ignore paths which already have a URL alias. You can only create URL aliases for paths having none.','','none'),(11687,'Update the URL alias for paths having an old URL alias','','10.2.3'),(11688,'Regenerate URL aliases for all paths','','10.2.3'),(11689,'A short name to help you identify this pattern in the patterns list.','','10.2.3'),(11690,'Only delete automatically generated aliases','','none'),(11691,'When checked, aliases which have been manually set are not affected by this mass-deletion.','','none'),(11692,'Bulk deleting URL aliases','','none'),(11693,'All of your automatically generated path aliases have been deleted.','','none'),(11694,'All of your automatically generated %label path aliases have been deleted.','','none'),(11695,'Tokens that are safe to use and do not need to be cleaned.','','none'),(11696,'Safe tokens','','10.2.3'),(11697,'List of tokens that are safe to use in alias patterns and do not need to be cleaned. For example urls, aliases, machine names. Separated with a comma.','','10.2.3'),(11698,'Pattern %label saved.','','none'),(11699,'Duplicate Pathauto pattern','','none'),(11700,'Choose the action to perform.','','none'),(11701,'Choose the alias type(s). Separate multiple choices with commas, e.g. \"1,2,4\", or choose \"0\" for all types.','','none'),(11702,'Invalid action argument \"@invalid_action\". Please use one of: @valid_actions','','none'),(11703,'Invalid type argument \"@invalid_types\". Please choose from the following: @valid_types','','none'),(11704,'Generate a URL alias for un-aliased paths only.','','none'),(11705,'Update the URL alias for paths having an old URL alias.','','none'),(11706,'Regenerate URL aliases for all paths.','','none'),(11707,'The name of the pattern\'s variable.','','none'),(11708,'The value of the pattern\'s variable.','','none'),(11709,'The <strong>maximum alias length</strong> and <strong>maximum component length</strong> values default to 100 and have a limit of @max from Pathauto. You should enter a value that is the length of the \"alias\" column of the path_alias database table minus the length of any strings that might get added to the end of the URL. The recommended and default value is 100.','','none'),(11710,'<strong>Note:</strong> there is no confirmation. Be sure of your action before clicking the \"Delete aliases now!\" button.<br />You may want to make a backup of the database and/or the path_alias and path_alias_revision tables prior to using this feature.','','none'),(11711,'Field Name','','none'),(11712,'Entity Types','','none'),(11713,'Exclude list','','none'),(11714,'Quick Node Clone','','none'),(11715,'Quickly clone a node with regular fields.','','10.5.6'),(11716,'@type %title (clone) has been created.','','10.5.6'),(11717,'The cloned post could not be saved.','','none'),(11718,'@type: added %title (clone).','','none'),(11719,'Quick Node Clone Settings','','10.5.6'),(11720,'Configure settings related to cloning nodes with the Quick Node Clone module.','','10.5.6'),(11721,'Administer Quick Node Clone Settings','','10.5.6'),(11722,'Quick Node Clone Setting','','none'),(11723,'Enter text to add to the title of a cloned node to help content editors. A space will be added between this text and the title. Example: \"Clone of\"','','none'),(11724,'%type: clone content','','10.2.3'),(11725,'Quick Node Paragraph Clone Setting','','none'),(11726,'Quick Node Clone settings','','none'),(11727,'Clone publication status of original?','','none'),(11728,'Exclusion list','','none'),(11729,'You can select fields that you do not want to be included when the node is cloned.','','none'),(11730,'Select entity types above and you will see a list of fields that can be excluded.','','none'),(11731,'Fields for @bundle_name','','none'),(11732,'No content types selected','','none'),(11733,'New Clone:','','none'),(11734,'If unchecked, the publication status of the clone will be equal to the default of the content type.','','none'),(11735,'Add clone link','','10.4.5'),(11736,'Provide a clone link to the Content.','','10.4.5'),(11737,'@prepend_text@title','','10.5.6'),(11738,'Quick Node Paragraph Clone Settings have been saved.','','none'),(11739,'Quick Node Clone Settings have been saved.','','none'),(11740,'title','','none'),(11741,'value','','none'),(11742,'breadcrumb','','none'),(11743,'logo','','none'),(11744,'Place','','none'),(11745,'category','','none'),(11746,'url','','none'),(11747,'Event','','none'),(11748,'@type','','none'),(11749,'name','','none'),(11750,'Question','','none'),(11751,'Answer','','none'),(11752,'email','','none'),(11753,'description','','none'),(11754,'text','','none'),(11755,'Expires','','10.5.6'),(11756,'expires','','none'),(11757,'price','','none'),(11758,'duration','','none'),(11759,'address','','none'),(11760,'sku','','none'),(11761,'image','','none'),(11762,'Review','','none'),(11763,'about','','none'),(11764,'Brand','','none'),(11765,'Organization','','none'),(11766,'Person','','none'),(11767,'Rating','','10.5.6'),(11768,'location','','none'),(11769,'SEO','','10.5.6'),(11770,'The value.','','none'),(11771,'The name of the item.','','none'),(11772,'publisher','','none'),(11773,'currency','','none'),(11774,'Offer','','none'),(11775,'member','','none'),(11776,'The title of the image.','','none'),(11777,'opens','','none'),(11778,'Priority','','10.5.6'),(11779,'default','','10.5.6'),(11780,'Custom links','','none'),(11781,'Submission URL','','none'),(11782,'Search engine','','none'),(11783,'Engines','','none'),(11784,'Inclusion','','10.5.6'),(11785,'Excluded','','none'),(11786,'Sitemap','','10.5.6'),(11787,'Search engines','','none'),(11788,'Yandex','','none'),(11789,'pending','','none'),(11790,'daily','','10.5.6'),(11791,'weekly','','10.5.6'),(11792,'yearly','','10.5.6'),(11793,'monthly','','10.5.6'),(11794,'Variants','','10.5.6'),(11795,'Last modification date','','10.4.7'),(11796,'Change frequency','','10.5.6'),(11797,'Sitemap file','','10.4.7'),(11798,'Number of sitemaps in this index','','10.4.7'),(11799,'Sitemap URL','','10.4.7'),(11800,'Number of URLs in this sitemap','','10.4.7'),(11801,'URL location','','10.4.7'),(11802,'Bing','','none'),(11803,'Default base URL','','10.4.5'),(11804,'Translation set','','10.4.7'),(11805,'Exclude duplicate links','','10.4.5'),(11806,'Skip non-existent translations','','10.4.5'),(11807,'Include images','','10.5.6'),(11808,'The sitemap will be generated according to this interval.','','10.4.5'),(11809,'There will be no links generated for languages checked here.','','10.4.5'),(11810,'Sitemap variants','','none'),(11811,'Rebuild queue','','10.4.5'),(11812,'There are no items to be indexed.','','none'),(11813,'Default hreflang','','10.2.3'),(11814,'Rebuild queue & generate','','10.4.5'),(11815,'This text will be used by screen readers, search engines, or when the image cannot be loaded.','','none'),(11816,'This field stores the ID of an image file as an integer value.','','none'),(11817,'Sanitize','','none'),(11818,'This text will be used by screen readers, search engines, and when the image cannot be loaded.','','none'),(11819,'The alt attribute may be used by search engines, screen readers, and when the image cannot be loaded. Enabling this field is recommended.','','none'),(11820,'Parents','','10.5.6'),(11821,'format','','10.5.6'),(11822,'The name of the menu.','','none'),(11823,'Root','','10.5.6'),(11824,'Tokens','','none'),(11825,'Token','','10.5.6'),(11826,'Available tokens','','none'),(11827,'Keys','','10.5.6'),(11828,'Interface language','','10.5.6'),(11829,'Root term','','10.5.6'),(11830,'Menu links','','10.5.6'),(11831,'Array','','10.5.6'),(11832,'Link ID','','10.5.6'),(11833,'Base name','','10.5.6'),(11834,'No tokens available.','','none'),(11835,'Click a token to insert it into the field you\'ve last clicked.','','none'),(11836,'Translation source node','','10.5.6'),(11837,'Provides a user interface for the Token API and some missing core tokens.','','10.5.6'),(11838,'Insert this token into your form','','10.5.6'),(11839,'First click a text field to insert your tokens into.','','10.5.6'),(11840,'The explanation of the most recent changes made to the node.','','none'),(11841,'The title of the current page.','','none'),(11842,'The URL of the current page.','','none'),(11843,'The page number of the current page when viewing paged lists.','','none'),(11844,'The source node for this current node\'s translation set.','','none'),(11845,'Account cancellation URL','','10.5.6'),(11846,'The URL of the confirm delete page for the user account.','','none'),(11847,'One-time login URL','','10.5.6'),(11848,'The URL of the one-time login page for the user account.','','none'),(11849,'Tokens related to menu links.','','none'),(11850,'The unique ID of the menu link.','','none'),(11851,'The title of the menu link.','','none'),(11852,'The URL of the menu link.','','none'),(11853,'The menu link\'s parent.','','none'),(11854,'Tokens related to the current page request.','','none'),(11855,'Page number','','10.5.6'),(11856,'The book page associated with the node.','','none'),(11857,'The menu link for this node.','','none'),(11858,'The menu link\'s root.','','none'),(11859,'Hash','','10.5.6'),(11860,'The extension of the file.','','none'),(11861,'Tokens related to the current date and time.','','none'),(11862,'The URL of the @entity.','','none'),(11863,'The content type of the node.','','none'),(11864,'Tokens related to content types.','','none'),(11865,'The name of the content type.','','none'),(11866,'The unique machine-readable name of the content type.','','none'),(11867,'The optional description of the content type.','','none'),(11868,'The number of nodes belonging to the content type.','','none'),(11869,'The URL of the content type\'s edit page.','','none'),(11870,'The URL of the taxonomy term\'s edit page.','','none'),(11871,'The unique machine-readable name of the vocabulary.','','none'),(11872,'The URL of the vocabulary\'s edit page.','','none'),(11873,'The specific argument of the current page (e.g. \'arg:1\' on the page \'node/1\' returns \'1\').','','none'),(11874,'Tokens related to URLs.','','none'),(11875,'Relative URL','','10.5.6'),(11876,'The relative URL.','','none'),(11877,'Absolute URL','','10.5.6'),(11878,'The absolute URL.','','none'),(11879,'Tokens related to menus.','','none'),(11880,'The unique machine-readable name of the menu.','','none'),(11881,'The optional description of the menu.','','none'),(11882,'Menu link count','','10.5.6'),(11883,'The number of menu links belonging to the menu.','','none'),(11884,'The URL of the menu\'s edit page.','','none'),(11885,'The menu of the menu link.','','none'),(11886,'The URL of the menu link\'s edit page.','','none'),(11887,'The user roles associated with the user account.','','none'),(11888,'Brief URL','','10.5.6'),(11889,'The URL without the protocol and trailing backslash.','','none'),(11890,'Tokens related to arrays of strings.','','none'),(11891,'The first element of the array.','','none'),(11892,'The last element of the array.','','none'),(11893,'The number of elements in the array.','','none'),(11894,'The array reversed.','','none'),(11895,'The array of keys of the array.','','none'),(11896,'Imploded','','10.5.6'),(11897,'The values of the array joined together with a custom string in-between each value.','','none'),(11898,'A date in \'@type\' format. (%date)','','none'),(11899,'The root term of the taxonomy term.','','none'),(11900,'File byte size','','10.5.6'),(11901,'The size of the file, in bytes.','','none'),(11902,'Query string value','','10.5.6'),(11903,'The value of a specific query string field of the current page.','','none'),(11904,'A random number from 0 to @max.','','none'),(11905,'A random hash. The possible hashing algorithms are: @hash-algos.','','none'),(11906,'Attempting to perform token replacement for token type %type without required data','','none'),(11907,'@type field.','','none'),(11908,'No tokens available','','none'),(11909,'Token registry caches cleared.','','none'),(11910,'The path component of the URL.','','none'),(11911,'Unaliased URL','','10.5.6'),(11912,'The unaliased URL.','','none'),(11913,'The specific value of the array.','','none'),(11914,'The list of available tokens that can be used in e-mails is provided below.','','10.4.5'),(11915,'An array of all the term\'s parents, starting with the root.','','none'),(11916,'An array of all the menu link\'s parents, starting with the root.','','none'),(11917,'Original @entity','','10.5.6'),(11918,'The original @entity data if the @entity is being updated or saved.','','none'),(11919,'The base name of the file.','','none'),(11920,'List of @type values','','10.5.6'),(11921,'Tokens for lists of @type values.','','none'),(11922,'Browse available tokens.','','10.5.6'),(11923,'@type field. Also known as %labels.','','none'),(11924,'Tokens or token types not defined as arrays','','none'),(11925,'Tokens or token types missing name property','','none'),(11926,'Token types do not have any tokens defined','','none'),(11927,'Token types are not defined but have tokens','','none'),(11928,'Token or token types are defined by multiple modules','','none'),(11929,'Image with image style','','10.5.6'),(11930,'The MIME type (image/png, image/bmp, etc.) of the image.','','none'),(11931,'The file size of the image.','','none'),(11932,'The height the image, in pixels.','','none'),(11933,'The width of the image, in pixels.','','none'),(11934,'The URI to the image.','','none'),(11935,'The URL to the image.','','none'),(11936,'@label tokens.','','none'),(11937,'@type type with delta @delta','','10.5.6'),(11938,'Represents the image in the given image style.','','none'),(11939,'The <a href=\":project\">Token</a> module provides a user interface for the site token system. It also adds some additional tokens that are used extensively during site development. Tokens are specially formatted chunks of text that serve as placeholders for a dynamically generated value. For more information, covering both the token system and the additional tools provided by the Token module, see the <a href=\":online\">online documentation</a>.','','none'),(11940,'Your website uses a shared token system for exposing and using placeholder tokens and their appropriate replacement values. This allows for any module to provide placeholder tokens for strings without having to reinvent the wheel. It also ensures consistency in the syntax used for tokens, making the system as a whole easier for end users to use.','','none'),(11941,'The list of the currently available tokens on this site are shown below.','','none'),(11942,'%name is using the following invalid tokens: @invalid-tokens.','','none'),(11943,'Computed menu link for the node (only available during node saving).','','none'),(11944,'%name must contain at least one token.%name must contain at least @count tokens.','','none'),(11945,'%name must contain at most one token.%name must contain at most @count tokens.','','none'),(11946,'Tokens related to books.','','none'),(11947,'Title of the book.','','none'),(11948,'The author of the book.','','none'),(11949,'Top level of the book.','','none'),(11950,'Parent of the current page.','','none'),(11951,'An array of all the node\'s parents, starting with the root.','','none'),(11952,'This field supports tokens. @browse_tokens_link','','10.4.5'),(11953,'Tokens related to random data.','','none'),(11954,'The IP address of the current user.','','none'),(11955,'The language of the @entity.','','none'),(11956,'Tokens related to site language.','','none'),(11957,'The language name.','','none'),(11958,'Whether the language is written left-to-right (ltr) or right-to-left (rtl).','','none'),(11959,'The domain name to use for the language.','','none'),(11960,'Path prefix for URLs in the language.','','none'),(11961,'The active user interface language.','','none'),(11962,'The active content language.','','none'),(11963,'Translation source term','','10.5.6'),(11964,'The source term for this current term\'s translation set.','','none'),(11965,'Token browser','','none'),(11966,'Provides some extra Twig functions and filters.','','10.5.6'),(11967,'Fade','','10.4.7'),(11968,'Slide','','10.4.7'),(11969,'Advanced Options','','none'),(11970,'Effect Type','','none'),(11971,'Content selector','','none'),(11972,'enabled','','10.4.5'),(11973,'Item','','10.5.6'),(11974,'Private','','10.4.7'),(11975,'Email notification','','10.2.3'),(11976,'Subscribe','','none'),(11977,'Manager','','none'),(11978,'Log','','none'),(11979,'optional','','none'),(11980,'required','','none'),(11981,'error','','none'),(11982,'License','','none'),(11983,'Resources','','none'),(11984,'created','','10.4.5'),(11985,'all','','10.5.6'),(11986,'Test','','10.5.6'),(11987,'B','','none'),(11988,'Break','','none'),(11989,'Container','','10.4.7'),(11990,'Admin title','','10.4.7'),(11991,'Containers','','10.4.5'),(11992,'One','','10.4.7'),(11993,'Download PDF','','none'),(11994,'Unscheduled','','none'),(11995,'Dimensions','','10.4.7'),(11996,'API','','none'),(11997,'Section','','10.4.7'),(11998,'Visible','','10.4.7'),(11999,'Notes','','10.4.7'),(12000,'Total','','none'),(12001,'Status:','','none'),(12002,'Submitted by','','10.4.7'),(12003,'Default status','','10.4.7'),(12004,'#','','10.4.7'),(12005,'Issue','','none'),(12006,'Titles','','10.2.3'),(12007,'Utility','','none'),(12008,'Add page','','10.4.7'),(12009,'Link Title','','none'),(12010,'Default settings','','none'),(12011,'To:','','10.4.7'),(12012,'submit','','10.2.3'),(12013,'General information','','none'),(12014,'Submission information','','10.4.7'),(12015,'Url','','none'),(12016,'Ignored','','none'),(12017,'Sender','','10.4.5'),(12018,'Preview message','','10.4.7'),(12019,'Source URL','','10.5.6'),(12020,'Message type','','none'),(12021,'item','','10.5.6'),(12022,'items','','10.5.6'),(12023,'Normal','','10.4.7'),(12024,'sources','','none'),(12025,'Demo','','none'),(12026,'Range','','10.4.7'),(12027,'Line','','none'),(12028,'Honeypot','','10.2.3'),(12029,'Introduction','','none'),(12030,'Phone','','10.4.5'),(12031,'Address','','10.4.7'),(12032,'Suburb','','none'),(12033,'Code','','none'),(12034,'Inactive','','10.5.6'),(12035,'Company','','none'),(12036,'Example','','10.5.6'),(12037,'Method','','none'),(12038,'Week','','10.4.7'),(12039,'Start','','10.2.3'),(12040,'reCAPTCHA','','10.2.3'),(12041,'(Disabled)','','none'),(12042,'Integration','','none'),(12043,'A','','none'),(12044,'Email subject','','10.2.3'),(12045,'First name','','none'),(12046,'Last name','','none'),(12047,'reset','','10.2.3'),(12048,'Choices','','none'),(12049,'Create content','','none'),(12050,'Override','','10.4.5'),(12051,'Empty text','','none'),(12052,'Handler','','10.4.5'),(12053,'Remaining','','none'),(12054,'Send to','','10.4.7'),(12055,'Latest','','none'),(12056,'Template','','none'),(12057,'module','','none'),(12058,'Authenticated users','','10.4.7'),(12059,'IMCE','','none'),(12060,'Flag','','none'),(12061,'City','','none'),(12062,'Postal code','','none'),(12063,'Latitude','','none'),(12064,'Longitude','','none'),(12065,'State/Province','','10.4.5'),(12066,'Collapsed','','none'),(12067,'Applications','','none'),(12068,'Labels','','10.4.7'),(12069,'Full name','','10.4.5'),(12070,'Nickname','','10.4.5'),(12071,'Gender','','10.2.3'),(12072,'Male','','none'),(12073,'Female','','none'),(12074,'Birthday','','10.4.5'),(12075,'Confirmation','','10.4.7'),(12076,'Share','','none'),(12077,'share','','none'),(12078,'Attachments','','10.4.7'),(12079,'Street Address','','none'),(12080,'submissions','','10.4.7'),(12081,'source','','none'),(12082,'Time format','','none'),(12083,'Street Number','','none'),(12084,'Delimiter','','none'),(12085,'Clear','','10.4.5'),(12086,'update','','10.2.3'),(12087,'Message:','','none'),(12088,'Parameters','','none'),(12089,'Return value','','10.4.7'),(12090,'Middle','','none'),(12091,'Date/time','','10.4.7'),(12092,'one','','none'),(12093,'%label has been deleted.','','10.4.5'),(12094,'any','','none'),(12095,'Unit','','none'),(12096,'Days','','10.2.3'),(12097,'Months','','10.2.3'),(12098,'Purge','','10.5.6'),(12099,'All roles','','10.4.7'),(12100,'Hours','','none'),(12101,'Email body','','10.2.3'),(12102,'From email address','','10.4.7'),(12103,'Results','','10.5.6'),(12104,'open','','none'),(12105,'Requirements','','none'),(12106,'Schema','','none'),(12107,'Promotions','','none'),(12108,'options','','10.4.5'),(12109,'Email confirmation','','10.2.3'),(12110,'Confirmation URL','','10.4.7'),(12111,'No results found','','none'),(12112,'From:','','10.4.7'),(12113,'Subject:','','10.4.7'),(12114,'Completed','','10.4.7'),(12115,'Card expiry date','','10.4.5'),(12116,'County','','none'),(12117,'completed','','none'),(12118,'404 Not Found','','none'),(12119,'User Profile','','none'),(12120,'Templates','','none'),(12121,'summary','','none'),(12122,'Percentage','','10.4.5'),(12123,'Toggles','','none'),(12124,'images','','none'),(12125,'Translations','','10.2.3'),(12126,'Minutes','','none'),(12127,'Default sender name','','10.4.5'),(12128,'Locality','','none'),(12129,'Loading...','','none'),(12130,'Automatic','','none'),(12131,'Limit to','','none'),(12132,'Read/write','','10.4.7'),(12133,'Processed','','none'),(12134,'Complete','','10.2.3'),(12135,'date','','none'),(12136,'Keyboard shortcuts','','none'),(12137,'Submissions','','10.5.6'),(12138,'webform','','10.4.7'),(12139,'Webforms','','10.5.6'),(12140,'Webform','','10.5.6'),(12141,'ever','','10.4.7'),(12142,'every hour','','10.4.7'),(12143,'every day','','10.4.7'),(12144,'every week','','10.4.7'),(12145,'Check this option if the user must enter a value.','','10.4.7'),(12146,'Previous submission','','10.4.7'),(12147,'Next submission','','10.4.7'),(12148,'Questions','','none'),(12149,'Request type','','none'),(12150,'Default category','','none'),(12151,'Enable debugging','','10.4.7'),(12152,'Challenge type','','10.4.7'),(12153,'CAPTCHA','','10.5.6'),(12154,'Place a CAPTCHA here for untrusted users.','','10.5.6'),(12155,'Color settings','','none'),(12156,'Administrators','','none'),(12157,'Toggle','','none'),(12158,'5 minutes','','none'),(12159,'10 minutes','','none'),(12160,'15 minutes','','10.4.7'),(12161,'20 minutes','','none'),(12162,'30 minutes','','10.4.7'),(12163,'Destination type','','none'),(12164,'Overrides','','none'),(12165,'collapsed','','none'),(12166,'Title tag','','none'),(12167,'Raw value','','10.4.7'),(12168,'Google Maps API key','','none'),(12169,'Next >','','10.2.3'),(12170,'test','','none'),(12171,'< Previous','','10.2.3'),(12172,'Submission settings','','none'),(12173,'Two','','none'),(12174,'Three','','none'),(12175,'Display message','','none'),(12176,'Filter by category','','10.4.5'),(12177,'videos','','10.4.5'),(12178,'Filter options','','10.4.5'),(12179,'Country Code','','none'),(12180,'Postal Code','','none'),(12181,'From name','','10.4.7'),(12182,'Description:','','none'),(12183,'Drafts','','none'),(12184,'JSON','','none'),(12185,'Export format','','none'),(12186,'video','','10.4.5'),(12187,'Address settings','','none'),(12188,'Execute','','none'),(12189,'ignored','','none'),(12190,'Feedback','','none'),(12191,'Family name','','10.4.5'),(12192,'All users','','none'),(12193,'Country code','','10.4.5'),(12194,'Build','','10.5.6'),(12195,'Years','','none'),(12196,'Email addresses','','none'),(12197,'Hide all','','10.2.3'),(12198,'Show all','','10.2.3'),(12199,'Edit \'@title\'','','none'),(12200,'Results per page','','none'),(12201,'Flat','','none'),(12202,'Unlocked','','none'),(12203,'Resend','','10.4.7'),(12204,'Any','','10.4.7'),(12205,'modules','','none'),(12206,'Validation','','10.4.7'),(12207,'Supported modules','','none'),(12208,'Thank you for registering.','','none'),(12209,'Custom options','','none'),(12210,'Thank You','','none'),(12211,'ZIP Code','','10.4.5'),(12212,'deleted','','none'),(12213,'Custom CSS','','none'),(12214,'New password','','10.4.5'),(12215,'Contribute','','10.4.5'),(12216,'read-only','','none'),(12217,'read/write','','none'),(12218,'milliseconds','','10.4.7'),(12219,'SMTP Authentication Support','','10.5.6'),(12220,'Form element','','10.4.7'),(12221,'Notification','','10.4.5'),(12222,'Bcc','','none'),(12223,'Destination options','','none'),(12224,'Step','','none'),(12225,'Image file','','10.4.7'),(12226,'Admin mode','','none'),(12227,'None of the above','','10.5.6'),(12228,'Answers','','none'),(12229,'Prepopulate','','10.4.7'),(12230,'Output','','10.4.7'),(12231,'Test settings','','none'),(12232,'Below','','none'),(12233,'notice','','none'),(12234,'Access groups','','none'),(12235,'Congratulations!','','10.5.6'),(12236,'Validators','','none'),(12237,'Admins','','none'),(12238,'Recommended','','10.5.6'),(12239,'Debug settings','','none'),(12240,'Registration','','none'),(12241,'Configuration settings','','none'),(12242,'Card type','','10.4.5'),(12243,'Card number','','10.4.5'),(12244,'button','','10.4.7'),(12245,'expanded','','none'),(12246,'Format settings','','none'),(12247,'Webform submissions','','10.5.6'),(12248,'Words','','10.4.5'),(12249,'Characters','','10.4.5'),(12250,'Flagged','','none'),(12251,'Add-ons','','10.5.6'),(12252,'Response message:','','none'),(12253,'Table settings','','none'),(12254,'Sex','','10.4.5'),(12255,'Select menu','','none'),(12256,'Light','','none'),(12257,'Maximum image resolution','','none'),(12258,'Query string','','none'),(12259,'Expand all','','10.5.6'),(12260,'Delimited text','','none'),(12261,'Comma (,)','','none'),(12262,'Tab (\\t)','','none'),(12263,'Semicolon (;)','','none'),(12264,'Colon (:)','','none'),(12265,'Pipe (|)','','none'),(12266,'Period (.)','','none'),(12267,'Space ( )','','none'),(12268,'close','','10.5.6'),(12269,'Randomize images','','none'),(12270,'Additional settings','','10.4.7'),(12271,'Two columns','','10.4.5'),(12272,'Country name','','10.4.5'),(12273,'Link to form','','10.4.5'),(12274,'City/Town','','none'),(12275,'Config','','10.4.5'),(12276,'words','','none'),(12277,'Email Notification','','none'),(12278,'Conditional','','none'),(12279,'Handlers','','10.5.6'),(12280,'Preview settings','','none'),(12281,'Tracking','','10.4.7'),(12282,'Link title','','none'),(12283,'Finished with an error.','','none'),(12284,'Sort options','','none'),(12285,'Per user','','10.4.7'),(12286,'Edit configuration','','none'),(12287,'Draft','','10.4.7'),(12288,'Save Draft','','10.2.3'),(12289,'Scheduled','','10.5.6'),(12290,'answer','','none'),(12291,'Checkbox','','10.4.7'),(12292,'Allowed tags','','none'),(12293,'Excel','','none'),(12294,'Date year range','','none'),(12295,'Trigger','','10.4.7'),(12296,'Yes/No','','10.2.3'),(12297,'Select date','','none'),(12298,'Cc','','none'),(12299,'User interface settings','','none'),(12300,'Autocomplete limit','','none'),(12301,'Vertical tabs','','10.4.7'),(12302,'Thank you for your feedback.','','none'),(12303,'Change status','','none'),(12304,'question','','none'),(12305,'questions','','none'),(12306,'Breadcrumb delimiter','','none'),(12307,'SID','','10.4.7'),(12308,'The default sender name which is used along with the default from address.','','10.4.5'),(12309,'Webform submission','','10.5.6'),(12310,'Leaving blank will use the default size.','','10.4.5'),(12311,'Submitted values are:','','none'),(12312,'Display on','','10.4.5'),(12313,'Education','','10.2.3'),(12314,'Horizontal rule','','10.4.7'),(12315,'Converted','','none'),(12316,'Enable Drupal style \"sticky\" table headers (Javascript)','','none'),(12317,'Allowed formats','','none'),(12318,'Circle','','none'),(12319,'User IDs','','none'),(12320,'Disable help','','none'),(12321,'Checkboxes','','10.4.7'),(12322,'Textarea','','10.4.7'),(12323,'matches','','none'),(12324,'does not match','','none'),(12325,'h2','','10.2.3'),(12326,'Webform Block','','none'),(12327,'Auto detect','','none'),(12328,'Progress bar message','','none'),(12329,'Notes:','','none'),(12330,'Author information','','10.4.7'),(12331,'Signature settings','','none'),(12332,'@type (from module @module)','','10.4.7'),(12333,'Default challenge type','','10.4.7'),(12334,'Access denied message','','10.4.7'),(12335,'Address 2','','none'),(12336,'Maps','','none'),(12337,'Alternatives','','10.5.6'),(12338,'Add variant','','none'),(12339,'Variant type','','none'),(12340,'Name is required.','','none'),(12341,'Variant','','10.4.7'),(12342,'Related','','none'),(12343,'Dialog','','none'),(12344,'Return path','','10.4.7'),(12345,'is empty','','none'),(12346,'Page theme','','10.4.7'),(12347,'References','','none'),(12348,'Degree','','none'),(12349,'Show preview','','10.4.5'),(12350,'Edit element','','10.4.5'),(12351,'Delete element','','none'),(12352,'Elements','','10.5.6'),(12353,'Add element','','10.4.7'),(12354,'Field prefix','','10.4.7'),(12355,'Field suffix','','10.4.7'),(12356,'Lock','','none'),(12357,'Mapping source','','none'),(12358,'Marital status','','10.2.3'),(12359,'Used by','','10.4.5'),(12360,'Message display','','none'),(12361,'Request method','','none'),(12362,'Progress','','10.4.7'),(12363,'Sender email address','','10.4.7'),(12364,'Unique','','10.4.7'),(12365,'Form display','','10.4.7'),(12366,'Progress bar','','none'),(12367,'Data format','','none'),(12368,'Default email subject','','10.4.5'),(12369,'[none]','','10.4.7'),(12370,'Message settings','','none'),(12371,'Libraries','','10.5.6'),(12372,'(unknown)','','none'),(12373,'Randomize questions','','none'),(12374,'Form validation','','10.4.7'),(12375,'Webform Validation','','none'),(12376,'Rename files','','none'),(12377,'Employee','','none'),(12378,'Serial number','','none'),(12379,'Webform Product','','none'),(12380,'Email from address','','none'),(12381,'destinations','','none'),(12382,'Starred','','10.4.5'),(12383,'Before title','','10.4.7'),(12384,'After title','','10.4.7'),(12385,'File URL','','none'),(12386,'Custom settings','','10.4.7'),(12387,'Archived','','10.4.7'),(12388,'From email','','10.4.7'),(12389,'Default tab','','none'),(12390,'The file %source could not be uploaded because a file by that name already exists in the destination %directory.','','none'),(12391,'Minimum image resolution','','none'),(12392,'Other description','','none'),(12393,'Unlock','','none'),(12394,'Administrative area','','none'),(12395,'Webform settings','','none'),(12396,'Randomize options','','10.4.5'),(12397,'Confirmation message','','10.4.7'),(12398,'Submission limit','','none'),(12399,'Show the previous submissions notification that appears when users have previously submitted this form.','','10.4.7'),(12400,'Submission Number','','10.4.7'),(12401,'Submission ID','','10.5.6'),(12402,'Compact options are more suitable for importing data into other systems.','','none'),(12403,'draft','','10.2.3'),(12404,'Remote URL','','none'),(12405,'subject','','10.4.7'),(12406,'Data name','','none'),(12407,'CodeMirror','','10.4.7'),(12408,'Wrapper','','10.4.7'),(12409,'Routing','','none'),(12410,'Autocomplete settings','','none'),(12411,'Video display','','none'),(12412,'Submitter','','10.5.6'),(12413,'Altered','','10.4.5'),(12414,'Modern','','none'),(12415,'auto','','10.4.7'),(12416,'Four','','none'),(12417,'Five','','none'),(12418,'Image options','','none'),(12419,'Confirm email','','none'),(12420,'Import options','','none'),(12421,'The email address %mail is not valid.','','none'),(12422,'Invisible','','10.4.7'),(12423,'Unsaved','','none'),(12424,'Separate extensions with a space or comma and do not include the leading dot.','','none'),(12425,'Geographic','','10.2.3'),(12426,'Other type','','none'),(12427,'Access types','','none'),(12428,'The machine-readable name.','','none'),(12429,'Chosen','','none'),(12430,'Original Image','','none'),(12431,'Time settings','','none'),(12432,'Contact Us','','none'),(12433,'Modal','','none'),(12434,'Organization name','','10.4.5'),(12435,'Learn more','','none'),(12436,'Job Application','','none'),(12437,'Given name','','10.4.5'),(12438,'Title display','','10.4.7'),(12439,'Available countries','','none'),(12440,'If no countries are selected, all countries will be available.','','none'),(12441,'Custom tags','','none'),(12442,'elements','','10.4.5'),(12443,'Dark','','none'),(12444,'Include files as attachments','','10.4.7'),(12445,'Watch video','','10.5.6'),(12446,'sent','','none'),(12447,'Message ID','','none'),(12448,'Slides','','10.4.5'),(12449,'Password confirm','','10.4.7'),(12450,'View display id','','none'),(12451,'Date of birth','','none'),(12452,'Choose file','','none'),(12453,'Star','','none'),(12454,'Full screen','','10.4.7'),(12455,'Header title','','none'),(12456,'One column','','10.5.6'),(12457,'Wizard','','10.4.5'),(12458,'Submission saved. You may return to this form later and it will restore the current values.','','10.2.3'),(12459,'Batch settings','','none'),(12460,'Add webform','','10.5.6'),(12461,'Invalid phone number','','none'),(12462,'Mail System','','10.5.6'),(12463,'Salesforce Web-to-Lead Webform Data Integration','','none'),(12464,'Industry','','10.2.3'),(12465,'Master','','10.4.5'),(12466,'There are no templates available.','','none'),(12467,'Webform Protected Downloads','','none'),(12468,'Entity id','','none'),(12469,'Clientside Validation','','none'),(12470,'Webform CiviCRM Integration','','none'),(12471,'Datatype','','none'),(12472,'Address line 1','','10.4.5'),(12473,'Address line 2','','10.4.5'),(12474,'- Select type -','','none'),(12475,'Submission','','none'),(12476,'Between','','10.4.7'),(12477,'Post type','','none'),(12478,'Attachment URL','','none'),(12479,'Animals','','none'),(12480,'Webform Encrypt','','none'),(12481,'Text format settings','','none'),(12482,'- Default -','','10.4.7'),(12483,'HTML Table','','none'),(12484,'Reply to','','none'),(12485,'Item weight','','10.4.7'),(12486,'Add email','','10.4.7'),(12487,'Auto-detect','','none'),(12488,'Element type','','none'),(12489,'Element title','','none'),(12490,'Provides HubSpot leads API integration with Drupal.','','none'),(12491,'Rescheduled','','none'),(12492,'Progress Tracker','','10.5.6'),(12493,'Mitigates spam form submissions using the honeypot method.','','10.2.3'),(12494,'Ajax effect','','10.4.7'),(12495,'Date part','','none'),(12496,'Transaction amount','','10.4.5'),(12497,'Select the method used to collect autocomplete suggestions.','','none'),(12498,'every minute','','10.4.7'),(12499,'403 Forbidden','','none'),(12500,'Response message','','none'),(12501,'Time element','','none'),(12502,'Custom properties','','10.4.7'),(12503,'Header 1','','none'),(12504,'Header 2','','none'),(12505,'Show/hide','','none'),(12506,'Slide in/out','','none'),(12507,'Three columns','','10.4.5'),(12508,'Email from name','','10.2.3'),(12509,'Enhancements','','none'),(12510,'Total submissions limit','','10.5.6'),(12511,'Per user submission limit','','10.5.6'),(12512,'Webform Node','','none'),(12513,'Other title','','none'),(12514,'Add images','','none'),(12515,'Webform Share','','none'),(12516,'Country codes','','10.2.3'),(12517,'Store value in the database','','none'),(12518,'@title options','','none'),(12519,'File name pattern','','none'),(12520,'Hidden element (less secure, changeable via JavaScript)','','none'),(12521,'Is this a draft of the submission?','','none'),(12522,'answers','','none'),(12523,'No submissions available.','','10.2.3'),(12524,'Card Security Code','','10.4.5'),(12525,'Rating settings','','none'),(12526,'Twig template','','none'),(12527,'Webform Mass Email','','none'),(12528,'YAML','','none'),(12529,'@title settings','','10.5.6'),(12530,'Handler settings','','none'),(12531,'Message content','','none'),(12532,'Form API','','none'),(12533,'Next page button label','','none'),(12534,'Installs Swift Mailer as a mail system.','','none'),(12535,'Class hierarchy','','none'),(12536,'Queue Mail','','none'),(12537,'Current page title','','10.5.6'),(12538,'Title is required.','','none'),(12539,'Save elements','','10.4.7'),(12540,'National','','none'),(12541,'All of the above','','10.5.6'),(12542,'Number input','','none'),(12543,'Terms of service','','10.4.7'),(12544,'Wizard page','','10.4.7'),(12545,'Multiple items','','10.4.5'),(12546,'Show labels','','none'),(12547,'Match limit','','none'),(12548,'Add layout','','10.4.7'),(12549,'External link','','none'),(12550,'Download options','','none'),(12551,'Formatted Address','','none'),(12552,'Filled','','10.4.7'),(12553,'Access Rules','','none'),(12554,'CSV download','','none'),(12555,'variant','','none'),(12556,'Form status','','10.4.7'),(12557,'View %name does not exist.','','none'),(12558,'Langcode','','10.5.6'),(12559,'Color swatch','','none'),(12560,'Request URL','','none'),(12561,'Source entity','','10.5.6'),(12562,'Source entity type','','10.5.6'),(12563,'Theme:','','none'),(12564,'Add handler','','10.4.7'),(12565,'Code Mirror','','10.5.6'),(12566,'Date (@format)','','none'),(12567,'add-ons','','none'),(12568,'add-on','','none'),(12569,'Wrapper CSS classes','','none'),(12570,'Column header format','','none'),(12571,'Soft','','none'),(12572,'Term select','','10.4.7'),(12573,'Exporting submissions','','none'),(12574,'Creating export file','','none'),(12575,'The export file could not be created because an error occurred.','','none'),(12576,'Select2','','none'),(12577,'Antibot','','10.5.6'),(12578,'x-www-form-urlencoded','','none'),(12579,'Are you sure you want to delete this?','','none'),(12580,'Webform Feedback','','none'),(12581,'Show progress bar','','none'),(12582,'Show the notification about previous submissions','','10.4.7'),(12583,'Drafts only','','none'),(12584,'400 Bad Request','','none'),(12585,'401 Unauthorized','','none'),(12586,'500 Internal Server Error','','none'),(12587,'502 Bad Gateway','','none'),(12588,'503 Service Unavailable','','none'),(12589,'504 Gateway Timeout','','none'),(12590,'Webform Invitation','','none'),(12591,'Are you sure you want to delete the %label @entity-type?','','10.4.5'),(12592,'Filter submissions','','10.4.7'),(12593,'CAPTCHA settings','','10.5.6'),(12594,'CC:','','none'),(12595,'results per page','','none'),(12596,'Add card','','none'),(12597,'Route parameters','','none'),(12598,'Hide help','','none'),(12599,'submission','','10.4.5'),(12600,'Custom data','','none'),(12601,'Previous page button label','','none'),(12602,'Enable preview page','','10.4.7'),(12603,'Preview page title','','10.4.7'),(12604,'Included preview values','','10.4.7'),(12605,'Webform ID','','10.5.6'),(12606,'Show all options','','none'),(12607,'Thank you for subscribing.','','none'),(12608,'Confirmation type','','10.4.7'),(12609,'Add reference','','none'),(12610,'Next submission number','','10.4.7'),(12611,'Select webform','','none'),(12612,'Value is','','10.4.7'),(12613,'Method:','','none'),(12614,'Library settings','','none'),(12615,'Entity reference settings','','none'),(12616,'Cards','','none'),(12617,'The default value of the field identified by its key.','','10.4.5'),(12618,'element','','10.4.7'),(12619,'if','','10.4.7'),(12620,'View submission','','10.4.7'),(12621,'Name on card','','10.4.5'),(12622,'Group information','','none'),(12623,'Weight for @label','','none'),(12624,'Open date','','10.5.6'),(12625,'Close date','','10.5.6'),(12626,'Minlength','','10.4.5'),(12627,'Question title','','none'),(12628,'A powerful, flexible, user-friendly form builder for CiviCRM.','','none'),(12629,'form only','','10.4.5'),(12630,'Autofocus','','none'),(12631,'Label: @label','','none'),(12632,'Date completed','','10.5.6'),(12633,'A partially-completed form was found. Please complete the remaining portions.','','10.2.3'),(12634,'Confidential submissions','','10.4.7'),(12635,'Confidential submissions have no recorded IP address and must be submitted while logged out.','','10.4.7'),(12636,'Reply-to','','none'),(12637,'Devel | Drupal.org','','10.4.5'),(12638,'option','','10.4.5'),(12639,'Add validation rules to Webforms.','','none'),(12640,'Submission state','','none'),(12641,'No preview available.','','none'),(12642,'Translates content, configuration, and interface using the Lingotek Translation Management System.','','none'),(12643,'Default from name','','10.4.5'),(12644,'Integrations','','none'),(12645,'Sorting code','','none'),(12646,'Language override','','none'),(12647,'Ensures entered addresses are always formatted in the same language.','','none'),(12648,'- No override -','','none'),(12649,'Clear submissions','','none'),(12650,'Clearing submission data','','none'),(12651,'The submissions could not be cleared because an error occurred.','','none'),(12652,'Entity reference options','','none'),(12653,'Webform Simple Hierarchical Select','','none'),(12654,'Integrates Simple Hierarchical Select module with Webform.','','none'),(12655,'Webform Stripe','','none'),(12656,'Options (YAML)','','none'),(12657,'%title is not valid.','','none'),(12658,'Entity select','','10.4.7'),(12659,'A secure token used to look up a submission.','','none'),(12660,'Add options','','10.4.5'),(12661,'Emails / Handlers','','10.4.7'),(12662,'Data (YAML)','','10.4.7'),(12663,'Form default settings','','none'),(12664,'Email default settings','','none'),(12665,'Results disabled','','none'),(12666,'Email to address','','none'),(12667,'Confirmation settings','','10.4.7'),(12668,'URL (redirects to a custom path or URL)','','10.4.7'),(12669,'Submission updated in %form.','','none'),(12670,'New submission added to %form.','','none'),(12671,'Submitted to','','10.5.6'),(12672,'Back to form','','10.2.3'),(12673,'Unable to load @entity_type:@entity_id','','none'),(12674,'%title options are not valid. @message','','none'),(12675,'Submission UUID','','10.4.7'),(12676,'Submission URI','','10.4.7'),(12677,'Remote IP address','','10.4.7'),(12678,'Submitted to: Entity ID','','none'),(12679,'Enable the %name handler.','','10.4.7'),(12680,'A unique name for this handler instance. Must be alpha-numeric and underscore separated.','','10.4.7'),(12681,'Format options','','none'),(12682,'Delimiter text format','','none'),(12683,'Select menu, radio buttons, and checkboxes options','','none'),(12684,'Item format','','10.4.7'),(12685,'Option labels, the human-readable value (label)','','none'),(12686,'Option values, the raw value stored in the database (key)','','none'),(12687,'Are you sure you want to delete @submission_total @submissions in @form_total @forms?','','none'),(12688,'%subject sent to %to_mail from %from_name [%from_mail].','','none'),(12689,'Country names','','10.2.3'),(12690,'State codes','','10.2.3'),(12691,'State names','','10.2.3'),(12692,'State/Province codes','','10.2.3'),(12693,'State/Province names','','10.2.3'),(12694,'Default preview page title','','10.4.7'),(12695,'Default preview message','','10.4.7'),(12696,'Test types','','none'),(12697,'Test names','','none'),(12698,'Defaults to: %value','','10.4.7'),(12699,'The text for the button that will proceed to the preview page.','','10.2.3'),(12700,'The text for the button to go backwards from the preview page.','','10.2.3'),(12701,'A message to be displayed on the preview page.','','10.4.7'),(12702,'Submitted to: Entity title','','none'),(12703,'Submitted to: Entity URL','','none'),(12704,'Default preview button label','','10.4.7'),(12705,'Column options','','none'),(12706,'The selected columns will be included in the export.','','none'),(12707,'Number of submissions','','none'),(12708,'Date list','','10.4.7'),(12709,'Entity autocomplete','','10.4.7'),(12710,'Default base path','','none'),(12711,'Default form exception message','','none'),(12712,'Default draft button label','','10.4.5'),(12713,'Default draft save message','','10.4.5'),(12714,'Default draft load message','','10.4.5'),(12715,'Default confirmation message','','10.4.7'),(12716,'Default limit total message','','none'),(12717,'Default limit user message','','none'),(12718,'Enable page','','none'),(12719,'Page submit URL alias','','none'),(12720,'Page confirm URL alias','','none'),(12721,'Form closed message','','10.4.7'),(12722,'Form exception message','','10.4.7'),(12723,'Limit total submissions','','none'),(12724,'Limit total message','','10.2.3'),(12725,'Limit user submissions','','none'),(12726,'Limit user message','','10.2.3'),(12727,'Draft saved message','','10.4.7'),(12728,'Draft loaded message','','10.4.7'),(12729,'Message to be displayed when a draft is loaded.','','10.4.7'),(12730,'Is draft','','10.4.7'),(12731,'The submission language code.','','none'),(12732,'Default closed message','','10.4.7'),(12733,'Default submit button label','','10.4.7'),(12734,'Completed and draft submissions','','none'),(12735,'Completed submissions only','','none'),(12736,'Number of submissions?','','none'),(12737,'Deleted existing submissions.','','none'),(12738,'1 submissions created.Finished creating @count submissions','','none'),(12739,'Batch export size','','none'),(12740,'Batch update size','','none'),(12741,'Batch delete size','','none'),(12742,'Automatically save as draft when previewing and when there are validation errors.','','none'),(12743,'Enter a <a href=\":form_api_href\">Form API (FAPI)</a> and/or a <a href=\":render_api_href\">Render Array</a> as <a href=\":yaml_href\">YAML</a>.','','none'),(12744,'To email','','10.4.7'),(12745,'Default submission data','','10.5.6'),(12746,'No messages are available.','','none'),(12747,'Resend message','','none'),(12748,'Successfully re-sent %label.','','none'),(12749,'[site:name]','','10.2.3'),(12750,'No more submissions are permitted.','','10.2.3'),(12751,'Thank you for applying.','','none'),(12752,'Sunday: Sunday\nMonday: Monday\nTuesday: Tuesday\nWednesday: Wednesday\nThursday: Thursday\nFriday: Friday\nSaturday: Saturday\n','','10.2.3'),(12753,'Male: Male\nFemale: Female\n','','10.2.3'),(12754,'AL: Alabama\nAK: Alaska\nAZ: Arizona\nAR: Arkansas\nCA: California\nCO: Colorado\nCT: Connecticut\nDE: Delaware\nDC: \'District of Columbia\'\nFL: Florida\nGA: Georgia\nGU: Guam\nHI: Hawaii\nID: Idaho\nIL: Illinois\nIN: Indiana\nIA: Iowa\nKS: Kansas\nKY: Kentucky\nLA: Louisiana\nME: Maine\nMD: Maryland\nMA: Massachusetts\nMI: Michigan\nMN: Minnesota\nMS: Mississippi\nMO: Missouri\nMT: Montana\nNE: Nebraska\nNV: Nevada\nNH: \'New Hampshire\'\nNJ: \'New Jersey\'\nNM: \'New Mexico\'\nNY: \'New York\'\nNC: \'North Carolina\'\nND: \'North Dakota\'\nOH: Ohio\nOK: Oklahoma\nOR: Oregon\nPA: Pennsylvania\nRI: \'Rhode Island\'\nSC: \'South Carolina\'\nSD: \'South Dakota\'\nTN: Tennessee\nTX: Texas\nUT: Utah\nVT: Vermont\nVA: Virginia\nWA: Washington\nWV: \'West Virginia\'\nWI: Wisconsin\nWY: Wyoming\n','','10.2.3'),(12755,'Alabama: Alabama\nAlaska: Alaska\nArizona: Arizona\nArkansas: Arkansas\nCalifornia: California\nColorado: Colorado\nConnecticut: Connecticut\nDelaware: Delaware\n\'District of Columbia\': \'District of Columbia\'\nFlorida: Florida\nGeorgia: Georgia\nHawaii: Hawaii\nIdaho: Idaho\nIllinois: Illinois\nIndiana: Indiana\nIowa: Iowa\nKansas: Kansas\nKentucky: Kentucky\nLouisiana: Louisiana\nMaine: Maine\nMaryland: Maryland\nMassachusetts: Massachusetts\nMichigan: Michigan\nMinnesota: Minnesota\nMississippi: Mississippi\nMissouri: Missouri\nMontana: Montana\nNebraska: Nebraska\nNevada: Nevada\n\'New Hampshire\': \'New Hampshire\'\n\'New Jersey\': \'New Jersey\'\n\'New Mexico\': \'New Mexico\'\n\'New York\': \'New York\'\n\'North Carolina\': \'North Carolina\'\n\'North Dakota\': \'North Dakota\'\nOhio: Ohio\nOklahoma: Oklahoma\nOregon: Oregon\nPennsylvania: Pennsylvania\n\'Rhode Island\': \'Rhode Island\'\n\'South Carolina\': \'South Carolina\'\n\'South Dakota\': \'South Dakota\'\nTennessee: Tennessee\nTexas: Texas\nUtah: Utah\nVermont: Vermont\nVirginia: Virginia\nWashington: Washington\n\'West Virginia\': \'West Virginia\'\nWisconsin: Wisconsin\nWyoming: Wyoming\n','','10.2.3'),(12756,'Miss: Miss\nMs: Ms\nMr: Mr\nMrs: Mrs\nDr: Dr\n','','10.2.3'),(12757,'Yes: Yes\nNo: No\n','','10.2.3'),(12758,'Export type','','none'),(12759,'A user-defined date format. See the <a href=\"http://php.net/manual/function.date.php\">PHP manual</a> for available options.','','none'),(12760,'Completed date','','none'),(12761,'Use CDN','','none'),(12762,'Filename: %file','','10.4.5'),(12763,'Default email body (Plain text)','','10.4.5'),(12764,'Default email body (HTML)','','10.4.5'),(12765,'Sends the message as plain text or HTML, using PHP\'s native mail() function.','','10.2.3'),(12766,'Body default value (@format)','','10.4.7'),(12767,'Send email as HTML','','10.4.7'),(12768,'Debugging is enabled','','none'),(12769,'Settings:','','10.4.7'),(12770,'Format default settings','','none'),(12771,'Export default settings','','none'),(12772,'Options item format','','none'),(12773,'Entity reference format','','none'),(12774,'Title / Description','','10.4.7'),(12775,'The download settings have been saved.','','none'),(12776,'Label (ID)','','none'),(12777,'Obscured','','none'),(12778,'Protect %label with Honeypot','','none'),(12779,'Add time restriction to %label','','none'),(12780,'Default form confidential message','','none'),(12781,'Default wizard previous page button label','','10.4.7'),(12782,'Default wizard next page button label','','10.4.7'),(12783,'Default preview previous page button label','','10.4.7'),(12784,'Form confidential','','none'),(12785,'Form confidential message','','10.2.3'),(12786,'Default confidential message','','10.4.7'),(12787,'This form is confidential. You must <a href=\"[site:login-url]/logout?destination=[current-page:url:relative]\">Log out</a> to submit it.','','10.2.3'),(12788,'Example: Wizard','','none'),(12789,'Integrated by','','none'),(12790,'Additional elements','','none'),(12791,'The specified email addresses do not match.','','none'),(12792,'Reset settings','','none'),(12793,'The download settings have been reset.','','none'),(12794,'1: Strongly Disagree\n2: Disagree\n3: Neutral\n4: Agree\n5: Strongly Agree\n','','10.2.3'),(12795,'1: Not at all Important\n2: Somewhat Important\n3: Neutral\n4: Important\n5: Very Important\n','','10.2.3'),(12796,'1: Very Unsatisfied\n2: Unsatisfied\n3: Neutral\n4: Satisfied\n5: Very Satisfied\n','','10.2.3'),(12797,'1: 1\n2: 2\n3: 3\n4: 4\n5: 5\n6: 6\n7: 7\n8: 8\n9: 9\n10: 10\n','','10.2.3'),(12798,'Likert: Would You','','10.2.3'),(12799,'1: Definitely Not\n2: Probably Not\n3: Not Sure\n4: Probably\n5: Definitely\n','','10.2.3'),(12800,'Webform Blocks','','none'),(12801,'Show wizard progress bar','','10.4.7'),(12802,'Show wizard progress pages','','10.4.7'),(12803,'Show wizard progress percentage','','10.4.7'),(12804,'<a href=\":tel\">@tel</a>','','10.4.7'),(12805,'Answers format','','none'),(12806,'Answer labels, the human-readable value (label)','','none'),(12807,'Likert','','10.4.7'),(12808,'Default wizard start label','','10.4.7'),(12809,'Wizard start label','','10.4.7'),(12810,'Include confirmation page in progress','','10.4.7'),(12811,'CodeMirror settings','','none'),(12812,'Wrapper attributes','','10.4.7'),(12813,'- Select operation -','','10.5.6'),(12814,'JavaScript code','','none'),(12815,'Elements (YAML)','','none'),(12816,'Form prepopulate elements','','none'),(12817,'There are no submissions that need to be deleted.','','none'),(12818,'@total YAML file(s) tidied.','','none'),(12819,'No YAML files needed to be tidied.','','none'),(12820,'Parent %parent_key does not exist.','','none'),(12821,'Basic elements','','10.4.5'),(12822,'Test %type element','','none'),(12823,'Element test','','none'),(12824,'HTML markup','','10.4.5'),(12825,'Determines the placement of the title.','','10.4.7'),(12826,'Specifies the legal number intervals.','','none'),(12827,'Empty option label','','none'),(12828,'Empty option value','','none'),(12829,'Submission display','','10.4.7'),(12830,'Elements are required','','none'),(12831,'Elements are not valid. @message','','none'),(12832,'Elements are not valid. YAML must contain an associative array of elements.','','none'),(12833,'Hide this element by setting its <code>\'#access\'</code> property to <code>false</code>.','','none'),(12834,'Filter by title, description, or elements','','none'),(12835,'Element titles (label)','','none'),(12836,'API Docs','','none'),(12837,'Please select <a href=\":href\">predefined @type</a> or enter custom @type.','','10.4.5'),(12838,'No elements are available.','','10.4.5'),(12839,'Date type/Element type','','none'),(12840,'%title elements are not valid. @message','','none'),(12841,'Test data by element type','','none'),(12842,'Invalid number of submissions: @num','','none'),(12843,'Advanced elements','','10.4.5'),(12844,'Date/time elements','','10.4.5'),(12845,'- Select a target type -','','none'),(12846,'Enter the max file size a user may upload.','','none'),(12847,'Likert settings','','none'),(12848,'Markup settings','','10.4.5'),(12849,'Select an element','','10.4.5'),(12850,'Duplicate element','','none'),(12851,'Test element','','none'),(12852,'Filter by element name','','10.4.5'),(12853,'No element available.','','none'),(12854,'Duplicate @title element','','none'),(12855,'Edit @title element','','10.4.7'),(12856,'(9 = numeric; a = alphabetical; * = alphanumeric)','','10.4.5'),(12857,'@title title','','none'),(12858,'Element options','','10.4.5'),(12859,'Email CC address','','none'),(12860,'Email BCC address','','none'),(12861,'Image src','','none'),(12862,'Readonly','','10.4.7'),(12863,'Entity limit total submissions','','none'),(12864,'Entity limit user submissions','','none'),(12865,'Entity type is required when entity id is specified.','','none'),(12866,'Entity id is required when entity type is specified.','','none'),(12867,'%title has been @action.','','10.4.7'),(12868,'Select the entity type and then enter the entity id.','','none'),(12869,'Element settings','','10.4.7'),(12870,'Generic element','','10.4.7'),(12871,'Duplicate \'@label\' form','','none'),(12872,'All [@total]','','10.5.6'),(12873,'Open [@total]','','10.5.6'),(12874,'Closed [@total]','','10.5.6'),(12875,'Starred [@total]','','10.4.7'),(12876,'Unstarred [@total]','','10.4.7'),(12877,'Administrative notes','','10.4.7'),(12878,'Enter notes about this submission. These notes are only visible to submission administrators.','','10.4.5'),(12879,'Submission @sid notes saved.','','none'),(12880,'Filter by submitted data and/or notes','','10.4.7'),(12881,'Header (YAML)','','none'),(12882,'Text to display when no rows are present.','','none'),(12883,'Pattern %pattern is not a valid regular expression.','','10.4.5'),(12884,'Customize table','','none'),(12885,'Disable dialogs','','none'),(12886,'Filter templates','','none'),(12887,'Starred/flagged submissions','','none'),(12888,'At least once column is required','','none'),(12889,'Input masks','','10.4.5'),(12890,'[blank]','','none'),(12891,'Select a handler','','10.4.5'),(12892,'Save details open/close state','','none'),(12893,'Save handlers','','10.4.7'),(12894,'Filter by handler name','','10.4.5'),(12895,'Enter a part of the handler name to filter by.','','10.4.5'),(12896,'No handler available.','','none'),(12897,'Add @label handler','','10.4.5'),(12898,'Edit @label handler','','10.4.7'),(12899,'Ascending (ASC)','','none'),(12900,'Descending (DESC)','','none'),(12901,'Use as default configuration','','none'),(12902,'Presolve the CAPTCHA and always shows it. This is useful for debugging and preview CAPTCHA integration.','','none'),(12903,'@title description','','none'),(12904,'Disable client-side validation','','10.4.7'),(12905,'Client-side validation is disabled for all forms.','','none'),(12906,'Default title display','','none'),(12907,'Description display','','10.4.7'),(12908,'Message to be shown upon successful submission.','','10.4.7'),(12909,'@label value','','10.4.5'),(12910,'@label text','','10.4.5'),(12911,'Option value','','none'),(12912,'Default description display','','none'),(12913,'Side by side','','10.4.5'),(12914,'Other size','','none'),(12915,'Email confirm title','','none'),(12916,'Star size','','none'),(12917,'Small (@size)','','none'),(12918,'Medium (@size)','','none'),(12919,'Large (@size)','','none'),(12920,'Sign above','','none'),(12921,'not signed','','none'),(12922,'signed','','none'),(12923,'Signature options','','none'),(12924,'iPhone','','none'),(12925,'Single: Single\nMarried: Married\nDivorced: Divorced\nWidowed: Widowed\n','','10.2.3'),(12926,'Disable HTML editor','','none'),(12927,'Previewing @title template','','none'),(12928,'Select new element type','','none'),(12929,'Enter multiple tags delimited using spaces','','none'),(12930,'Requirement settings','','none'),(12931,'Variant settings','','none'),(12932,'Element CSS classes','','none'),(12933,'Form prepopulate source entity','','none'),(12934,'Created @destination','','none'),(12935,'Flex','','none'),(12936,'Flexbox item','','none'),(12937,'Learn more about using <a href=\":href\">flexbox layouts</a>.','','none'),(12938,'0 (none)','','none'),(12939,'Apply custom styles to the element\'s wrapper around both the field and its label.','','10.4.7'),(12940,'Choose whether to show the element label or element key in each column header.','','none'),(12941,'Element keys (key)','','none'),(12942,'A list of classes that will be provided in the \"Wrapper CSS classes\" dropdown. Enter one or more classes on each line. These styles should be available in your theme\'s CSS file.','','none'),(12943,'A list of classes that will be provided in the \"Element CSS classes\" dropdown. Enter one or more classes on each line. These styles should be available in your theme\'s CSS file.','','none'),(12944,'Raw values, the raw value stored in the database (raw)','','none'),(12945,'The customized table has been saved.','','none'),(12946,'The customized table has been reset.','','none'),(12947,'Hexadecimal color','','none'),(12948,'Flexbox settings','','none'),(12949,'Align items','','none'),(12950,'Top (flex-start)','','none'),(12951,'Bottom (flex-end)','','none'),(12952,'Center (center)','','none'),(12953,'CC email','','10.4.7'),(12954,'BCC email','','10.4.7'),(12955,'Ethnicity','','10.2.3'),(12956,'Example: Flexbox layout','','none'),(12957,'Other elements','','10.4.5'),(12958,'Conditional logic','','10.4.7'),(12959,'Column header label delimiter','','none'),(12960,'Column header key delimiter','','none'),(12961,'Element info','','none'),(12962,'Add another state','','10.4.7'),(12963,'Conditional logic (Form API #states) is not an array.','','none'),(12964,'Options elements','','10.4.5'),(12965,'%name must be a valid date.','','none'),(12966,'@title days','','none'),(12967,'@title months','','none'),(12968,'@title years','','none'),(12969,'@title hours','','none'),(12970,'@title minutes','','none'),(12971,'@title seconds','','none'),(12972,'@title am/pm','','none'),(12973,'Date list settings','','none'),(12974,'@title [Date]','','none'),(12975,'Composite elements','','10.4.5'),(12976,'Flexbox','','none'),(12977,'Use Flexbox','','none'),(12978,'Entity checkboxes','','10.4.7'),(12979,'Entity radios','','10.4.7'),(12980,'Flexbox layout','','10.4.7'),(12981,'Send on','','none'),(12982,'Display collapse/expand all details link','','10.4.7'),(12983,'Submission Update','','none'),(12984,'Column name','','none'),(12985,'Additional name','','none'),(12986,'Default Google Maps API key','','none'),(12987,'Submission number','','none'),(12988,'The @title is not valid.','','none'),(12989,'Use Ajax','','10.4.7'),(12990,'Private file system is set.','','none'),(12991,'Private file system is not set.','','10.4.7'),(12992,'This must be changed in <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/documentation/modules/file\">settings.php</a>. For more information see: <a href=\"https://www.drupal.org/psa-2016-003\">DRUPAL-PSA-2016-003</a>','','10.4.7'),(12993,'Exporters','','10.5.6'),(12994,'Allow files to be uploaded to public file system.','','none'),(12995,'Results exporter','','none'),(12996,'Ignore disabled results warning','','10.4.5'),(12997,'Remote Post','','none');
